Copyright © 2023 NR. All rights reserved.

NR, the NR logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of NR Electric Co., Ltd. No NR
trademarks may be used without written permission. NR products appearing in this document may
be covered by P.R. China and foreign patents. NR Electric Co., Ltd. Reserves all rights and benefits
afforded under P.R. China and international copyright and patent laws in its products, including but
not limited to software, firmware and documentation. NR Engineering Co., Ltd. Is licensed to use
this document as well as all intellectual property rights owned or held by NR Electric Co., Ltd,
including but not limited to copyright, rights in inventions, patents, know-how, trade secrets,
trademarks and trade names, service marks, design rights, database rights and rights in data, utility
models, domain names and all similar rights.

The information in this document is provided for informational use only and does not constitute a
legal contract between NR and any person or entity unless otherwise specified. Information in this
document is subject to change without prior notice.

To the extent required the products described herein meet applicable IEC and IEEE standards, but
no such assurance is given with respect to local codes and ordinances because they vary greatly.

Although every reasonable effort is made to present current and accurate information, this
document does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor provide for every
possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Should
further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently
for your purposes, please do not hesitate to contact us.
 Preface

Preface

About This Manual

The setting guide will give instructions about the setting values of various functions (including the
protection, automation, control, and supervision functions) that is equipped with the device, mainly
in these aspects: brief introduction of the element, calculation principle of the element according to
the setting value related, and partial recommended value based upon domestic usage and
experience. However, the empirical value may not be fully applicable for the power system of other
country, it should be checked according to the practical requirements of local power system. All
settings are only a reference and are not used as final commissioning settings.

For these calculation results of settings for each function, they are calculated based on the
parameters provided by primary equipment manufacturer and system parameters from the field,
which should be confirmed based on on-site specific application and checked Iarefully.

Product Documentation Set

The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle is shown in the figure below.

DS SLG TM AM CPM OCM IMM CM STG

Planning

Ordering

Engineering

Installing

Commissioning

Operation

Maintenance

Disposal

The datasheet (DS) contains describes the control, protection, measurement and supervision

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay I

Date: 2023-02-09
Preface

functions with the information of relevant hardware for the device.

The selection guide (SLG) contains the explanation about the application option, the firmware
option, the software option, the hardware option and etc., and is instructive about how to order the
device based on expected configurations.

The technical manual I contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks, logic
diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per function. The
manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and
commissioning phase, and during normal service.

The application manual (AM) contains application descriptions and instructions on how to
engineer the device using the configuration tool PCS-Studio. The manual can be used to find out
when and for what purpose a typical protection function can be used. The manual also recommends
a sequence for the engineering of protection, control, measurement and supervision functions, HMI
functions as well as communication engineering.

The communication protocol manual (CPM) describes the communication protocols supported
by the device. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific implementations.

The operation and commissioning manual (OCM) contains instructions on how to operate and
commission the device. The manual describes how to identify disturbances and how to view
calculated and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault. The manual also
describes the process of testing the device in a substation which is not in service.

The installation and maintenance manual (IMM) contains instructions on how to install, maintain
and disposal the device. The manual provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation,
lifecycle maintenance and repairing, and scrap disposal when decommissioning.

The cybersecurity manual (CM) describes the process for handling cyber security when
communicating with the device. Certification, Authorization with role-based access control, and
product engineering for cyber security related events are described and sorted by function. The
guideline can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, commissioning phase,
and during normal service.

The settings guide (STG) contains instructions on how to calculate the device's settings of various
functions (including the protection, automation, control, and supervision functions) according to the
different system parameters and fault conditions.

Safety Information
This manual is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment
(module or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for personal
safety, as well as to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows
according to the degree of danger:

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will

result in death or serious injury.

II PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
0-03-28
 Preface

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may

result in minor or moderate injury or equipment damage.

Indicates that property damage can result if the measures specified are

not taken.

Important information about the device, product handling or a certain

section of the documentation which must be given particular attention.

Instructions and Warnings

The following hazard statements apply to this device.

Disconnect or de-energize all external connections BEFORE opening this

device. Contact with hazardous voltages and currents inside this device can
cause electrical shock resulting in injury or death.

Contact with instrument terminals can cause electrical shock that can result
in injury or death.

Use of this equipment in a manner other than specified in this manual can
impair operator safety safeguards provided by this equipment.

Have only qualified personnel service this equipment. If you are not qualified
to service this equipment, you can injure yourself or others, or cause
equipment damage.

This device is shipped with default passwords. Default passwords should

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay III

Date: 2023-02-09
Preface

be changed to private passwords at installation. Failure to change each

default password to a private password may allow unauthorized access. NR
shall not be responsible for any damage resulting from unauthorized access.

DO NOT look into the fiber (laser) ports/connectors.

DO NOT look into the end of an optical cable connected to an optical output.

DO NOT perform any procedures or adjustments that this instruction

manual does not describe.

During installation, maintenance, or testing of the optical ports, ONLY use

the test equipment qualified for Class 1 laser products!

Incorporated components, such as LEDs, transceivers, and laser emitters,

are NOT user serviceable. Return units to NR for repair or replacement.

Equipment components are SENSITIVE to electrostatic discharge (ESD).

Undetectable permanent damage can result if you do not use proper ESD
procedures. Ground yourself, your work surface, and this equipment
BEFORE removing any cover from this equipment. If your facility is not
equipped to work with these components, contact NR about returning this
device and related NR equipment for service.

Insufficiently rated insulation can deteriorate under abnormal operating

conditions and cause equipment damage. For external circuits, use wiring
of SUFFICIENTLY RATED insulation that will not break down under
abnormal operating conditions.

IV PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
0-03-28
 Preface

SEVERE power and ground problems can occur on the communications

ports of this equipment as a result of using non-standard cables. Use the
wiring method recommended in the manual for communication terminals.

DO NOT connect power to the relay until you have completed these
procedures and receive instruction to apply power. Equipment damage can
result otherwise.

Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than

those specified herein, may RESULT IN hazardous radiation exposure.

The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify

existing features, please MAKE SURE that the version of this manual is
compatible with the product in your hand.

The guide is not involving of the functions′ configuration and principle, and
the detailed description of relevant contents can be found in the
corresponding technical manual and application manual. Before carrying
out any setting work on the device, the user should be familiar with the
contents of this guide, and this guide must be thoroughly read and
understood.

Document Conventions

⚫ Menu path is connected with the arrow "→" and bold.

For example: the access path of protection settings is: MainMenu→Settings→Protection

Settings

⚫ Settings not in the table should be placed in brackets.

For example: the system setting [Opt_SysFreq]

⚫ Cross-references are presented in italics.

For example: refer to Figure 1.1-1, refer to Table 1.1-1, reference to Section 1.1

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay V

Date: 2023-02-09
Preface

⚫ Binary input signals, binary output signals, analogues, LED lights, buttons, and other fixed
meanings, should be written in double quotes and bold.

For example: press the button "ENT".

Symbols

AND Gate OR Gate

& & & >=1 >=1 >=1

2 inputs 3 inputs 4 inputs 2 inputs 3 inputs 4 inputs

OR Gate Comparator

>=2

2-out-of-3 2 inputs

Logic Input

BI xxx SIG xxx

Binary signal Input Signal input
SET xxx EN xxx
Setting input Enable input

Timer

10ms 2ms 0ms [Tset2]

Fixed delay pickup (10ms), fixed Settable delay pickup, fixed delay
delay dropout (2ms) dropout

[Tset1] 0ms [Tset1] [Tset2]

Fixed delay pickup, settable Settable delay pickup, settable

delay dropout delay dropout
Timer
t
t

Optional definite-time or inverse-

time characteristics

VI PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
0-03-28
 Preface

Primary Equipment

G M 52

Generator Motor Circuit breaker Disconnector

2-windings 3-windings Auto-

Reactor Capacitor
Transformer Transformer transformer
3CT
*
3VT

Current Voltage
Earth Bus
transformer transformer

Phase Label Corresponding Relationship

Basic
A, B, C L1, L2, L3 R, Y, B
AN, BN, CN L1N, L2N, L3N RN, YN, BN
ABC L123 RYB
U (voltage) V U

Example
Ia, Ib, Ic, I0 IL1, IL2, IL3, IN IR, IY, IB, IN
Ua, Ub, Uc VL1, VL2, VL3 UR, UY, UB
Uab, Ubc, Uca VL12, VL23, VL31 URY, UYB, UBR
U0, U1, U2 VN, V1, V2 UN, U1, U2

Warranty

NR can provide up to 10-year warranty for this product. For warranty details, please consult the
manufacturer or agent for more information.

Document Structure
This manual provides detailed instructions for setting the PCS-931S, which covers all functions,

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay VII

Date: 2023-02-09
Preface

such as protection, control, supervision, measurement, etc., and general device setup. Read the
sections that pertain to your application to gain valuable information about using the PCS-931S. To
concentrate on the target sections of this manual as your job needs and responsibilities dictate. An
overview of each manual section and section topics follows.

1 Introduction
Introduces summarizes functions and full view about the settings in the device.

2 Global Settings
Describs the access path, settings list (name, range, unit and step) of global settings, including
system setting, device setting, communication setting, disturbance fault recording setting, label
setting and clock synchronization setting supervision setting, and some important setting principles
are also provided.

3 Protection Settings
Describes the access path, settings list (name, range, unit and step) of protection settings. The
detailed setting calculation guidelines and the recommended value of some settings are also
provided. Some application examples are provided to help familiarize and understand the
calculation process, and to assist you with your own protection settings calculations.

4 Control Settings
Describes the access path, settings list (name, range, unit and step) of control settings. The detailed
setting calculation guidelines and the recommended value of some settings are also provided.

5 Measurement Settings
Describes the access path, settings list (name, range, unit and step) of measurement settings. The
detailed setting calculation guidelines and the recommended value of some settings are also
provided.

6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

Describes the access path, settings list (name, range, unit and step) of synchrophasor
measurement settings. The detailed setting calculation guidelines and the recommended value of
some settings are also provided.

7 Travelling-Wave Fault Location Settings

Describes the access path, settings list (name, range, unit and step) of travelling-wave fault location
settings. The detailed setting calculation guidelines and the recommended value of some settings
are also provided.

8 Supervision Settings
Describes the access path, settings list (name, range, unit and step) of supervision settings. The
detailed setting calculation guidelines and the recommended value of some settings are also
provided.

9 Logic Links

VIII PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
0-03-28
 Preface

Describes the access path, settings list (name, range, unit and step) of logic links. The detailed
setting calculation guidelines and the recommended value of some settings are also provided.

Document Revision History

PN: ZL_PCS-931S_X_Setting Guide_EN_Overseas General_X

Current version: R1.10

Corresponding Version
Release Date Description of change
Document Software

R1.00 R1.41 2021-02-02 ⚫ Form the original manual

⚫ Add multi-terminal current differential protection settings

⚫ Add thermal overload protection settings

⚫ Add flashover protection settings

R1.10 R1.90 2023-02-09 ⚫ Upadte the settings of travelling-wave fault location

⚫ Add AC analog input calibration settings

⚫ Add circuit breaker supversion settings

⚫ Update communication settings

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay IX

Date: 2023-02-09
Preface

X PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
0-03-28
 1 Introduction

1 Introduction
1
Table of Contents

1.1 Overview........................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Functions ......................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Settings Full-View .......................................................................................... 1-11

List of Figures

Figure 1.1-1 Typical application of single circuit breaker (single busbar)............................ 1-1

Figure 1.1-2 Typical application of single circuit breaker (double busbars) ........................ 1-1

Figure 1.1-3 Typical application of double circuit breakers ................................................... 1-2

Figure 1.1-4 Sampled analogue values from MU and conventional CT/VT .......................... 1-2

Figure 1.2-1 Functional overview of PCS-931S ........................................................................ 1-3

Figure 1.3-1 Full view of PCS-931S settings .......................................................................... 1-12

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 1-a

Date: 2023-02-09
 1 Introduction

1-b PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 1 Introduction

1.1 Overview

PCS-931S protect overhead and underground lines, feeders, and cables on all voltage levels with
1
highest possible selectivity. The availability of various protection and automation functions permits
its utilization in all domains of line protection. The devices contain all important auxiliary functions
that are necessary today for safe network operation. This includes control, measurement and
monitoring functions. The large number of communication interfaces and communication protocols
satisfies the requirements of communication-based selective protection and automation operation.
Its modular structure permits line protection devices always to be adapted flexibly to the individual
requirements.

3CT 3CT

52 * * 52

3VT 3VT

CH1 CH1
PCS-931S Optical fibre channel PCS-931S
CH2 CH2

1VT 1VT
Communication channel via direct dedicated fibre or MUX

Figure 1.1-1 Typical application of single circuit breaker (single busbar)

3CT 3CT

52
* * 52

1VT 1VT

CH1 CH1
PCS-931S Optical fibre channel PCS-931S
CH2 CH2

3VT 3VT

Communication channel via direct dedicated fibre or MUX

3VT 3VT

Figure 1.1-2 Typical application of single circuit breaker (double busbars)

PCS-931S is a high-speed transmission line differential relay featuring single-pole & three-pole
tripping and reclosing with synchronism check. The device features extensive metering & data
recording including high-resolution data capture and reporting. PCS-931S features expanded
control equation programming for easy and flexible implementation of custom protection and
control schemes.

PCS-931S can be configured to support single circuit breaker application or double circuit breakers
application by PCS-Studio. If the device is applied to double circuit breakers mode, all protection
functions related to the number of circuit breaker will be affected.

The PCS-931S is widely adopted not only for conventional substations, but also for digital
substations. It supports IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2 and provides GOOSE and SV network

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 1-1

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 1 Introduction

interfaces with high real-time performance. The process level network supports peer-to-peer (P2P)
mode and networking mode, including single network mode and dual network mode. The station

1 level network could also receive and send MMS messages (such as interlocking signals) or process
level GOOSE messages (such as circuit breakers or disconnectors positions and trip signals).

52 52
1VT 1VT

*
*

3CT 3CT

3VT 3VT

CH1 CH1
52 52
PCS-931S Optical fibre channel PCS-931S
CH2 CH2
3CT 3CT
*

*
1VT Communication channel via direct dedicated fibre or MUX 1VT

1VT 1VT
52 52

Figure 1.1-3 Typical application of double circuit breakers

The PCS-931S allow the use of digital quantities (SV sampled signals), conventional quantities
(wired analog signals) or mixed implementations in networking mode. Time synchronization is
available in the device by the external clock source.

Line 1 Line 2

Bus1_CB 3VT Tie_CB Low-power CT Bus2_CB

Bus1 Bus2
3CT (ECT)
52
52

52

MU

1VT

Ethernet switch External clock source

AC Module SV Module

PCS-931S

Figure 1.1-4 Sampled analogue values from MU and conventional CT/VT

1-2 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
-12-28
 1 Introduction

For the mixed mode, the digital quantities (SV sampled signals) is acquired 1
by CPU module and the conventional quantities (wired analog signals) is
acquired by analog input module. The sampling mode should be selected
according to the actual project application. If the mixed mode is selected,
SV sampled signals must adopt the networking mode, analog input module
must adopt 4CT/4VT (4 current inputs & 4 voltage inputs), and the external
clock source must be available. For voltage selection of the mixed mode,
the switched voltages must adopt the same sampling signal (SV sampled
signals or wired analog signals).

1.2 Functions
The functional overview of the device is shown in Figure 1.2-1.

Busbar

3VT

52
*

85 21L 67P 67G 67Q 32R 49P 50DZ 46BC 62P D 50BF 37 PMU 59P
3CT

87L 21D 50/51P 50/51G 50/51Q 50F SOTF 59Q

78 FR 27P

FL 59G

Data transmit/Rec eiv e TWFL 81O

81U 81R

87STB (Only for one and a half breakers arrangement)

1VT
25 79

Line

Figure 1.2-1 Functional overview of PCS-931S

1 Protection

ANSI Protection functions Remark

⚫ 2-terminal or multi-terminal lines application

87 Current differential protection ⚫ DPFC current differential element (2 stages)

⚫ Steady-state current differential element (2 stages)

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 1-3

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 1 Introduction

⚫ Neutral current differential element (1 stage)

⚫ CT saturation detection
1
⚫ Capacitive current compensation

⚫ Asymmetric propagation delay compensation for 2-

terminal current differential protection

⚫ Differential mode switch

⚫ Independent pilot zone (forward direction and reverse

direction, mho or quadrilateral characteristics)

⚫ PUTT, POTT, Blocking, Unblocking, Zone Extension

Pilot distance protection
⚫ Current reversal logic

⚫ Weak infeed echo or echo&trip

85 ⚫ Open breaker echo

⚫ Directional zero-sequence comparison element for pilot

scheme
Pilot directional earth-fault
⚫ PTT, Blocking and Unblocking
protection
⚫ Current reversal logic

⚫ Open breaker echo

⚫ Up to 6 zones

⚫ 3 independent phase-to-ground distance elements for

each zone

⚫ 3 independent phase-to-phase distance elements for

each zone

⚫ Selectable quadrilateral characteristics or mho

21L Distance protection
characteristics

⚫ Independent impedance settings and time delays for each

zone

⚫ Zero-sequence current compensation for phase-to-

ground distance element

⚫ Selectable forward direction, reverse direction or non-

1-4 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
-12-28
 1 Introduction

direction (except zone 1 that is fixed as forward direction)

⚫ Load encroachment for each zone

1
⚫ Power swing blocking and releasing for each zone

⚫ Faulty phase selection for each zone

⚫ Fixed forward direction

21D DPFC distance protection ⚫ High-speed operation

⚫ Supplementary for zone 1 of distance protection

78 Out-of-step protection ⚫ Easy to set and independent of system parameters

⚫ Up to 6 stages with independent logic

⚫ Voltage control element for each stage

⚫ Optional direction element for each stage, including

67P forward direction, reverse direction or non-direction

Phase overcurrent protection
50/51P ⚫ Optional definite-time characteristics and inverse-time

characteristics for each stage

⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage

⚫ Harmonic control element for each stage

⚫ Up to 6 stages with independent logic

⚫ Optional direction element for each stage, including

forward direction, reverse direction or non-direction

67G
Earth fault protection ⚫ Optional definite-time characteristics and inverse-time
50/51G
characteristics for each stage

⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage

⚫ Harmonic control element for each stage

⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic

⚫ Optional direction element for each stage, including

67Q Negative-sequence overcurrent forward direction, reverse direction or non-direction

50/51Q protection ⚫ Optional definite-time characteristics and inverse-time

characteristics for each stage

⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 1-5

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 1 Introduction

⚫ Via distance measurement elements

SOTF Switch onto fault ⚫ Via dedicated earth fault element

1
⚫ Via phase overcurrent element

⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic

49P Thermal overload protection
⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage

⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic

⚫ Optional definite-time characteristics and inverse-time

characteristics for each stage

59P Phase overvoltage protection
⚫ Optional phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage

⚫ Optional “1-out-of-3” logic or “3-out-of-3” logic

⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage

⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic

⚫ Optional definite-time characteristics and inverse-time

characteristics for each stage

⚫ Optional phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage

27P Phase undervoltage protection ⚫ Optional “1-out-of-3” logic or “3-out-of-3” logic

⚫ Blocked by instantaneous VT circuit failure

⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage

⚫ Optional auxiliary criterion, including CB position check

and current check

Negative-sequence overvoltage ⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic

59Q
protection ⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage

⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic

59G Residual overvoltage protection
⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage

⚫ Up to 4 stages with independent logic

81O Overfrequency protection ⚫ Voltage control element

⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage

⚫ Up to 4 stages with independent logic

81U Underfrequency protection
⚫ Voltage control element

1-6 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
-12-28
 1 Introduction

⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage

⚫ Up to 4 stages with independent logic

Frequency rate-of-change 1
81R ⚫ Voltage control element
protection
⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage

⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic

32R Reverse power protection
⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage

⚫ Optional auxiliary criterion, including CB position check

37 Undercurrent protection and current check

⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage

⚫ Phase-segregated re-trip and three-phases re-trip

⚫ Optional current check criterion (phase overcurrent

element, zero-sequence overcurrent element, negative-

50BF Breaker failure protection
sequence overcurrent element)

⚫ Optional contact check criterion

⚫ Two time delays

⚫ Protect the T-zone in one-and-a-half breaker and ring

87STB Stub differential protection
breaker arrangements

⚫ Clear the dead zone faults between CT and the circuit

50DZ Dead zone protection
breaker

⚫ Adopt the ratio of negative-sequence current to positive-

46BC Broken conductor protection sequence current (Ι2/Ι1) to detect the broken conductor.

⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose

⚫ Initiated by three auxiliary contacts of phase-segregate

circuit breaker
62PD Pole discrepancy protection
⚫ Optional auxiliary criterion (zero-sequence current

element or negative-sequence current element)

⚫ Optional current criterion (phase overcurrent element,

50F Flashover protection zero-sequence overcurrent element, negative-sequence

overcurrent element)

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 1-7

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 1 Introduction

25 Synchronism check ⚫ Independent logic for auto-reclosing and manually closing

⚫ One shot or multi-shot

1
⚫ 1-pole AR, 3-pole AR or 1/3-pole AR

79 Auto-reclosing ⚫ Optional trigger mode, including protection operating and

external binary input

⚫ Support synchro-check and voltage check

⚫ Compatible with IEEE C37.118-2005, IEEE C37.118.1-

PMU Phasor measurement unit
2011, IEEE C37.118.2-2011 and IEEE C37.118.1a-2014.

⚫ Single-ended impedance-based method

FL Fault location ⚫ Zero-sequence mutual coupling compensation for parallel

lines

⚫ Single-ended travelling-wave-based method

TWFL Travelling-Wave fault location
⚫ Double-ended travelling-wave-based method

DPFC is the abbreviation of deviation of power frequency component.

2 Control

⚫ Circuit breaker & disconnector control (Remote/local)

⚫ Synchronism check for auto-reclosing and manual closing

⚫ Voltage selection

3 Synchrophasor measurement

⚫ Synchronize with the GPS time by IRIG-B time source

⚫ Calculate synchronized phasors, including: Ua, Ub, Uc, U1, U2, U0, Ia, Ib, Ic, I1, I2, I0

⚫ Calculate analog values, including: active power (P), reactive power (Q), frequency,
ROCOF (df/dt)

⚫ Transmit binary status of the IED to PDC (Phasor Data Concentrator) according to IEEE
C37.118 standard

⚫ Realize high accurate measurement of the phasors and analogs according to the IEEE
C37.118.1-2011 and IEEE C37.118.1a-2014 standard.

⚫ Communicate with PDC according to IEEE C37.118-2005 and IEEE C37.118.2-2011

⚫ Supporting P Class or M Class measurement (user selectable)

1-8 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
-12-28
 1 Introduction

⚫ Measurement of up to 32 binary status (user configurable)

⚫ Output of synchrophasor with timestamp, support of multiple protocols (TCP, TCP-UDP,

UDP) and multiple data rates (2f0, f0, f0/2) for maximum 4 clients (PDC) 1
4 Measurement

⚫ Current and voltage measurement at a 2.4KHz sampling rate

⚫ Current and voltage measurement at a 9.6KHz sampling rate

⚫ Travelling wave current measurement at a 1MHz sampling rate

⚫ Energy metering (active and reactive energy are calculated in import respectively export
direction)

⚫ Power (Apparent/Real/Reactive)

⚫ Power factor

⚫ Frequency

⚫ Current, voltage and active/reactive power calibration

5 Recording

⚫ Event Recorder including 1024 disturbance records, 1024 binary events, 1024 supervision
events, 256 control logs and 1024 device logs.

⚫ 64 disturbance waveforms records (The file format of disturbance recorder is compatible

with international COMTRADE file.)

⚫ 64 travelling wave fault location (TWFL) records (The file format of disturbance recorder is
compatible with international COMTRADE file.)

⚫ 64 high-frequency waveforms records (The file format of disturbance recorder is

compatible with international COMTRADE file.)

6 Supervision

⚫ VT circuit supervision

⚫ CT circuit supervision

⚫ Trip/Close coil supervision

⚫ Self diagnostic

⚫ Pilot communication channel supervision

⚫ DC power supply supervision

⚫ Channel status statistic

⚫ System frequency supervision

⚫ Circuit breaker supervision (contact travel time, interrupted current, trip counter, remaining

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 1-9

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 1 Introduction

life, accumulated abrasion, etc.)

7 Pilot channel scheme

1 ⚫ Optional single- or dual- pilot channels (fiber optic)

⚫ Support G.703 and C37.94

8 Communication interface

⚫ 2 or 4 100Base-TX copper Ethernet ports for SCADA communication

⚫ 2 or 4 100Base-FX optical Ethernet ports for SCADA communication

⚫ 2 RS-485 serial ports for SCADA communication

⚫ Extendable 1000Base-SX optical Ethernet port for PRP and HSR

⚫ 1 RS-485 serial port for clock synchronization

⚫ 1 TTL serial port for clock synchronization

⚫ 1 BNC port for clock synchronization

⚫ 1 front RJ-45 port for debugging

⚫ 1 rear RJ-45 port for debugging

9 Communication protocol

⚫ IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2

⚫ IEC 60870-5-103

⚫ DNP3.0

⚫ Modbus

⚫ IEC 62439 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)

⚫ IEC 62439 High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR)

⚫ IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

10 Digital application

⚫ IEC 61850 MMS Server

⚫ IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE

⚫ IEC 61850-9-2LE SV

⚫ 4 100Base-TX electrical or 100Base-FX optical Ethernet port (station level)

⚫ Extendable 100Base-FX optical Ethernet port (process level)

⚫ Extendable 1000Base-SX optical Ethernet port (process level)

11 Clock synchronization

1-10 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
-12-28
 1 Introduction

⚫ IRIG-B: IRIG-B via serial port (RS-485 or TTL level) or BNC port (TTL level)

⚫ PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via serial port (RS-485 or TTL level), BNC port (TTL level)
or binary input 1
⚫ IEEE 1588: Clock message based on IEEE 1588 via Ethernet network

⚫ SNTP: Unicast (point-to-point) & broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network

⚫ Clock messages: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, Modbus protocol and DNP3.0 protocol

12 Cyber security

⚫ NERC CIP

⚫ IEC 62351

⚫ IEC 62443

⚫ IEEE 1686

13 User interface

⚫ Friendly HMI interface with LCD, easy-to-use keypad aids simple navigation and set-point
adjustment

⚫ Push buttons for open/close, switch for selection between local and remote control, and
user's login and logout authority management

⚫ 4 Programmable operator push-buttons with user-configurable labels

⚫ Up to 18 programmable target LEDs with user-configurable labels

⚫ 1 RS-232 rear ports for printer

⚫ Language switchover—English + selected language

⚫ Configuration tool—PCS-Studio

14 Miscellaneous

⚫ User programmable logic

⚫ Fault phase selection

⚫ Switching system phase sequences function (ABC or ACB)

1.3 Settings Full-View

The full view about the device's settings is summarized as

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 1-11

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 1 Introduction

Settings

Global Settings Shared settings for all setting groups

1 System Settings

Device Settings

Communication Settings

General Comm Settings

IEC61850 Settings

IEC103 Settings

DNP Settings

Modbus Settings

SV Settings

DFR Settings

Label Settings

ClockSyn Settings

Superv Settings

Prot Settings Independent settings for each setting group

FD Settings

Line Settings

Meas Control Settings

Function Settings

Syn Settings

DPS Settings

Control Settings

Interlocking Settings

AC Calbr Settings

Energy Metering Settings

SCBR Settings

TWFL Settings

PMU Settings

Logic Links

Function Links

GOOSE Send Links

GOOSE Recv Links

SV Recv Links

Figure 1.3-1 Full view of PCS-931S settings

1-12 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
-12-28
 2 Global Settings

2 Global Settings

Table of Contents

2.1 System Settings ............................................................................................... 2-1 2

2.1.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.2 Settings List .......................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 2-2

2.2 Device Setting .................................................................................................. 2-5

2.2.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 2-5

2.2.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 2-5

2.2.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 2-6

2.3 Communication Settings ................................................................................ 2-9

2.3.1 General Communication Settings ........................................................................................ 2-9

2.3.2 IEC61850 Communication Settings ................................................................................... 2-16

2.3.3 IEC103 Communication Settings ....................................................................................... 2-19

2.3.4 DNP Communication Settings............................................................................................ 2-22

2.3.5 Modbus Communication Settings ...................................................................................... 2-34

2.3.6 SV Communication Settings .............................................................................................. 2-34

2.4 Disturbance Fault Recording Settings......................................................... 2-36

2.4.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 2-36

2.4.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 2-37

2.4.3 Calculation Principle ........................................................................................................... 2-37

2.5 Label Settings ................................................................................................ 2-38

2.5.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 2-38

2.5.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 2-38

2.5.3 Calculation Principle ........................................................................................................... 2-38

2.6 Clock Synchronization Settings ................................................................... 2-39

2.6.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 2-39

2.6.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 2-40

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-a

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

2.6.3 Calculation Principle ........................................................................................................... 2-42

List of Tables

Table 2.1-1 System settings ....................................................................................................... 2-1

Table 2.2-1 Device settings......................................................................................................... 2-5

2 Table 2.3-1 General communication settings ........................................................................... 2-9

Table 2.3-2 IEC61850 communicaiton settings ...................................................................... 2-16

Table 2.3-3 IEC103 communication settings .......................................................................... 2-19

Table 2.3-4 DNP communication settings ............................................................................... 2-22

Table 2.3-5 Modbus communication settings ........................................................................ 2-34

Table 2.3-6 SV communication settings ................................................................................. 2-34

Table 2.4-1 Disturbance fault recording settings ................................................................... 2-37

Table 2.5-1 Label settings ......................................................................................................... 2-38

Table 2.6-1 Clock synchronization settings ........................................................................... 2-40

2-b PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

2.1 System Settings

2.1.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsSystem Settings 2

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalGlobal SettingsSystem Settings

2.1.2 Settings List

Table 2.1-1 System settings

Name Range Step Unit

Active_Grp 1~20 1

PrimaryEquip_Name Max 20 characters

Opt_SysFreq 50, 60 Hz

ABC
Opt_PhSeq
ACB

Prot.U1n 0.00~1100.00 0.01 kV

Prot.U2n 1.00~500.00 0.01 V

Prot.CB1.I1n 0~60000 1 A

Prot.CB1.I2n 1 or 5 A

Prot.CB2.I1n 0~60000 1 A

Prot.CB2.I2n 1 or 5 A

UB1.Syn.U1n 0.00~1100.00 0.01 kV

UB1.Syn.U2n 1.00~500.00 0.01 V

UL2.Syn.U1n 0.00~1100.00 0.01 kV

UL2.Syn.U2n 1.00~500.00 0.01 V

UB2.Syn.U1n 0.00~1100.00 0.01 kV

UB2.Syn.U2n 1.00~500.00 0.01 V

3I0Adj.I1n 0~60000 1 A

3I0Adj.I2n 1 or 5 A

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-1

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
Prot.CB1.En_RevCT
Enabled

Disabled
Prot.CB2.En_RevCT
2 Enabled

Disabled
3I0Adj.En_RevCT
Enabled

Disabled
Prot.En_VT
Enabled

NoVoltSel

DblBusOneCB

CB1.VoltSel.Opt_CBConfig 3/2BusCB1

3/2TieCB

3/2BusCB2

NoVoltSel

DblBusOneCB

CB2.VoltSel.Opt_CBConfig 3/2BusCB1

3/2TieCB

3/2BusCB2

2.1.3 Calculation Principle

1. Active_Grp

It is used to set the number of active setting group, and several setting groups (20 at most) can be
configured for protection settings and measurement & control settings, but only one is active at a
time.

The settings in different group can be changed to suit the needs of actual application. The default
settings have been chosen according to established practice but will usually require adjustment to
suit the requirements of individual applications.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2. PrimaryEquip_Name

It is used to set the name of the protected primary equipment, such as busbar, transformer, line,
capacitor, etc. It will be displayed in the printed result and the DFR (Disturbance Fault Recording)

2-2 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

file.

This setting is case sensitive, and its maximum permissible length of this setting is 20 characters.
All the allowed characters in this setting are listed as below:

A a B b C c D d E e F f

G g H h I i J j K k L l
2
M m N n O o P p Q q R r

S s T t U u V v W w X x

Y y Z z _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

3. Opt_SysFreq

It is used to set the system frequency. It can be set to either 50Hz or 60 Hz according to the system
frequency.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

4. Opt_PhSeq

It is used to inform the device of the actual system phase sequence, either "ABC" or "ACB". CT
and VT inputs on the device, labeled as A, B and C, must be connected to system phase A, B and
C for correct operation. This will affect positive/negative-sequence quantities calculated by the
device and will also affect functions that are dependent on phase quantities.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

5. Prot.U1n

It is used to set primary rated voltage of VT (protection voltage), and it should be set based on
phase-to-phase value.

6. Prot.U2n

It is used to set secondary rated voltage of VT (protection voltage), and it should be set based on
phase-to-phase value.

7. Prot.CB*.I1n

It is used to set primary rated value of CT corresponding to circuit breaker * (protection current, *=1
or 2).

8. Prot.CB*.I2n

It is used to set secondary rated value of CT corresponding to circuit breaker * (protection current,
*=1 or 2).

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-3

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

9. UB1.Syn.U1n

It is used to set primary rated voltage of busbar No.1 VT (synchronism voltage), and it should be
set based on phase-to-phase value.

10. UB1.Syn.U2n

It is used to set secondary rated voltage of busbar No.1 VT (synchronism voltage), and it should
2 be set based on phase-to-phase value.

11. UL2.Syn.U1n

It is used to set primary rated voltage of line No.2 VT (synchronism voltage), and it should be set
based on phase-to-phase value.

12. UL2.Syn.U2n

It is used to set secondary rated voltage of line No.2 VT (synchronism voltage), and it should be
set based on phase-to-phase value.

13. UB2.Syn.U1n

It is used to set primary rated voltage of busbar No.2 VT (synchronism voltage), and it should be
set based on phase-to-phase value.

14. UB2.Syn.U2n

It is used to set secondary rated voltage of busbar No.2 VT (synchronism voltage), and it should
be set based on phase-to-phase value.

15. 3I0Adj.I1n

It is used to set primary rated value of CT. (residual current for mutual coupling compensation)

16. 3I0Adj.I2n

It is used to set secondary rated value of CT. (residual current for mutual coupling compensation)

17. Prot.CB*.En_RevCT

It is used to adjust the current polarity of CT corresponding to circuit breaker *. (*=1 or 2)

Disabled: keep connected current polarity unchanged

Enabled: make connected current polarity reversed

18. 3I0Adj.En_RevCT

It is used to adjust residual current polarity from parallel line.

Disabled: keep connected current polarity unchanged

Enabled: make connected current polarity reversed

19. Prot.En_VT

It is used to enable/disable VT connect to the device, which is used for protection calculation.

2-4 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

20. CB*.VoltSel.Opt_CBConfig

It is used to select the configuration mode of circuit breaker *, and it should be set as "NoVoltSel"
if no voltage selection is adopted. (*=1 or 2)

NoVoltSel: no voltage selection

DblBusOneCB: one circuit breaker for double busbar

3/2BusCB1: bus 1 side circuit breaker for one and a half breakers
2
3/2TieCB: line side circuit breaker for one and a half breakers

3/2BusCB2: bus 2 side circuit breaker for one and a half breakers

2.2 Device Setting

2.2.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsDevice Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalGlobal SettingsDevice Settings

2.2.2 Setting List

Table 2.2-1 Device settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
En_DebugPort
Enabled

Disabled
En_TelnetPort
Enabled

Disabled
En_VirtualLCDPort
Enabled

Ctrl_Password 000~999 1

Disabled
En_NoCtrlPwd
Enabled

Disabled
En_PopupRecord_Blkd
Enabled

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-5

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Un_BinaryInput 24~250 1 V

DC

Opt_Pwr_BI AC50Hz

2 AC60Hz

U_Pickup_BI 50.0%Un~80.0%Un 0.1 %

U_Dropoff_BI 50.0%Un~80.0%Un 0.1 %

Mon_Window_Jitter 0.000~500.000 0.001 s

Num_Blk_Jitter 2~500000 1

Blk_Window_Jitter 0.000~500.000 0.001 s

Num_Reblk_Jitter 1~500000 1

Disabled
En_Jitter_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
En_BICheckInstP
Enabled

2.2.3 Calculation Principle

1. En_DebugPort

It is used to enable/disable the debugging port of this device, which is used for debugging tool
connection, program download, variable debugging, etc. via PCS-Studio configuration tool.

If all the unnecessary ports (including the debugging port) are required to be disabled to ensure
cyber security, please configure this setting as "Disabled".

2. En_TelnetPort

It is used to enable/disable the Telnet port of this device.

If the Telnet port needs to be used, please configure this setting as “Enabled”.

If all the unnecessary ports (including the Telnet port) are required to be disabled to ensure cyber
security, please configure this setting as "Disabled"'.

3. En_VirtualLCDPort

It is used to enable/disable the virtual LCD port of this device.

The virtual LCD port is used to simulate a virtual HMI to acquire device information via PCS-Studio
configuration tool. If all the unnecessary ports (including the virtual LCD port) are required to be
disabled to ensure cyber security, please configure this setting as "Disabled".

2-6 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

4. Ctrl_Password

It is used to set the password when executing the control operation via the device's LCD.

Only digits from "000" to "999" can be accepted. If the setting [En_NoCtrlPwd] is configured as
"Enabled", this setting will be invalid even if it is configured.

5. En_NoCtrlPwd

It is used to determine whether it is necessary to input the password when executing the control
2
operation via the device's LCD.

Disabled: it is necessary to input the password when executing the control operation via the
device's LCD.

Enabled: the control operation to switchgear (CB or DS) via the device's LCD can be directly
executed without the password verification.

6. En_PopupRecord_Blkd

It is used to enable/disable the blocking function to automatic pop up of event records.

If all the event records (including disturbance records, supervision events, IO events, control events,
etc.) are forbidden to pop up in the main graph of local LCD automatically, i.e.: they can only be
viewed by entering corresponding menus, please configure this setting as "Enabled".

7. Un_BinaryInput

It is used to set voltage level of binary input module.

It must be the same as the voltage level of the binary inputs which are connected to this device.

8. Opt_Pwr_BI

It is used to select power supply mode of binary input module.

Three options are available: DC, AC50Hz and AC60Hz. It must be the same as the power supply
mode of the binary inputs which are connected to this device.

9. U_Pickup_BI

It is used to set pickup voltage of binary input module.

This setting is expressed as a percentage value. It must be smaller than the minimum normal binary
input voltage of the binary inputs connected to this device. Base on engineering experience, it is
recommended to be configured as "63.0%".

10. U_Dropoff_BI

It is used to set dropoff voltage of binary input module.

This setting is expressed as a percentage value. It must be smaller than the value of the setting
[U_Pickup_BI] in this device. Base on engineering experience, it is recommended to be configured
as "55.0%".

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-7

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

11. Mon_Window_Jitter

It is used to set the monitoring window of binary input jitter processing.

In the time span defined by this setting, the state changes of binary input will be recorded. If the
binary input jitter processing is required, this setting must be configured as a value greater than 0.
When the setting [En_Jitter_Blk] is set as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

2 configured.

12. Num_Blk_Jitter

It is used to set the times threshold to block the state changes of binary input due to jitter.

If the binary input jitter processing is required, this setting must be configured as a value greater
than 0. If the setting [Mon_Window_Jitter] is modified to a bigger value, the setting [Num_Blk_Jitter]
is recommended to be modified to a bigger value, too. When the setting [En_Jitter_Blk] is set as
"Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured.

13. Blk_Window_Jitter

It is blocking window of the state changes of binary input due to jitter.

In the time span defined by this setting, the state changes of binary inpu will be recorded. If the
binary input jitter processing is required, this setting must be configured as a value greater than 0.
When the setting [En_Jitter_Blk] is set as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.

14. Num_Reblk_Jitter

It is times threshold to initiate immediately another blocking window of the state changes of binary
input due to continuous jitter.

If the binary input jitter processing is required, this setting must be configured as a value greater
than 0. If the setting [Blk_Window_Jitter] is modified to a bigger value, the setting
[Num_Reblk_Jitter] is recommended to be modified to a bigger value, too. When the setting
[En_Jitter_Blk] is set as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured.

15. En_Jitter_Blk

It is used to enable/disable the jitter processing function in case of binary input voltage variation.

If binary input jitter processing is required, please configure this setting as "Enabled".

16. En_BICheckInstP

It is designed to enable/disable the high-power conducting mode of binary inputs

If the binary input the rated voltage of binary input is 110Vdc or above is applied to acquire the
mechanical signal, for example, the binary signal from winding temperature relay, oil temperature
relay or Buchholz relay. The conducting mode of each binary input is switched into the high-power
mode to improve the anti-interference ability when the setting [En_BICheckInstP] is set as
"Enabled". The binary input will not be considered as being energized unless the instantaneous
active power rises to a certain value and during time is larger than 20ms, so as to avoid mistaken

2-8 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

signal.

This conducting mode is only available in the device equipped with some certain BI plug-in modules
(NR6604A or NR6611A) and the rated voltage of binary input is 110Vdc or above. Otherwise, this
conducting mode will be unavailable and this setting will be hidden.

When the setting [En_BICheckInstP] is set as "Enabled", and the debouncing time should be larger
than the during time (20ms) of the instantaneous active power.
2
2.3 Communication Settings

2.3.1 General Communication Settings

2.3.1.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsGeneral Comm Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalComm SettingsGeneral Comm Settings

2.3.1.2 Setting List

Table 2.3-1 General communication settings

Name Range Step Unit

IP_LAN1 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

Mask_LAN1 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

Disabled
En_LAN1
Enabled

IP_LAN2 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

Mask_LAN2 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

Disabled
En_LAN2
Enabled

IP_LAN3 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

Mask_LAN3 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

Disabled
En_LAN3
Enabled

IP_LAN4 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-9

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Mask_LAN4 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

Disabled
En_LAN4
Enabled

2 Gateway 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

4800

9600

19200
Baud_Printer bps
38400

57600

115200

Disabled
En_AutoPrint
Enabled

IEC103
Protocol_RS485-1
Modbus

IEC103
Protocol_RS485-2
Modbus

4800

9600

19200
Baud_RS485-1 bps
38400

57600

115200

4800

9600

19200
Baud_RS485-2 bps
38400

57600

115200

2-10 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Addr_RS485-1 1~254 1

Addr_RS485-2 1~254 1

Normal

B01.Grp01.Opt_NetMode
PRP 2
HSR

Bond

Normal

PRP

B01.Grp02.Opt_NetMode HSR

RSTP

Bond

IP_SyslogServer01 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

IP_SyslogServer02 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

IP_SyslogServer03 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

IP_SyslogServer04 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

t_Send_Heartbeat_Syslog 0~14400 1 min

Disabled
En_IP_Whitelist
Enabled

IP**_Whitelist 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

Disabled
En_ARP_Bind
Enabled

2.3.1.3 Calculation Principle

1. IP_LAN*

It is used to set IP address of Ethernet port * in the CPU plug-in module (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4. If the setting [En_LAN*] is configured as
"Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured. Please configure this setting
according to actual requirements.

2. Mask_LAN*

It is used to set subnet mask of Ethernet port * in the CPU plug-in module (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-11

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4. If the setting [En_LAN*] is configured as
"Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured. Please configure this setting
according to actual requirements.

3. En_LAN*

It is used to enable/disable Ethernet port * in the CPU plug-in module (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

2 Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

4. Gateway

It is used to set IP address of the gateway (router).

If there is no gateway, please configure this setting as "0.0.0.0". This setting adopts dotted-decimal
notation of IPv4.

5. Baud_Printer

It is used to set the baud rate of printer port.

It must be the same as the baud rate of the printer that is connected to this device.

6. En_AutoPrint

It is used to enable/disable automatic printing function.

When the setting is set as "Enabled", they will be printed automatically when the event records
(such as, disturbance records, supervision events, IO events, etc.) are generated.

7. Protocol_RS485-1, Protocol_RS485-2

It is used to set communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port 1 (2).

Two options are available:

IEC103: IEC60870-5-103 protocol

Modbus: Modbus protocol

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client (for example, local
SCADA system, etc.).

8. Baud_RS485-1, Baud_RS485-2

It is used to set baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port 1 (2) in the CPU plug-in module.

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client (for example, local
SCADA system, etc.).

9. Addr_RS485-1, Addr_RS485-2

It is used to set communication address of rear RS-485 serial port 1 (2) in the CPU plug-in module.

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client (for example, local
SCADA system, etc.).

2-12 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

10. B01.Grp01.Opt_NetMode

It is used to select the network method of the first group of ports (port 1 & port 2) of the CPU module
located in slot No.1. Four options are available, please configure this setting according to actual
requirements.

1) Normal

If this option is selected, Ethernet port 1 and Ethernet port 2 of the CPU module adopt "Normal" 2
mode. In the "Normal" mode, there is no data redundancy mechanism.

2) PRP

If this option is selected, Ethernet port 1 and Ethernet port 2 of the CPU plug-in module adopt adopt
"PRP" mode (IEC 62439-3 Parallel Redundancy Protocol) to realize data redundancy.

In the "PRP" mode, the data redundancy is realized in this way: the communication is performed
in parallel, i.e., the same data package is transmitted on both channels simultaneously. The
received package identity from one channel is compared with data package identity from the other
channel. If they are the same, the last package will be discarded.

3) HSR

If this option is selected, Ethernet port 1 and Ethernet port 2 of the CPU plug-in module adopt
"HSR" mode (IEC 62439-3 High-availability Seamless Redundancy) to realize data redundancy.

In the "HSR" mode, the principle of parallel operation to a single ring is applied to realize data
redundancy. For each message sent, the node sends two frames, one through each port. Both the
2 frames circulate in opposite directions over the ring. Every node forwards the frames it receives
from one port to another to reach the next node. When the originating sender node receives the
frame it sent, the sender node discards the frame to avoid loops.

4) Bond

If this option is selected, Ethernet port 1 and Ethernet port 2 of the CPU plug-in module are used
as hot standby each other to ensure reliable communication of dual networks (i.e., network 1 and
network 2). When both network 1 and network 2 are normal, any of them is used to communicate
between the device and SAS. The device will automatically switch to the other healthy network
when one network is abnormal, which will not affect normal communication.

Ethernet port 1 is connected to network 1 while Ethernet port 2 is connected to network 2, and the
switching logic is:

⚫ After the device is powered on, only Ethernet port 1 is activated when both network 1 and
network 2 are normal.

⚫ If network 1 is abnormal, Ethernet port 2 will be activated if network 2 is normal.

⚫ If network 1 is abnormal, Ethernet port 2 cannot be activated if network 2 is also abnormal.

The device will keep trying on Ethernet port 1.

⚫ If Ethernet port 2 is working, the device will maintain this state even if network 1 has been

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-13

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

restored to normal. It will be switched to Ethernet port 1 only if network 2 is abnormal.

11. B01.Grp02.Opt_NetMode

It is used to select the network method of the first group of ports (port 3 & port 4) of the CPU module
located in slot No.1. Five options are available, please configure this setting according to actual
requirements.

2 1) Normal

If this option is selected, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 of the CPU module adopt "Normal"
mode. In the "Normal" mode, there is no data redundancy mechanism.

2) PRP

If this option is selected, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 of the CPU plug-in module adopt adopt
"PRP" mode (IEC 62439-3 Parallel Redundancy Protocol) to realize data redundancy.

In the "PRP" mode, the data redundancy is realized in this way: the communication is performed
in parallel, i.e., the same data package is transmitted on both channels simultaneously. The
received package identity from one channel is compared with data package identity from the other
channel. If they are the same, the last package will be discarded.

3) HSR

If this option is selected, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 of the CPU plug-in module adopt
"HSR" mode (IEC 62439-3 High-availability Seamless Redundancy) to realize data redundancy.

In the "HSR" mode, the principle of parallel operation to a single ring is applied to realize data
redundancy. For each message sent, the node sends two frames, one through each port. Both the
2 frames circulate in opposite directions over the ring. Every node forwards the frames it receives
from one port to another to reach the next node. When the originating sender node receives the
frame it sent, the sender node discards the frame to avoid loops.

4) RSTP

If this option is selected, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 of the CPU plug-in module adopt
"RSTP" mode (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol).

In the "RSTP" mode, the data redundancy is realized in this way: RSTP serves for the
reorganization of the network structure in case of network path error. In other words, RSTP reroutes
the data to another path after the failure of a network path.

5) Bond

If this option is selected, Ethernet port 1 and Ethernet port 2 of the CPU plug-in module are used
as hot standby each other to ensure reliable communication of dual networks (i.e., network 1 and
network 2). When both network 1 and network 2 are normal, any of them is used to communicate
between the device and SAS. The device will automatically switch to the other healthy network
when one network is abnormal, which will not affect normal communication.

Ethernet port 1 is connected to network 1 while Ethernet port 2 is connected to network 2, and the

2-14 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

switching logic is:

⚫ After the device is powered on, only Ethernet port 1 is activated when both network 1 and
network 2 are normal.

⚫ If network 1 is abnormal, Ethernet port 2 will be activated if network 2 is normal.

⚫ If network 1 is abnormal, Ethernet port 2 cannot be activated if network 2 is also abnormal.

The device will keep trying on Ethernet port 1. 2
⚫ If Ethernet port 2 is working, the device will maintain this state even if network 1 has been
restored to normal. It will be switched to Ethernet port 1 only if network 2 is abnormal.

12. IP_SyslogServer**

It is used to set IP address of syslog server ** (**=01, 02, 03, 04), and the device can upload audit
log to syslog server. The setting is invalid unless cyber security is configured in the device. This
setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.

Syslog is a communication protocol for message logging, it is used for security auditing in this
device.

13. t_Send_Heartbeat_Syslog

It is used to configure the period to send the heartbeat messages to the syslog server. If the interval
between two data messages is more than the setting, the heartbeat message will be sent with the
time delay of this setting.

If this device is not required to send heartbeat messages to the syslog server, please configure this
setting as "0".

If this device is required to send heartbeat messages to the syslog server, please configure this
setting according to actual requirements.

14. En_IP_Whitelist

This setting is used to enable/disable the whitelist function of this device.

A whitelist is a list of IP addresses that are granted access to a certain system or protocol. When a
whitelist is used, all IP addresses are denied access, except those included in the whitelist. Please
configure this setting according to actual requirements

15. IP**_Whitelist

It is used to set No. ** IP address of the whitelist. (**=01...16) This setting is effective only when the
setting [En_IP_Whitelist] is enabled.

This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4. Please configure this setting according to
actual requirements.

16. En_ARP_Bind

It is used to enable/disable the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) binding function.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-15

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

The IP address is bound with the MAC address of this device when the setting is set as "Enabled".

2.3.2 IEC61850 Communication Settings

2.3.2.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

2 MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsIEC61850 Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalComm SettingsIEC61850 Settings

2.3.2.2 Setting List

Table 2.3-2 IEC61850 communicaiton settings

Name Range Step Unit

IEDNAME

Disabled
En_Send_MMS_Qual_Chg
Enabled

IEC61850
Opt_DualNetMode_MMS
GB32890

Pcnt_Deadband 0~100.00 0.01 %

Threshold_ZeroDrift 0.001~0.500 0.001

Disabled
En_IEC62351_TCP_Port
Enabled

Disabled
En_IEC61850_TCP_Port
Enabled

2.3.2.3 Calculation Principle

1. IEDNAME

It is used to set the identification of the device in IEC 61850 protocol.

It cannot be an empty string and shall be unique within an SCL file. Its length should be less than
20 characters comprising letters or digits or underline ( _ ). The setting must start with an alpha
character and it is case sensitive.

All the allowed characters in this setting are listed as below:

A a B b C c D d E e F f

2-16 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

G g H h I i J j K k L l

M m N n O o P p Q q R r

S s T t U u V v W w X x

Y y Z z _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 2
If this setting is modified, the IED name in the CID file of this device will be changed simultaneously
and vice versa.

It is recommended to configure this setting by SCD configuration in the PCS-Studio configuration

tool, and then download the new CID file to this device, i.e., it is not recommended to modify this
setting directly, so as to avoid inconsistence between "IEDName" in the CID file and the "IEDName"
in the SCD file.

As shown in the following figure, the length of the setting [IEDNAME] is also limited by the length
of "LDName":

Attribute“Inst”of the element“LDevic e”in the CID file of

[IED NAME]
this device

Length of LDName

In IEC 61850 Ed1: the length of "LDName" is not more than 32 characters.

In IEC 61850 Ed2: the length of "LDName" is not more than 64 characters.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2. En_Send_MMS_Qual_Chg

It is used to enable/disable the quality change upload function.

In GI (General Interrogation) or the integrity report to the communication client, or if the

communication client requests IEC 61850 MMS (Manufacturing Message Specification) qualities,
this device will update the qualities.

When the setting is set as "Enabled", and the "quality-change" attribute of "TrgOps" is enabled,
once any IEC 61850 MMS quality changes, this device will send the new quality spontaneously to
the communication client.

If the setting [En_IEC61850_TCP_Port] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be

unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

3. Opt_DualNetMode_MMS

It is used to select the MMS network communication mode with SCADA via network A and B of the

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-17

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

device.

Two options are available:

IEC61850: Network mode with IEC 61850 protocol. In this mode, the instances of Report Control
Block (RCB) cannot be shared, so different clients should use different report instances to send
reports. The "IEC61850" mode is preferred overseas.

2 GB32890: Network mode with GB32890 standard. In this mode, for different clients meeting the
redundancy conditions of A and B networks, if one client enables an RCB instance, the device will
only send a report to the enabled client. When the enabled client is interrupted, another redundant
client will cancel and re-enable the RCB instance, and the device will send a report to the re-
enabled redundant client. The "GB32890" mode is a special mode widely used in China, which
needs to be used with clients supporting.

If the setting [En_IEC61850_TCP_Port] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be

unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

4. Pcnt_Deadband

It is used to set the change detection threshold for suddenly sending measurement value to the
SCADA via the device's Ethernet port using IEC 61850.

Only when the measurement value change which is greater than this setting will be sent to the
communication client (e.g.: local SCADA system, etc.) via the device's Ethernet port by using IEC
61850. It is expressed as a percentage value.

If the measurement values sent to the communication client changed within a small range too
frequently, but the communication client needs to ignore these frequent changes, please set this
setting to a bigger value.

If the measurement values sent to the communication client are required to be more precise, please
set this setting to a smaller value.

If the setting [En_IEC61850_TCP_Port] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be

unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

5. Threshold_ZeroDrift

It is used to set measurement values zero drift suppression threshold.

For any measurement value which is sent to the communication client (for example, local SCADA
system, etc.) via the device's Ethernet port by using IEC 61850, if it is smaller than this setting, it
will be processed as "0".

If the measurement values sent to the communication client are relatively big, please set this setting
to a big value, so as to eliminate influence of zero drift.

If the measurement values sent to the communication client are relatively small, please set this

2-18 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

setting to a small value, so as to avoid too many measurement values being processed as "0"
mistakenly.

If the setting [En_IEC61850_TCP_Port] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be

unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

6. En_IEC62351_TCP_Port 2
It is used to enable/disable TCP port when using IEC62351 protocol.

To realize the station level IEC 62351 cyber security communication, please enable this setting and
configure certificate, private key, etc. of this device and corresponding IEC 62351 client.

If station level IEC 62351 cyber security communication is not required, please configure this setting
as "Disabled" to close the listening port of IEC 62351 protocol.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

7. En_IEC61850_TCP_Port

It is used to enable/disable TCP port when using IEC61850 protocol.

If station level IEC 61850 communication is not required, please configure this setting as
"Disabled" to close the MMS listening port of IEC 61850 protocol.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2.3.3 IEC103 Communication Settings

2.3.3.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsIEC103 Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalComm SettingsIEC103 Settings

2.3.3.2 Setting List

Table 2.3-3 IEC103 communication settings

Name Range Step Unit

Current_Language

Opt_Caption_103 Fixed_Chinese

Fixed_English

Disabled
En_Broadcast_LAN1
Enabled

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-19

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
En_Broadcast_LAN2
Enabled

Disabled
En_Broadcast_LAN3
2 Enabled

Disabled
En_Broadcast_LAN4
Enabled

DisturbData
Format_Wave_Sent
File

Pcnt_Deadband_Net 0~100.00 0.01 %

Period_Measmt_Net 0~65535 1 s

Disabled
En_103_TCP&UDP_Port
Enabled

2.3.3.3 Calculation Principle

1. Opt_Caption_103

It is used to select the language of group caption of IEC 60870-5-103 protocol and NR network 103
protocol.

It is recommended to be set as "Fixed_Chinese" if the device communicate with SCADA in

Chinese.

The standard application of IEC 60870-5-103 protocol adopts a twisted pair EIA-485 connection
over a distance up to 500m. This device also supports the NR network 103 protocol that is an
alternative to IEC 60870-5-103 and is applicable through Ethernet network.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2. En_Broadcast_LAN*

It is used to enable/disable broadcast of Ethernet port * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

This setting is only used for NR network 103 protocol. If NR network IEC103 protocol is used, the
setting must be set as "Enabled".

Disabled: the device does not send UDP (User Datagram Protocol) messages through Ethernet
port * (*=1, 2, 3, 4) of the CPU plug-in module.

Enabled: the device sends UDP messages through Ethernet port * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

If the setting [En_103_TCP&UDP_Port] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be

unnecessary to be configured.

2-20 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

3. Format_Wave_Sent

It is used to set the data format for sending waveform list using NR network 103 protocol.

Two optionsare available:

DisturbData: Send the waveform list in ASDU23 mode

File: Send the waveform list in ASDU222 mode

2
If both ASDU23 mode and ASDU222 mode are supported onsite, it is recommended to configure
this setting as "File", because the waveform list can be transmitted faster.

If the setting [En_103_TCP&UDP_Port] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be

unnecessary to be configured.

4. Pcnt_Deadband_Net

It is used to set the change detection threshold for suddenly sending measurement value to the
SCADA via the device's Ethernet port using IEC 60870-5-103

Only when the measurement value change which is greater than this setting will be sent to the
communication client (for example, local SCADA system, etc.) via the device's Ethernet port using
NR network 103 protocol. It is expressed as a percentage value.

If the measurement values sent to the communication client changed within a small range too
frequently, but the communication client needs to ignore these frequent changes, please set this
setting to a bigger value.

If the measurement values sent to the communication client are required to be more precise, please
set this setting to a smaller value.

If the measurement value change is not required to be sent to the communication client, please
configure this setting as "0".

If the setting [En_103_TCP&UDP_Port] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be

unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

5. Period_Measmt_Net

It is used to set the time period for sending the measurement value to the communication client (for
example, local SCADA system, etc.) via the device's Ethernet port by using NR network 103
protocol.

If this device is not required send all measurement values to the communication client
spontaneously based on the integrity period, please configure this setting as "0".

If the setting [En_103_TCP&UDP_Port] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be

unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-21

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

6. En_103_TCP&UDP_Port

It is used to enable/disable the TCP port and the UDP port when using NR network 103 protocol.

If NR network 103 communication is not required, please configure this setting as "Disabled" to
close the listening port of NR network 103 protocol.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2

When using NR network 103 protocol (network mode), al the settings in the
submenu MainMenu→Settings→Global Settings→Comm
Settings→IEC103 Settings need to be configued.

When using IEC 60870-5-103 protocol (serial connection mode), the

settings, [Opt_Caption_103], [Protocol_RS485-1], [Protocol_RS485-2],
[Baud_RS485-1], [Baud_RS485-2], [Addr_RS485-1], [Addr_RS485-2],
need to be configued.

2.3.4 DNP Communication Settings

2.3.4.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsDNP Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalComm SettingsDNP Settings

2.3.4.2 Setting List

Table 2.3-4 DNP communication settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
En_TCP1_DNP
Enabled

Addr_Slave_TCP1_DNP 0~65519 1

Addr_Master_TCP1_DNP 0~65519 1

IP_Master_TCP1_DNP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

Opt_Map_TCP1_DNP 0~4 1

t_AppLayer_TCP1_DNP 1~5 1 s

t_KeepAlive_TCP1_DNP 0~7200 1 s

2-22 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
En_UR_TCP1_DNP
Enabled

Disabled
En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP1_DNP
Enabled 2
Num_URRetry_TCP1_DNP 2~10 1

t_UROfflRetry_TCP1_DNP 1~5000 1 s

Class_BI_TCP1_DNP 0~3 1

Class_AI_TCP1_DNP 0~3 1

t_Select_TCP1_DNP 0~240 1 s

t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP1_DNP 0~3600 1 s

1-BISingleBit
Obj01DefltVar_TCP1_DNP
2-BIWithStatus

1-BIChWoutT

Obj02DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 2-BIChWithAbsTime

3-BIChWithRelTime

1-AI32Int

2-AI16Int

Obj30DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 3-AI32IntWoutF

4-AI16IntWoutF

5-AI32Flt

1-AI32IntEvWoutT

Obj32DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 2-AI16IntEvWoutT

5-AI32FltEvWoutT

1-AO32Int

Obj40DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 2-AO16Int

3-AO32Flt

Disabled
En_TCP2_DNP
Enabled

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-23

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Addr_Slave_TCP2_DNP 0~65519 1

Addr_Master_TCP2_DNP 0~65519 1

IP_Master_TCP2_DNP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

2 Opt_Map_TCP2_DNP 0~4 1

t_AppLayer_TCP2_DNP 1~5 1 s

t_KeepAlive_TCP2_DNP 0~7200 1 s

Disabled
En_UR_TCP2_DNP
Enabled

Disabled
En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP2_DNP
Enabled

Num_URRetry_TCP2_DNP 2~10 1

t_UROfflRetry_TCP2_DNP 1~5000 1 s

Class_BI_TCP2_DNP 0~3 1

Class_AI_TCP2_DNP 0~3 1

t_Select_TCP2_DNP 0~240 1 s

t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP2_DNP 0~3600 1 s

1-BISingleBit
Obj01DefltVar_TCP2_DNP
2-BIWithStatus

1-BIChWoutT

Obj02DefltVar_TCP2_DNP 2-BIChWithAbsTime

3-BIChWithRelTime

1-AI32Int

2-AI16Int

Obj30DefltVar_TCP2_DNP 3-AI32IntWoutF

4-AI16IntWoutF

5-AI32Flt

1-AI32IntEvWoutT
Obj32DefltVar_TCP2_DNP
2-AI16IntEvWoutT

2-24 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

Name Range Step Unit

5-AI32FltEvWoutT

1-AO32Int

Obj40DefltVar_TCP2_DNP 2-AO16Int

3-AO32Flt 2
Disabled
En_TCP3_DNP
Enabled

Addr_Slave_TCP3_DNP 0~65519 1

Addr_Master_TCP3_DNP 0~65519 1

IP_Master_TCP3_DNP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

Opt_Map_TCP3_DNP 0~4 1

t_AppLayer_TCP3_DNP 1~5 1 s

t_KeepAlive_TCP3_DNP 0~7200 1 s

Disabled
En_UR_TCP3_DNP
Enabled

Disabled
En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP3_DNP
Enabled

Num_URRetry_TCP3_DNP 2~10 1

t_UROfflRetry_TCP3_DNP 1~5000 1 s

Class_BI_TCP3_DNP 0~3 1

Class_AI_TCP3_DNP 0~3 1

t_Select_TCP3_DNP 0~240 1 s

t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP3_DNP 0~3600 1 s

1-BISingleBit
Obj01DefltVar_TCP3_DNP
2-BIWithStatus

1-BIChWoutT

Obj02DefltVar_TCP3_DNP 2-BIChWithAbsTime

3-BIChWithRelTime

Obj30DefltVar_TCP3_DNP 1-AI32Int

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-25

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

Name Range Step Unit

2-AI16Int

3-AI32IntWoutF

4-AI16IntWoutF

2 5-AI32Flt

1-AI32IntEvWoutT

Obj32DefltVar_TCP3_DNP 2-AI16IntEvWoutT

5-AI32FltEvWoutT

1-AO32Int

Obj40DefltVar_TCP3_DNP 2-AO16Int

3-AO32Flt

Disabled
En_TCP4_DNP
Enabled

Addr_Slave_TCP4_DNP 0~65519 1

Addr_Master_TCP4_DNP 0~65519 1

IP_Master_TCP4_DNP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

Opt_Map_TCP4_DNP 0~4 1

t_AppLayer_TCP4_DNP 1~5 1 s

t_KeepAlive_TCP4_DNP 0~7200 1 s

Disabled
En_UR_TCP4_DNP
Enabled

Disabled
En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP4_DNP
Enabled

Num_URRetry_TCP4_DNP 2~10 1

t_UROfflRetry_TCP4_DNP 1~5000 1 s

Class_BI_TCP4_DNP 0~3 1

Class_AI_TCP4_DNP 0~3 1

t_Select_TCP4_DNP 0~240 1 s

t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP4_DNP 0~3600 1 s

2-26 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

Name Range Step Unit

1-BISingleBit
Obj01DefltVar_TCP4_DNP
2-BIWithStatus

1-BIChWoutT

Obj02DefltVar_TCP4_DNP 2-BIChWithAbsTime 2
3-BIChWithRelTime

1-AI32Int

2-AI16Int

Obj30DefltVar_TCP4_DNP 3-AI32IntWoutF

4-AI16IntWoutF

5-AI32Flt

1-AI32IntEvWoutT

Obj32DefltVar_TCP4_DNP 2-AI16IntEvWoutT

5-AI32FltEvWoutT

1-AO32Int

Obj40DefltVar_TCP4_DNP 2-AO16Int

3-AO32Flt

2.3.4.3 Calculation Principle

1. En_TCP*_DNP

It is used to enable/disable TCP port * when using DNP protocol (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

If network DNP communication is not required, please configure this setting as "Disabled" to close
the listening port of the network DNP protocol.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2. Addr_Slave_TCP*_DNP

It is used to set the device's DNP address for the network DNP session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

It should be consistent with corresponding setting value of the communication client (for example,
local SCADA system, master station in control center, etc.) for the network DNP session *.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-27

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

3. Addr_Master_TCP*_DNP

It is used to set the DNP address of the master (i.e., the communication client) for the network DNP
session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client for the network
DNP session *.

2 If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

4. IP_Master_TCP*_DNP

It is used to set the IP address of the master (i.e., the communication client) for the network DNP
session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client for the network
DNP session *.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

5. Opt_Map_TCP*_DNP

It is used to configure the DNP communication point map for the network DNP session * (*=1, 2, 3,
4).

Five options are available, each of them corresponds to a communication point map pre-configured
by the PCS-Studio configuration tool.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

6. t_AppLayer_TCP*_DNP

It is used to set the timeout duration of the application layer for the network DNP session * (*=1, 2,
3, 4).

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client for the network
DNP session *.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

7. t_KeepAlive_TCP*_DNP

It is used to set the heartbeat time interval for the network DNP session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client for the network
DNP session *.

2-28 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

8. En_UR_TCP*_DNP

It is used to to enable/disable the UR (Unsolicited Response) message function for the network
DNP session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

For the network DNP session *, if the communication client requires this device to support sending 2
UR (Unsolicited Response) messages, please configure this setting as "Enabled".

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

9. En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP*_DNP

The setting is used to determine the mode of sending Class 1, 2, 3 events from the network DNP
session * to the communication client spontaneously (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

Enabled: the communication client must activate UR reporting by enabling unsolicited application
function (Function code: 20). After activation, the network DNP session * of this device begins to
send Class 1, 2, 3 events to the communication client spontaneously.

Disabled: this device will send Class 1, 2, 3 events spontaneously to the communication client for
the network DNP session *.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] or [En_UR_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will

be unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

10. Num_URRetry_TCP*_DNP

It is used to set the online retransmission number for sending the UR messages to the
communication client for the network DNP session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client for the network
DNP session *.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] or [En_UR_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will

be unnecessary to be configured.

11. t_UROfflRetry_TCP*_DNP

It is used to set the offline retransmission interval for sending the UR messages to the
communication client for the network DNP session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client for the network
DNP session *.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] or [En_UR_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will

be unnecessary to be configured.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-29

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

12. Class_BI_TCP*_DNP

It is used to select the default event class generated by the binary input points to the communication
client for the network DNP session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

Four options are available:

0: If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will NOT generate any event to
2 the communication client for the network DNP session *.

1: If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will generate class 1 events to
the communication client for the network DNP session *.

2: If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will generate class 2 events to
the communication client for the network DNP session *.

3: If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will generate class 3 events to
the communication client for the network DNP session *.

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client for the network
DNP session *.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

13. Class_AI_TCP*_DNP

It is used to select the default event class generated by the binary input points to the communication
client for the network DNP session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

Four options are available:

0: If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will NOT generate any event to
the communication client for the network DNP session *.

1: If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will generate class 1 events to
the communication client for the network DNP session *.

2: If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will generate class 2 events to
the communication client for the network DNP session *.

3: If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will generate class 3 events to
the communication client for the network DNP session *.

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client for the network
DNP session *.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

14. t_Select_TCP*_DNP

It is used to set the selection timeout duration of the remote control and the remote regulation for
the network DNP session * (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

2-30 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client for the network
DNP session *.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

15. t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP*_DNP

It is used to set the time interval of the time synchronization function for the network DNP session 2
* (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client for the network
DNP session *.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

16. Obj01DefltVar_TCP*_DNP

It is used to select the default variation for object group 1 ("Obj01") for the network DNP session *
(*=1, 2, 3, 4).

Two options are available:

1-BISingleBit: Binary Input (Single Bit)—packet format

If this option is selected, "Object group 1, variation 1" will be adopted to report the current value
of a binary input point. Variation 1 objects contain a single-bit binary input state without status flags.

2-BIWithStatus: Binary Input—With Status flags

If this option is selected, "Object group 1, variation 2" will be adopted to report the current value
of a binary input point. Variation 2 objects contain a status octet that includes the state of the binary
input.

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client for the network
DNP session *.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

17. Obj02DefltVar_TCP*_DNP

It is used to select the default variation for object group 2 ("Obj02") for the network DNP session *
(*=1, 2, 3, 4).

Three options are available:

1-BIChWoutT: Binary Input status Change event—Without Time

If this option is selected, "Object group 2, variation 1" will be adopted to report events related to
a binary input point. Variation 1 objects contain an octet for reporting the state of the input and
status flags.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-31

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

2-BIChWithAbsTime: Binary Input status Change event—With Absolute Time

If this option is selected, "Object group 2, variation 2" will be adopted to report events related to
a binary input point. Variation 2 objects contain an octet for reporting the state of the input and
status flags, and the absolute time when the event occurred.

3-BIChWithRelTime: Binary Input status Change event—With Relative Time

2 If this option is selected, "Object group 2, variation 3" will be adopted to report events related to
a binary input point. Variation 3 objects contain an octet for reporting the state of the input and
status flags, and the relative time when the event occurred. A preceding common time-of-
occurrence (CTO) object, group 51, establishes the basis of the relative time.

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client for the network
DNP session *.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

18. Obj30DefltVar_TCP*_DNP

It is used to select the default variation for object group 30 ("Obj30") for the network DNP session
* (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

Five options are available:

1-AI32Int: Analog Input—32-bit Integer with flag

If this option is selected, "Object group 30, variation 1" will be adopted to report the current value
of an analog input point. Variation 1 objects contain a flag octet and a 32-bit, signed integer value.

2-AI16Int: Analog Input—16-bit Integer with flag

If this option is selected, “"Object group 30, variation 2" will be adopted to report the current value
of an analog input point. Variation 2 objects contain a flag octet and a 16-bit, signed integer value.

3-AI32IntWoutF: Analog Input—32-bit Integer Without Flag

If this option is selected, "Object group 30, variation 3" will be adopted to report the current value
of an analog input point. Variation 3 objects contain a 32-bit, signed integer value.

4-AI16IntWoutF: Analog Input—16-bit Integer Without Flag

If this option is selected, "Object group 30, variation 4" will be adopted to report the current value
of an analog input point. Variation 4 objects contain a 16-bit, signed integer value.

5-AI32Flt: Analog Input—32-bit single-precision, Floating-point with flag

If this option is selected, "Object group 30, variation 5" will be adopted to report the current value
of an analog input point. Variation 5 objects contain a flag octet and a 32-bit single-precision,
floating-point value.

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client for the network
DNP session *.

2-32 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

19. Obj32DefltVar_TCP*_DNP

It is used to select the default variation for object group 32 ("Obj32") for the network DNP session
* (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

Three options are available: 2

1-AI32IntEvWoutT: Analog Input—32-bit Integer Event Without Time

If this option is selected, "Object group 32, variation 1" will be adopted to report events related to
an analog input point. Variation 1 objects contain a flag octet and a 32-bit, signed integer value.

2-AI16IntEvWoutT: Analog Input—16-bit Integer Event Without Time

If this option is selected, "Object group 32, variation 2" will be adopted to report events related to
an analog input point. Variation 2 objects contain a flag octet and a 16-bit, signed integer value.

5-AI32FltEvWoutT: Analog Input—32-bit single-precision, Floating-point Event Without Time

If this option is selected, "Object group 32, variation 5" will be adopted to report events related to
an analog input point. Variation 5 objects contain a flag octet and a 32-bit single-precision, floating-
point value.

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client for the network
DNP session *.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

20. Obj40DefltVar_TCP*_DNP

It is used to select the default variation for object group 40 ("Obj40") for the network DNP session
* (*=1, 2, 3, 4).

Three options are available:

1-AO32Int: Analog Output status—32-bit Integer with flag

If this option is selected, "Object group 40, variation 1" will be adopted to report the status of an
analog output point. Variation 1 objects contain a flag octet and a 32-bit, signed integer value.

2-AO16Int: Analog Output status—16-bit Integer with flag

If this option is selected, "Object group 40, variation 2" will be adopted to report the status of an
analog output point. Variation 2 objects contain a flag octet and a 16-bit, signed integer value.

3-AO32Flt: Analog Output status—32-bit single-precision, Floating-point with flag

If this option is selected, "Object group 40, variation 3" will be adopted to report the status of an
analog output point. Variation 3 objects contain a flag octet and a 32-bit single-precision, floating-
point value.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-33

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client for the network
DNP session *.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

2.3.5 Modbus Communication Settings

2 2.3.5.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsModbus Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalComm SettingsModbus Settings

2.3.5.2 Setting List

Table 2.3-5 Modbus communication settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
En_Modbus_TCP_Port
Enabled

1. En_Modbus_TCP_Port

It is used to enable/disable the TCP port when using Modbus protocol

If network Modbus communication is not required, please configure this setting as "Disabled" to
close the listening port of network Modbus protocol.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2.3.6 SV Communication Settings

2.3.6.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsSV Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalComm SettingsSV Settings

2.3.6.2 Setting List

Table 2.3-6 SV communication settings

Name Range Step Unit

SampleRate_SV 0~65535 1

2-34 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

Name Range Step Unit

t_Dly_Interp_Net_SV 1500~15000 1 μs

t_Dly_Interp_P2P_SV 600~1500 1 μs

NetMode
P2P
Opt_RecvMode_SV
Resv
2
None
4k_50Hz
Opt_MixedSmpl
4.8k_50Hz
4.8k_60Hz

Num_Point_Interp_MixedSmpl 3~7 1

t_Comp_Interp_MixedSmpl -100~100 1 μs

2.3.6.3 Calculation Principle

1. SampleRate_SV

It is used to set sampling rate of the received SV data from the merging units.

It must be the same as the sampling rate of the transmitted SV data of the merging units.

2. t_Dly_Interp_Net_SV

It is used to set the backward time delay of SV interpolation for networking mode. This backward
time delay is used to meet the data quantity & quality requirements by the SV interpolation.

Base on engineering experience, its value is recommended to be kept as the default value "2000μs".
Please consult our engineer if modification is required.

3. t_Dly_Interp_P2P_SV

It is used to set the backward time delay of SV interpolation for peer-to-peer (P2P) mode. This
backward time delay is used to meet the data quantity & quality requirements by the SV
interpolation.

Base on engineering experience, its value is recommended to be kept as the default value "850μs".
Please consult our engineer if modification is required.

4. Opt_RecvMode_SV

It is used to select SV receiving mode.

Three options are available:

NetMode: networking mode

If there is communication equipment (e.g., Ethernet switch, etc.) in the SV communication link,
please select "NetMode".

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-35

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

If "NetMode" is selected, all the devices must share the same clock source.

P2P: peer-to-peer (P2P) mode

If there is no communication equipment in the SV communication link, please select "P2P".

Resv: reserved

2 5. Opt_MixedSmpl

It is used to set sampling rate in mixed sampling mode. This setting is available only in mixed
sampling mode.

None: mixed sampling is disabled.

4k_50Hz: 4kHz SV sampling rate in 50Hz power system (i.e.: 80 samples in fundamental power
system).

4.8k_50Hz: 4.8kHz SV sampling rate in 50Hz power system (i.e.: 96 samples in fundamental power
system).

4.8k_60Hz: 4.8kHz SV sampling rate in 60Hz power system (i.e.: 80 samples in fundamental power
system).

6. Num_Point_Interp_MixedSmpl

It is used to set backward interrupt point number for mixed sampling mode (24 samples per cycle).
This setting is available only in mixed sampling mode.

If the setting [Opt_MixedSmpl] is configured as "None", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements. Its recommended value is 0.3A base
on engineering experience.

7. t_Comp_Interp_MixedSmpl

It is used to set the backward compensation time for the mixed sampling mode, so as to realize the
synchronization via tiny adjustment between SV sampling data and conventional sampling data in
the mixed sampling mode. This setting is available only in mixed sampling mode.

If the setting [Opt_MixedSmpl] is configured as "None", this setting will be unnecessary to be

configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements. Its recommended value is 0μs base
on engineering experience.

2.4 Disturbance Fault Recording Settings

2.4.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

2-36 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsDFR Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalGlobal SettingsDFR Settings

2.4.2 Setting List

Table 2.4-1 Disturbance fault recording settings 2
Name Range Step Unit

RecDur_PreTrigDFR 0.000~1.000 0.001 s

RecDur_PostFault 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

2.4.3 Calculation Principle

1. RecDur_PreTrigDFR

It is used to set the waveform recorded duration before the trigger element operates.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements:

⚫ If this setting is configured as a too big value, the waveform file size will be too large, and more
storage space and transmission bandwidth will be required.

⚫ If this setting is configured as a too small value, the waveform file may be insufficient for fault
analysis.

Base on engineering experience, this setting is recommended to be configured as "0.100s".

2. RecDur_PostFault

It is used to set the waveform recorded duration after the DFR trigger element drops off.

If there are 2 or more DFR trigger elements, this setting refers to the waveform recorded duration
after the last trigger element drops off.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements:

⚫ If this setting is configured as a too big value, the waveform file size will be too large, and more
storage space and transmission bandwidth will be required.

⚫ If this setting is configured as a too small value, the waveform file may be insufficient for fault
analysis.

Base on engineering experience, this setting is recommended to be configured according to the

DFR trigger mode.

Its recommended value is 0.100s for "Level trigger" (Including high-level trigger, low-level trigger).

Its recommended value is 1.000s for "Edge trigger" (Including falling-edge trigger, rising-edge

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-37

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

trigger, bilateral-edge trigger).

Its recommended value is 1.000s for the combination of "Level trigger" and "Edge trigger".

3. MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR

It is used to set the maximum waveform recorded duration after the trigger element operates.

2 If there are 2 or more DFR trigger elements, this setting refers to the maximum waveform recorded
duration after the 1st trigger element operates.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements:

⚫ If this setting is configured as a too big value, the waveform file size will be too large, and more
storage space and transmission bandwidth will be required.

⚫ If this setting is configured as a too small value, the waveform file may be insufficient for fault
analysis.

Base on engineering experience, this setting is recommended to be configured as "1.000s".

2.5 Label Settings

2.5.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsLabel Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalGlobal SettingsLabel Settings

2.5.2 Setting List

Table 2.5-1 Label settings

Name Range Step Unit

Bxx.Name_**_GCommLink Max. 30 characters

Bxx.Name_**_SVCommLink Max. 30 characters

2.5.3 Calculation Principle

1. Bxx.Name_**_GCommLink

It is used to set the user-defined part of GOOSE communication link** in the module located in slot
No.xx, and this user-defined part is designed to customize the GOOSE communication link name.
It will determine the corresponding part of the alarm signals, logic link settings, statistic data, etc.

The maximum permissible length of this setting is 30 characters, and this setting is case sensitive.

2-38 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

All the allowed characters in this setting are listed as below:

A a B b C c D d E e F f

G g H h I i J j K k L l

M m N n O o P p Q q R r

S s T t U u V v W w X x 2
Y y Z z _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2. Bxx.Name_**_SVCommLink

It is used to set the user-defined part of SV communication link** in the module located in slot No.xx,
and this user-defined part is designed to customize the SV communication link name. It will
determine the corresponding part of the alarm signals, logic link settings, statistic data, etc.

All the allowed characters in this setting are listed as below:

A a B b C c D d E e F f

G g H h I i J j K k L l

M m N n O o P p Q q R r

S s T t U u V v W w X x

Y y Z z _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2.6 Clock Synchronization Settings

2.6.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsClockSyn Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalGlobal SettingsClockSyn Settings

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-39

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

2.6.2 Setting List

Table 2.6-1 Clock synchronization settings

Name Range Step Unit

Conventional

2 Opt_TimeSyn SAS 1

NoTimeSyn

OffsetHour_UTC -12~12

OffsetMinute_UTC 0~60

IP_Server_SNTP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

IP_StandbyServer_SNTP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

Enabled
En_ConvModeSNTP
Disabled

Enabled
DST.En
Disabled

DST.OffsetMinute 0~255 1

Jan

Feb

Mar

Apr

May

Jun
DST.MonthInYear_Start 1
Jul

Aug

Sep

Oct

Nov

Dec

1st
DST.WeekInMonth_Start 1
2nd

2-40 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

Name Range Step Unit

3rd

4th

Last

Sunday 2
Monday

Tuesday

DST.DayInWeek_Start Wednesday 1

Thursday

Friday

Saturday

DST.HourInDay_Start 0~23 1

Jan

Feb

Mar

Apr

May

Jun
DST.MonthInYear_End 1
Jul

Aug

Sep

Oct

Nov

Dec

1st

2nd

DST.WeekInMonth_End 3rd 1

4th

Last

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-41

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Sunday

Monday

Tuesday

2 DST.DayInWeek_End Wednesday 1

Thursday

Friday

Saturday

DST.HourInDay_End 0~23 1

2.6.3 Calculation Principle

1. Opt_TimeSyn

It is used to select the clock synchronization mode of the device.

Three options are available:

⚫ Conventional

When the setting [Opt_TimeSyn] is set as "Conventional", the following clock synchronization
signals can be accepted by this device. However, if none of the following signals is received, an
alarm signal named “Alm_TimeSyn” will be issued, and the clock synchronization mode will
change to the "SAS" mode automatically.

IRIG-B: IRIG-B via serial port (RS-485 or TTL level) or BNC port (TTL level)

PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via serial port (RS-485 or TTL level), BNC port (TTL level) or binary
input

IEEE 1588: Clock message based on IEEE 1588 via Ethernet network

⚫ SAS

When the setting [Opt_TimeSyn] is set as "SAS", the following clock synchronization signals can
be accepted by this device. However, if none of the following signals is received, an alarm signal
named "Alm_TimeSyn" will be issued.

SNTP: Unicast (point-to-point) & broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network

Clock messages: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, Modbus protocol and DNP3.0 protocol

⚫ NoTimeSyn

If the clock synchronization function is not required, please select "NoTimeSyn", and the device
will not send time synchronization alarm signal.

2-42 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

The clock message via IEC103 protocol is INVALID when the device
receives the IRIG-B signal through RS-485 port.

2. OffsetHour_UTC

It is used to set the offset hour of local time from UTC. 2

The settings [OffsetHour_UTC] and [OffsetMinute_UTC] cooperate to determine the local time zone
of this device.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

3. OffsetMinute_UTC

It is used to set the offset minute of local time from UTC.

The settings [OffsetHour_UTC] and [OffsetMinute_UTC] cooperate to determine the local time zone
of this device.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

4. IP_Server_SNTP

It is used to set the IP address of the server when SNTP time synchronization mode is selected.

This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the SNTP server.

If there is no SNTP server, please configure this setting as "0.0.0.0".

5. IP_StandbyServer_SNTP

It is used to set the IP address of the standby server when SNTP time synchronization mode is
selected.

When device failed to connect the SNTP server, it will try to connect the standby SNTP server.

This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.

It must be the same as corresponding setting value of the standby SNTP server.

If there is no standby SNTP server, please configure this setting as "0.0.0.0".

6. En_ConvModeSNTP

It is used to enable/disable receive the SNTP message as the backup clock synchronization source
while hardware-based clock (IRIG-B, IEEE 1588 or PPS) is lost when the setting [OptTimeSyn] is
configured as "Conventional". However, the alarm "Alm_TimeSyn" will still be issued, so as to
indicate the failure of the conventional clock synchronization.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-43

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

7. DST.En

It is used to enable/disable Daylight Saving Time (DST).

8. DST.OffsetMinute

It is used to set the minute offset of DST, i.e. the difference between DST time and local time.

2 If the setting [DST.En] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

9. DST.MonthInYear_Start

It is used to set the month in year when daylight time starts.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

10. DST.WeekInMonth_Start

It is used to set the week in month when daylight time starts.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

11. DST.DayInWeek_Start

It is used to set the day in week when daylight time starts.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

12. DST.HourInDay_Start

It is used to set the hour in day when daylight time starts.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

13. DST.MonthInYear_End

It is used to set the month in year when daylight time ends.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

14. DST.WeekInMonth_End

It is used to set the week in month when daylight time ends.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2-44 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 2 Global Settings

15. DST.DayInWeek_End

It is used to set the day in week in when daylight time ends.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

16. DST.HourInDay_End
2
It is used to set the hour in day when daylight time ends.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as "Disabled", this setting will be unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 2-45

Date: 2023-02-09
1-12
 2 Global Settings

2-46 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
Date: 2020-12-28
 3 Protection Settings

3 Protection Settings

Table of Contents

3.1 Basic Parameter Calculation .......................................................................... 3-1

3.2 Fault Detector (FD) .......................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 3-2

3.2.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 3-2

3
3.2.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 3-2

3.3 Optical Pilot Channel (FO) .............................................................................. 3-3

3.3.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 3-3

3.3.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 3-3

3.3.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 3-4

3.4 2-Terminal Current Differential Protection (87L) ........................................... 3-6

3.4.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 3-6

3.4.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 3-7

3.4.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 3-8

3.5 Multi-terminal Current Differential Protection (87L) ................................... 3-15

3.5.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 3-15

3.5.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 3-16

3.5.3 Calculation Principle ........................................................................................................... 3-17

3.6 Pilot Distance Protection (85) ....................................................................... 3-21

3.6.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 3-21

3.6.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 3-21

3.6.3 Calculation Principle ........................................................................................................... 3-22

3.7 Pilot Directional Earth-fault Protection (85) ................................................ 3-26

3.7.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 3-26

3.7.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 3-27

3.7.3 Calculation Principle ........................................................................................................... 3-27

3.8 DPFC Distance Protection (21D) .................................................................. 3-29

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-a

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.8.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 3-29

3.8.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 3-29

3.8.3 Calculation Principle ........................................................................................................... 3-29

3.9 Distance Protection (21L) ............................................................................. 3-30

3.9.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 3-30

3.9.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 3-30

3.9.3 Calculation Principle ........................................................................................................... 3-43

3 3.10 Out-of-step Protection (78) ......................................................................... 3-63
3.10.1 Access Path ...................................................................................................................... 3-63

3.10.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................ 3-63

3.10.3 Calculation Principle ......................................................................................................... 3-64

3.11 Distance SOTF Protection (21SOTF) .......................................................... 3-65

3.11.1 Access Path ...................................................................................................................... 3-65

3.11.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................ 3-65

3.11.3 Calculation Principle ......................................................................................................... 3-67

3.12 Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51P) ..................................................... 3-69

3.12.1 Access Path ...................................................................................................................... 3-69

3.12.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................ 3-70

3.12.3 Calculation Principle ......................................................................................................... 3-79

3.13 Phase Current SOTF Protection (50PSOTF) .............................................. 3-87

3.13.1 Access Path ...................................................................................................................... 3-87

3.13.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................ 3-87

3.13.3 Calculation Principle ......................................................................................................... 3-87

3.14 Earth Fault Protection (50/51G) .................................................................. 3-89

3.14.1 Access Path ...................................................................................................................... 3-89

3.14.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................ 3-89

3.14.3 Calculation Principle ......................................................................................................... 3-97

3.15 Residual Current SOTF Protection (50GSOTF) ....................................... 3-105

3.15.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-105

3.15.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-105

3-b PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.15.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-105

3.16 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection (50/51Q) ............................. 3-106

3.16.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-106

3.16.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-106

3.16.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-109

3.17 Phase Overvoltage Protection (59P) .........................................................3-114

3.17.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-114

3.17.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-114 3

3.17.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-116

3.18 Residual Overvoltage Protection (59G) ....................................................3-119

3.18.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-119

3.18.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-119

3.18.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-120

3.19 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection (59Q) ................................. 3-121

3.19.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-121

3.19.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-121

3.19.3 Calcualtion Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-122

3.20 Phase Undervoltage Protection (27P) ...................................................... 3-123

3.20.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-123

3.20.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-124

3.20.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-126

3.21 Overfrequency Protection (81O) .............................................................. 3-129

3.21.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-129

3.21.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-129

3.21.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-130

3.22 Underfrequency Protection (81U)............................................................. 3-131

3.22.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-131

3.22.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-131

3.22.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-132

3.23 Frequency Rate-of-change Protection (81R) ........................................... 3-133

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-c

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.23.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-133

3.23.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-133

3.23.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-134

3.24 Reverse Power Protection (32R) .............................................................. 3-135

3.24.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-135

3.24.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-136

3.24.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-136

3 3.25 Thermal Overload Protection (49P) .......................................................... 3-137
3.25.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-137

3.25.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-137

3.25.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-138

3.26 Undercurrent Protection (37) .................................................................... 3-140

3.26.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-140

3.26.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-140

3.26.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-141

3.27 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) ............................................................ 3-142

3.27.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-142

3.27.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-143

3.27.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-144

3.28 Stub Differential Protection (87STB) ........................................................ 3-147

3.28.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-147

3.28.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-147

3.28.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-148

3.29 Dead Zone Protection (50DZ) ................................................................... 3-149

3.29.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-149

3.29.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-149

3.29.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-150

3.30 Broken Conductor Protection (46BC) ...................................................... 3-150

3.30.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-150

3.30.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-150

3-d PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.30.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-151

3.31 Pole Discrepancy Protection (62PD) ........................................................ 3-151

3.31.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-151

3.31.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-152

3.31.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-152

3.32 Flashover Protection (50F) ....................................................................... 3-153

3.32.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-153

3.32.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-153 3

3.32.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-154

3.33 Transfer Trip (TT) ....................................................................................... 3-155

3.33.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-155

3.33.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-155

3.33.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-155

3.34 Trip Logic (TRP) ......................................................................................... 3-156

3.34.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-156

3.34.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-156

3.34.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-157

3.35 Automatic Reclosure (79).......................................................................... 3-157

3.35.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-157

3.35.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-158

3.35.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-160

3.36 Impedance-Based Fault Location (FL) ..................................................... 3-167

3.36.1 Access Path .................................................................................................................... 3-167

3.36.2 Setting List ...................................................................................................................... 3-167

3.36.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................................... 3-168

List of Tables

Table 3.2-1 Fault detector settings ............................................................................................ 3-2

Table 3.3-1 Optical pilot channel settings ................................................................................ 3-3

Table 3.4-1 2-Terminal current differential protection settings .............................................. 3-7

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-e

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Table 3.4-1 Multi-Terminal current differential protection settings...................................... 3-16

Table 3.5-1 Pilot distance protection settings ........................................................................ 3-21

Table 3.6-1 Pilot directional earth-fault protection settings ................................................. 3-27

Table 3.7-1 DPFC distance protection settings ...................................................................... 3-29

Table 3.8-1 Distance protection settings ................................................................................ 3-30

Table 3.9-1 Out-of-step protection settings ............................................................................ 3-63

Table 3.10-1 Distance SOTF protection Settings ................................................................... 3-65

3 Table 3.11-1 Phase overcurrent protection settings .............................................................. 3-70

Table 3.12-1 Phase current SOTF protection settings .......................................................... 3-87

Table 3.13-1 Earth fault protection settings ........................................................................... 3-89

Table 3.14-1 Residual current SOTF protection settings .................................................... 3-105

Table 3.15-1 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection settings ..................................... 3-106

Table 3.16-1 Phase overvoltage protection settings ........................................................... 3-114

Table 3.17-1 Residual overvoltage protection settings ....................................................... 3-119

Table 3.18-1 Negative-sequence overvoltage protection settings ..................................... 3-121

Table 3.19-1 Phase undervoltage protection settings ......................................................... 3-124

Table 3.20-1 Overfrequency protection settings .................................................................. 3-129

Table 3.21-1 Underfrequency protection settings................................................................ 3-131

Table 3.22-1 Frequency rate-of-change protection settings ............................................... 3-133

Table 3.23-1 Reverse power protection settings ................................................................. 3-136

Table 3.24-1 Thermal overload protection settings ............................................................. 3-137

Table 3.24-1 Undercurrent protection settings .................................................................... 3-140

Table 3.25-1 Breaker failure protection settings .................................................................. 3-143

Table 3.26-1 Stub differential protection settings ................................................................ 3-147

Table 3.27-1 Dead zone protection settings ......................................................................... 3-149

Table 3.28-1 Broken conductor protection settings ............................................................ 3-150

Table 3.29-1 Pole discrepancy protection settings ............................................................. 3-152

Table 3.30-1 Flashover protection settings .......................................................................... 3-153

Table 3.30-1 Transfer trip settings ......................................................................................... 3-155

Table 3.31-1 Trip logic settings .............................................................................................. 3-156

3-f PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Table 3.32-1 AR settings ......................................................................................................... 3-158

Table 3.33-1 Fault location settings....................................................................................... 3-167

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-g

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3-h PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.1 Basic Parameter Calculation

For the setting calculation in relation to power system operating conditions, it shall base on the
usual operating conditions as its calculation reference. Usual operating conditions usually refer to
normal operating conditions or the maintenance case that adjacent line or a component protected
is out of service. For the system whose operating mode changes greatly, the operating conditions
which setting calculation refers to should be confirmed by dispatching department according to
specific cases.

For all the calculation equations listed in this instruction manual, the results including current,
voltage and impedance are all expressed in the form of secondary actual value, unless it is 3
specifically mentioned. Setting values of the line protection shall be transformed into secondary
side value before inputting in the relay.

Formulas for converting primary settings to secondary ones are shown as below:

1
⚫ 𝐼SEC = 𝐼PRIM ×
CT ratio

Where:

ISEC is the secondary current setting

IPRIM is the primary current setting

I1n
CT ratio = ( I1n : Primary rated current; I2n : Secondary rated current).
I 2n

1
⚫ 𝑈SEC = 𝑈PRIM ×
VT ratio

Where:

USEC is the secondary voltage setting

UPRIM is the primary voltage setting

U1n
VT ratio = ( U1n : Primary rated voltage; U2n : Secondary rated voltage)
U 2n

CT ratio
⚫ 𝑍SEC = 𝑍PRIM × VT ratio

Where:

Z SEC is the secondary impedance setting

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-1

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

ZPRIM is the primary impedance setting

All current settings, voltage settings and impedance settings are secondary
value converted from primary value by CT ratio and VT ratio.

Zero-sequence current or voltage settings are configured according to 3I0

or 3U0, negative-sequence current or voltage settings are configured
according to I2 or U2, and positive-sequence current or voltage settings are
3 configured according to I1 or U1.

3.2 Fault Detector (FD)

3.2.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsFD Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsFD Settings

3.2.2 Setting List

Table 3.2-1 Fault detector settings

Name Range Step Unit

FD.DPFC.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

FD.ROC.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

FD.NOC.I2_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

Disabled
FD.NOC.En
Enabled

3.2.3 Calculation Principle

1. FD.DPFC.I_Set

It is used to set current setting of DPFC current fault detector element.

It should be higher than maximum variation of load current and typically 0.2In. For line with heavy
load fluctuation like those for electric railway, rolling mill or aluminum-smelting, the setting should
be increased properly so that frequent pickup of the device could be avoided.

3-2 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

2. FD.ROC.3I0_Set

It is used to set current setting of residual current fault detector element.

It should be greater than maximum three phases unbalance current. All protection functions
relevant to zero-sequence current will be controlled by this setting. Therefore, it is the most sensitive
among all zero-sequence overcurrent elements.

The settings of fault detector element at both ends should be set based on
the same primary value.
3
3. FD.NOC.I2_Set

It is used to set current setting of negative-sequence current fault detector element.

It should be greater than maximum negative-sequence unbalance current. All protection functions
relevant to negative-sequence current will be controlled by this setting. Therefore, it is the most
sensitive among all negative-sequence overcurrent elements.

4. FD.NOC.En

It is used to enable/disable negative-sequence current fault detector element.

3.3 Optical Pilot Channel (FO)

3.3.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsRmt CommCh Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsRmt CommCh Settings

3.3.2 Setting List

Table 3.3-1 Optical pilot channel settings

Name Range Step Unit

FO.LocID 0~65535 1

FO.RmtID 0~65535 1

64
FO.BaudRate kbps
2048

FO.Protocol G.703

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-3

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

C37.94

FOx.Nx64k_C37.94 1-12 1

Ext
FOx.Opt_ClkSrc
Int

Disabled
FOx.En
Enabled
3 Disabled
FOx.En_Latch_Comp_AsymDly
Enabled

3.3.3 Calculation Principle

1. FO.LocID

It is used to set identity code of the device at local end.

The setting principle is same with the setting [FO.RmtID] which is shown as bellow.

2. FO.RmtID

It is used to set identity code of the device at remote end.

In order to ensure reliability of the device when digital communication channel is applied, settings
[FO.LocID] and [FO.RmtID] are provided as identity code to distinguish uniquely the device at
remote end using same channel.

Under normal conditions, the identity code of the device at local end should be different with that
at remote end. In addition, it is recommended that the identity code of all devices, i.e., the setting
[FO.LocID], should be unique in the substation. The setting range is from 0 to 65535.

⚫ Back-to-back connection directly or via multiplexers

The setting [FO.LocID] should be different between the local device and the remote device.

The local device's [FO.LocID] should be as same as the remote device's [FO.RmtID].

The end with greater [FO.LocID] is chosen as the master end for sampling synchronism, the other
end with smaller [FO.LocID] is slave end.

⚫ Loopback test

The device's [FO.LocID] should be equal to the device's [FO.RmtID].

The setting [FO.LocID] is packaged in the message frame and transmitted to the remote end. When
the [FO.LocID] of the device at remote end received by local device is same to the setting
[FO.RmtID] of local device, the message received from the remote end is valid, and protection
information involved in message is read. When these settings are not matched, the message is

3-4 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

considered as invalid and protection information involved in message is ignored, corresponding

alarms will be issued.

3. FO.BaudRate

It is used to set baud rate of the communication channel.

The communication rate can be set as 64kbits/s or 2048kbits/s.

For the dedicated optical fiber connection, both 64kbits/s and 2048kbits/s are suitable. But
2048kbits/s is recommended under this situation.

For the multiple connection with external communication equipment such as PCM or SDH, it should
be set as the requirement of communication equipment. 3
4. FO.Protocol

It is used to select protocol type, G.703 or C37.94

G.703 is the protocol which is used to define data frame transferred via physical/electrical
characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces.

C37.94 is the protocol which used to define data frame transferred via optical fiber interfaces.

For the dedicated optical fiber connection, both G.703 and C37.94 are suitable. And C37.94 is
recommended under this situation.

For the multiple connection with external communication equipment such as PCM or SDH, And
G.703 is recommended under this situation. By the way, the MUX equipment should be used as
photoelectric conversion device.

For double channels, if one channel uses dedicated optical fiber and the other channel uses
multiple connection, G.703 is recommended under this situation.

5. FOx.Nx64k_C37.94

It is the times of 64kbits/s, which is an N×64kbits/s standard defined by IEEE C37.94 standard.

If there is no special requirement for the external communication equipment, it is recommended to

set as 12.

6. FOx.Opt_ClkSrc

It is used to select the communication clock used by sampling synchronization in current differential
protection, internal clock or external clock.

Ext: external clock

Int: internal clock

The device can communicate in two modes via multiplex channel or dedicated optical fibre.

The device transmits and receives messages based on respective clocks, which are called transmit
clock (i.e. clock TX) and receive clock (i.e. clock RX) respectively. Clock RX is fixed to be extracted
from message frame, which can ensure no slip frame and no error message received. Clock TX

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-5

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

has two options:

⚫ Use internal crystal clock, which is called internal clock (master clock)

⚫ Use external clock (slave clock)

Depend on the clock used by the device at both ends, there are three modes.

⚫ Mode 1: Master-master mode (both ends use internal clock)

⚫ Mode 2: Slave-slave mode (both ends use external clock)

⚫ Mode 3: Master-slave mode (one of them uses internal clock, the other uses external clock)
3 If the device uses multiplex PCM/SDH channel, the setting [FOx.Opt_ClkSrc] at both ends should
be set accordingly.

⚫ The setting [FOx.Opt_ClkSrc] is recommended set as "Int" when the function, "Retiming", of
the communication equipment is disabled.

⚫ The setting [FOx.Opt_ClkSrc] is recommended set as "Ext" when the function, "Retiming", of
the communication equipment is enabled.

If the device uses dedicated optical fibre channel, mode 1 and mode 3 can be used. Mode 1 is
recommended in considering simplification to user, i.e. the setting [FOx.Opt_ClkSrc] at both ends
should be set as "Int".

7. FOx.En

It is used to enable/disable channel x.

8. FOx.En_Latch_Comp_AsymDly

It is used to enable/disable the asymmetric propagation delay compensation of channel x with the
frozen propagation delay time when the external clock is lost.

The setting is valid only for 2-terminal current differential protection.

3.4 2-Terminal Current Differential Protection (87L)

3.4.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsDiff Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsDiff Settings

3-6 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.4.2 Setting List

Table 3.4-1 2-Terminal current differential protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

87L.I_Pkp (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

87L.I_Alm (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

87L.I_Pkp_CTS (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

87L.K_Cr_CT 0.200~10.000 0.001

87L.I_Knee1 0.050~2.000 0.001 A

3
87L.I_Knee2 0.050~10.000 0.001 A

87L.Slope1 0.500~0.750 0.001

87L.Slope2 0.500~1.000 0.001

87L.t_Op_Neutral 0.040~100.000 0.001 s

87L.XC1L (40~60000)/In 1 Ω

87L.XC0L (40~60000)/In 1 Ω

87L.Z_LocReac (40~60000)/In 1 Ω

87L.Z_LocGndReac (40~60000)/In 1 Ω

87L.Z_RmtReac (40~60000)/In 1 Ω

87L.Z_RmtGndReac (40~60000)/In 1 Ω

Disabled
87L.En
Enabled

Disabled
87L.En_DPFC1
Enabled

Disabled
87L.En_DPFC2
Enabled

Disabled
87L.En_Biased1
Enabled

Disabled
87L.En_Biased2
Enabled

Disabled
87L.En_Neutral
Enabled

87L.En_InterTrp Disabled

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-7

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Enabled

Disabled
87L.En_LocDiff
Enabled

Disabled
87L.En_CapCurrComp
Enabled

Disabled
87L.En_CTS_Blk
Enabled
3
3.4.3 Calculation Principle

1. 87L.I_Pkp

It is used to set minimum pickup current setting of current differential protection.

It should be greater than the maximum unbalance current under the normal load conditions. If the
capacitive current is too big to be ignored, it should be considered. Considering the CT errors and
other measuring errors, additional safety margin should be also added. It also should consider the
sensitivity for the internal minmum fault. Normally, the corresponding primary current is
recommended to set as 400A~700A.

When the setting [87L.En_CapCurrComp] is set as "Disabled", the sensitivity will be decreased,
and the setting can be appropriately increased. The corresponding primary current is
recommended to set as 500A~800A.

Its typical value is 0.3A. (the secondary rated current is 1A)

The sensitivity can be checked based on the equantion below.

𝐼𝑝𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝐾𝑠𝑒𝑛 =
𝐾𝑐𝑡 × 𝐼_𝑠𝑒𝑡

𝐼𝑝𝑚𝑖𝑛 is the minimum phase current of the faulty point for an internal fault

𝐾𝑐𝑡 is the CT ratio factor.

𝐼_𝑠𝑒𝑡 is the calculated pickup setting of current differential protection.

𝐾𝑠𝑒𝑛 is the sensitivity coefficient.

The sensitivity coefficient should be greater than 4 (𝐾𝑠𝑒𝑛 ≥ 4).

2. 87L.I_Alm

It is used to set current setting of differential current abnormality alarm.

When the propagation delay of the channel is uncertain, so the currents at both ends cannot
accurately be synchronized. For large load current, larger differential current may be generated so
as to lead to undesired operation of current differential protection. Hence, differential current needs
to be supervised.

3-8 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

According to unbalanced differential current under load conditions, if differential current is greater
than the threshold value, the device will issue an alarm to indicate that differential current is
abnormal.

The threshold of discriminating differential current abnormality needs to cooperate with pickup
setting of current differential protection, at the same time it should be greater than unbalanced
current under normal conditions and also should be greater than the capacitive current.

Its recommended value is 0.1A (the secondary rated current is 1A).

3. 87L.I_Pkp_CTS

It is used to set current setting of differential protection when CT circuit failure.

3
When CT circuit fails, this pickup setting of current differential protection will be switched into
[87L.I_Pkp_CTS] if the setting [87L.En_CTS_Blk] is set as "Disabled".

If the setting [87L.En_CTS_Blk] is set as "Enabled", current differential protection will be blocked
even the differential current exceed the setting [87L.I_Pkp_CTS]. Generally, this setting should be
greater than the maximal load current to prevent the possible maloperation under heavy load
condition. Normally it is set as 1.3 times of the maximum load current. It reduces the sensitivity, but
the reliability is increased.

Its recommended value is 1A.

4. 87L.K_Cr_CT

It is used to set the factor of CT ratio.

If CTs' ratio at two ends of the transmission line is different, the currents be converted to one
reference value. Regarding local end as the referenced end, differential current and restraint
current can be calculated since the current of the opposite end is converted by the setting.
[87L.K_Cr_CT]. If the CT ratio on both ends are same, this setting should be set as "1" on both
ends, and its recommended value is 1.

IM1n and IM2n are primary rated current and secondary rated current of terminal M respectively

IN1n and IN2n are primary rated current and secondary rated current of terminal N respectively

The secondary rated current is considered internally, so only primary rated current should be
calculated.

Suppose CT ratio is as below, and then, IM1n is not less than IN1n

Terminal M Terminal N

𝐼𝑀1𝑛 𝐼𝑁1𝑛
𝐾M = 𝐾𝑁 =
𝐼𝑀2𝑛 𝐼𝑁2𝑛

𝐼𝑁1𝑛
[87L.K_Cr_CT]=1.00 [87𝐿. 𝐾_𝐶𝑟_𝐶𝑇] =
𝐼𝑀1𝑛

For example:

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-9

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Terminal M Terminal N

K M = 2500: 1 𝐾𝑁 = 1250: 5

[87L.K_Cr_CT]=1.00 [87L.K_Cr_CT]=0.50

5. 87L.I_Knee1

It is used to set current setting of knee point 1 for steady-state current differential element.

It should be greater than the restrained current corresponding to point A as shown in figure below.
The sensitivity and reliability should be considered, and the undesired operation for external fault
3 with CT saturation should be avoided.

The other values can be chosen in order to increase or decrease the sensitivity if there is other
calculation principle. If the result of the calculated setting exceeds the upper limit, then the setting
should be set as the upper limit.

Its recommended value is 0.5A. (the secondary rated current is 1A).

If the calculated value is out of the setting range, please set it as the upper
limit or the lower limit.

IDiffΦ

k=1
k2

k1
IH

IBiasΦ
A Knee1 Knee2

Where:

K1 and K2 are the slope setting [87L.Slope1] and [87L.Slope2] respectively.

Knee1 and Knee2 are the restraint current setting [87L.I_Knee1] and [87L.I_Knee2] respectively.

6. 87L.I_Knee2

It is used to set current setting of knee point 2 for steady-state current differential element.

It should be greater than the setting [87L.I_Knee1]. It is indicated in the figure as above. The
sensitivity and reliability should be considered, and the undesired operation for external fault with
CT saturation should be prevented.

Its recommended value is 2A (the secondary rated current is 1A).

3-10 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

If more reliability is required, the setting could be decreased, for example, 1A (the secondary rated
current is 1A). If more sensitivity is required, the setting could be increased accordingly. Because
the DPFC differential element can meet the sensitivity requirement, it is not recommended to
increase the setting too large. The setting is recommended not to exceed 2A (the secondary rated
current is 1A), and if the calculated value exceeds 2A, then the setting should be set as 2A.

If the calculated value is out of the setting range, please set it as the upper
limit or the lower limit.

7. 87L.Slope1 3
It is used to set the slope 1 of steady-state current differential element. It is indicated in the figure
as above.

The sensitivity and reliability should be considered, and the unwanted operation for external fault
with CT error should be prevented.

Its recommended value is 0.5.

If more reliability is required, the setting could be increased, for example, 0.6. Normally it should
be less than the setting [87L.Slope2]. Because the DPFC differential element can meet the
sensitivity requirement, it can not be less than 0.5.

The other values can be chosen in order to increase or decrease the sensitivity if there is other
calculation principle. If the result of the calculated setting exceeds the lower limit, then the setting
should be set as the lower limit.

If the calculated value is out of the setting range, please set it as the upper
limit or the lower limit.

8. 87L.Slope2

It is used to set the slope 2 of steady-state current differential element. It is indicated in the figure
as above.

The sensitivity and reliability should be considered, and the unwanted operation for external fault
with CT saturation should be prevented.

Its recommended value is 0.7.

If more reliability is required, the setting could be increased, for example, 0.8. If more sensitivity is
required, the setting could be increased, for example, 0.6. Normally, it should be greater than the
setting [87L.Slope1].

The other values can be chosen in order to increase or decrease the sensitivity if there is other
calculation principle. If the result of the calculated setting exceeds the lower limit, then the setting

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-11

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

should be set as the lower limit.

If the calculated value is out of the setting range, please set it as the upper
limit or the lower limit.

9. 87L.t_Op_Neutral

It is used to set the time delay for neutral current differential element.

Its recommended value is 0.04s.

3 10. 87L.XC1L

It is used to set positive-sequence capacitive impedance of the transmission line.

Its recommended value is 10000Ω (secondary value).

The setting principle is same with the [87L.XC0L] which is shown as bellow.

11. 87L.XC0L

It is used to set zero-sequence capacitive impedance of the transmission line.

If the setting [87L.En_CapCurrComp] is set as "Enabled", they should be set based on actual
parameters of the whole line (secondary value). If actual parameters are not available, the following
data can be used as a reference. The capacitive impedance and capacitive current of overhead
line per 100km based on different voltage class:

Voltage Class 87L.XC1L 87L.XC0L Capacitance current

220kV 3700Ω 5260Ω 34A
330kV 2860Ω 4170Ω 66A
500kV 2590Ω 3790Ω 111A
750kV 2242Ω 3322Ω 193A

If the setting [87L.En_CapCurrComp] is set as "Disabled", the setting will not be used in caculation.
They can be set as any value within their setting range.

If the transmission line is very short, then the capacitive current is very small, then there is no need
to compensate capacitve current. Its recommended value is 10000Ω (secondary value).

Its recommended value is 10000Ω. Normally, zero-sequence capacitive impedance must be equal
to or greater than positive-sequence capacitive impedance.

12. 87L.Z_LocReac

It is used to set impedance setting of reactor of the local end.

If shunt reactor is equipped with the local substation, it shall be set as the secondary value of shunt
reactor of local substation, otherwise, it can be set as "60000Ω" (the upper limit). When the logic
setting [87L.En_CapCurrComp] is set as "Disabled", this setting will not be used in the calculation
and can be set as any value within its setting range.

3-12 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

If the setting [87L.En_CapCurrComp] is set as "Enabled", and there is only one shunt reactor on
one end, then the setting on the other end which is not equipped with the reactor should be set as
the upper limit.

Its recommended value is 10000Ω (secondary value).

13. 87L.Z_LocGndReac

It is used to set the impedance setting of ground reactor of the local end.

If ground reactor is equipped with the local substation, it shall be set as the secondary value of
ground reactor of local substation, otherwise, it can be set as "60000Ω". When the logic setting
[87L.En_CapCurrComp] is set as "Disabled", this setting will not be used in the calculation and can
be set as any value within its setting range.
3
If the setting [87L.En_CapCurrComp] is set as "Enabled", and there is only one shunt reactor on
one end, then the setting on the other end which is not equipped with the reactor should be set as
the upper limit.

Its recommended value is 10000Ω (secondary value).

14. 87L.Z_RmtReac

It is used to set the impedance setting of reactor of remote line.

If shunt reactor is equipped with the remote substation, it shall be set as the secondary value of
shunt reactor of remote substation, otherwise, it can be set as "60000Ω". When the logic setting
[87L.En_CapCurrComp] is set as "Disabled", this setting will not be used in the calculation and
can be set as any value within its setting range.

If the setting [87L.En_CapCurrComp] is set as "Enabled", and there is only one shunt reactor on
one end, then the setting on the other end which is not equipped with the reactor should be set as
the upper limit.

Its recommended value is 10000Ω (secondary value).

15. 87L.Z_RmtGndReac

It is used to set the impedance setting of ground reactor of remote line.

If ground reactor is equipped with the remote substation, it shall be set as the secondary value of
ground reactor of remote substation, otherwise, it can be set as "60000Ω". When the logic setting
[87L.En_CapCurrComp] is set as "Disabled", this setting will not be used in the calculation and
can be set as any value within its setting range.

If the setting [87L.En_CapCurrComp] is set as "Enabled", and there is only one shunt reactor on
one end, then the setting on the other end which is not equipped with the reactor should be set as
the upper limit.

Its recommended value is 10000Ω (secondary value).

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-13

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

16. 87L.En

It is used to enable/disable current differential protection.

It is a general setting of current differential protection. Its recommended value is "Enabled".

17. 87L.En_DPFC1

It is used to enable/disable stage 1 of DPFC current differential element.

The precondition is that the setting [87L.En] is set as "Enabled". Its recommended value is
"Enabled".

3 18. 87L.En_DPFC2

It is used to enable/disable stage 2 of DPFC current differential element.

The precondition is that the setting [87L.En] is set as "Enabled". Its recommended value is
"Enabled".

19. 87L.En_Biased1

It is used to enable/disable stage 1 of steady-state current differential element.

The precondition is that the setting [87L.En] is set as "Enabled". Its recommended value is
"Enabled".

20. 87L.En_Biased2

It is used to enable/disable stage 2 of steady-state current differential element.

The precondition is that the setting [87L.En] is set as "Enabled". Its recommended value is
"Enabled".

21. 87L.En_Neutral

It is used to enable/disable neutral current differential element.

The precondition is that the setting [87L.En] is set as "Enabled". Its recommended value is
"Enabled".

22. 87L.En_InterTrp

It is used to enable/disable current differential inter-tripping element.

The precondition is that the setting [87L.En] is set as "Enabled". Its recommended value is
"Enabled".

When a fault associated with high resistance occurs in the outlet of long transmission line, the
device of local end, which is near the fault, can pick up immediately, but, considering the influence
of a considerable power source, the device of the remote end, which is far from the fault, cannot
pick up due to inapparent fault component. In order to avoid this case, any protection (such as
distance protection, overcurrent protection and etc.) of local end operates, inter-trip signal of
corresponding phase will be sent to the remote end. After receiving the inter-trip signal, the device
of the remote end can pick up, if corresponding basic differential condition is met and the setting

3-14 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

[87L.En_InterTrp] is set as "Enabled", the faulty phase will be inter-tripped. This setting is generally
set as "Enabled".

23. 87L.En_LocDiff

It is used to enable/disable local independent current differential protection.

If the setting [87L.En_LocDiff] is set as "Enabled", then independent current differential protection
is enabled which means local current differential protection can operate without permissive signal
from remote end.

When CT circuit failure occurs at one end, FD and current differential protection on the end may
operate. However, FD on the other end will not operate and not send any permissive signal of
current differential protection. Therefore, the current differential protection will not maloperate.
3
If the operation is not allowed for differential protection during CT circuit failure under normal
condition, then [87L.En_LocDiff] should be set as "Disabled".

24. 87L.En_CapCurrComp

It is used to enable/disable capacitive current compensation for current differential protection.

If the capacitive current should be compensated to increase the sensitivity, it should be set as
"Enabled".

25. 87L.En_CTS_Blk

It is used to enable/disable current differential protection blocked during CT circuit failure.

If CT circuit failure associated with internal fault or pickup due to system disturbance is detected,
the device will show two kinds of behavior.

If logic setting [87L.En_CTS_Blk] (differential protection being blocked during CT circuit failure) is
set as "Enabled", the current differential protection will be blocked.

If logic setting [87L.En_CTS_Blk] is set as "Disabled" and the current differential current of the
faulty phase is more than the differential current setting [87L.I_Pkp_CTS] during CT circuit failure,
the current differential protection will operate.

3.5 Multi-terminal Current Differential Protection (87L)

3.5.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsDiff Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsDiff Settings

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-15

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.5.2 Setting List

Table 3.5-1 Multi-Terminal current differential protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

Master Mode

87L.I_Pkp (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

87L.I_Alm (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

87L.I_Pkp_CTS (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

3 87L.K_Cr_CT 0.200~10.000 0.001

87L.t_Op_Neutral 0.040~10.000 0.001 s

Disabled
87L.En
Enabled

Disabled
87L.En_DPFC1
Enabled

Disabled
87L.En_DPFC2
Enabled

Disabled
87L.En_Biased1
Enabled

Disabled
87L.En_Biased2
Enabled

Disabled
87L.En_Neutral
Enabled

Disabled
87L.InterTrp
Enabled

Disabled
87L.En_LocDiff
Enabled

Disabled
87L.En_CTS_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
87L.En_Chx
Enabled

Slave Mode

87L.K_Cr_CT 0.200~10.000 0.001

Disabled
87L.En
Enabled

3-16 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
87L.En_Chx
Enabled

3.5.3 Calculation Principle

Master Mode

1. 87L.I_Pkp

It is used to set minimum pickup current setting of current differential protection.

It should be greater than the maximum unbalance current under the normal load conditions. If the 3
capacitive current is too big to be ignored, it should be considered. Considering the CT errors and
other measuring errors, additional safety margin should be also added. Normally, the corresponding
primary current is recommended to set as 400A~700A.

Its typical value is 0.3A (the secondary rated current is 1A).

2. 87L.I_Alm

It is used to set current setting of differential current abnormality alarm.

When the propagation delay of the channel is uncertain, so the currents at both ends cannot
accurately be synchronized. For large load current, larger differential current may be generated to
lead to undesired operation of current differential protection. Hence, differential current needs to be
supervised.

According to unbalanced differential current under load conditions, if differential current is greater
than the threshold value, the device will issue an alarm to indicate that differential current is
abnormal.

The threshold of discriminating differential current abnormality needs to cooperate with pickup
setting of current differential protection, at the same time it should be greater than unbalanced
current under normal conditions.

Its recommended value is 0.3A (the secondary rated current is 1A).

3. 87L.I_Pkp_CTS

It is used to set current setting of differential protection when CT circuit failure.

When CT circuit fails, this pickup setting of current differential protection will be switched into
[87L.I_Pkp_CTS] if the setting [87L.En_CTS_Blk] is set as "Disabled".

If the setting [87L.En_CTS_Blk] is set as "Enabled", current differential protection will be blocked
even the differential current exceed the setting [87L.I_Pkp_CTS]. Generally, this setting should be
greater than the maximal load current to prevent the possible maloperation under heavy load
condition. It reduces the sensitivity, but the reliability is increased.

Its recommended value is 1A.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-17

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

4. 87L.K_Cr_CT

It is used to set the factor of CT ratio.

If all CT ratio of the multi-terminal transmission line are not same, the currents be converted to one
reference value. Regarding local end as the referenced end, differential current and restraint
current can be calculated since the current of the other end is converted by the setting.
[87L.K_Cr_CT]. If all CT ratio are same, this setting should be set as "1" on all ends, and its
recommended value is 1.

Take three terminal line for example.

3 IM1n and IM2n are primary rated current and secondary rated current of terminal M respectively

IN1n and IN2n are primary rated current and secondary rated current of terminal N respectively

IQ1q and IQ2q are primary rated current and secondary rated current of terminal Q respectively

The secondary rated current is considered internally, so only primary rated current should be
calculated.

Suppose CT ratio is as below, and IM1n is the max primary value among them, then the CT ratio
factor [87L.K_Cr_CT] can be calculated according to the equition in the table.

Terminal M Terminal N Terminal Q

𝐼𝑀1𝑛 𝐼𝑁1𝑛 𝐼𝑄1𝑞

𝐾M = 𝐾𝑁 = 𝐾𝑄 =
𝐼𝑀2𝑛 𝐼𝑁2𝑛 𝐼𝑄2𝑞

𝐼𝑁1𝑛 𝐼𝑄1𝑞
[87L.K_Cr_CT]=1.00 [87𝐿. 𝐾_𝐶𝑟_𝐶𝑇] = [87𝐿. 𝐾_𝐶𝑟_𝐶𝑇] =
𝐼𝑀1𝑛 𝐼𝑀1𝑛

For example:

Terminal M Terminal N Terminal Q

K M = 2500: 1 𝐾𝑁 = 1250: 5 𝐾𝑁 = 1000: 1

[87L.K_Cr_CT]=1.00 [87L.K_Cr_CT]=0.50 [87L.K_Cr_CT]=0.40

5. 87L.t_Op_Neutral

It is used to set the time delay for neutral current differential element.

Its recommended value is 0.04s

6. 87L.En

It is used to enable/disable current differential protection.

Its recommended value is "Enabled".

7. 87L.En_DPFC1

It is used to enable/disable stage 1 of DPFC current differential element.

3-18 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

The precondition is that the setting [87L.En] is set as "Enabled". Its recommended value is
"Enabled".

8. 87L.En_DPFC2

It is used to enable/disable stage 2 of DPFC current differential element.

The precondition is that the setting [87L.En] is set as "Enabled". Its recommended value is
"Enabled".

9. 87L.En_Biased1

It is used to enable/disable stage 1 of steady-state current differential element.

The precondition is that the setting [87L.En] is set as "Enabled". Its recommended value is
3
"Enabled".

10. 87L.En_Biased2

It is used to enable/disable stage 2 of steady-state current differential element.

The precondition is that the setting [87L.En] is set as "Enabled". Its recommended value is
"Enabled".

11. 87L.En_Neutral

It is used to enable/disable neutral current differential element.

The precondition is that the setting [87L.En] is set as "Enabled". Its recommended value is
"Enabled".

12. 87L.InterTrp

It is used to enable/disable inter-tripping element.

The precondition is that the setting [87L.En] is set as "Enabled". Its recommended value is
"Enabled".

When a fault associated with high resistance occurs in the outlet of long transmission line, the
device of local end, which is near the fault, can pick up immediately, but, considering the influence
of a considerable power source, the device of the remote end, which is far from the fault, cannot
pick up due to inapparent fault component. In order to avoid this case, any protection (such as
distance protection, overcurrent protection etc.) of local end operates, inter-trip signal of
corresponding phase will be sent to the remote end. After receiving the inter-trip signal, the device
of the remote end can pick up, if corresponding basic differential condition is met and the setting
[87L.En_InterTrp] is set as "Enabled", the faulty phase will be inter-tripped. This setting is generally
set as "Enabled".

13. 87L.En_LocDiff

It is used to enable/disable local independent current differential protection. (independent current

differential protection means local current differential protection can operate without permissive
signal from remote end)

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-19

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

If the setting [87L.En_LocDiff] is set as "Enabled", then independent current differential protection
is enabled which means local current differential protection can operate without permissive signal
from remote end.

When CT circuit failure occurs at one end, FD and current differential protection on the end may
operate. However, FD on the other end will not operate and not send any permissive signal of
current differential protection. Therefore, the current differential protection will not maloperate.

If the operation is not allowed for current differential protection during CT circuit failure under normal
condition, then [87L.En_LocDiff] should be set as "Disabled".

14. 87L.En_CTS_Blk
3 It is used to enable/disable current differential protection blocked during CT circuit failure.

If CT circuit failure associated with internal fault or pickup due to system disturbance is detected,
the device will show two kinds of behavior.

If logic setting [87L.En_CTS_Blk] (differential protection being blocked during CT circuit failure) is
set as "Enabled", the current differential protection will be blocked.

If logic setting [87L.En_CTS_Blk] is set as "Disabled" and the current differential current of the
faulty phase is more than the differential current setting [87L.I_Pkp_CTS] during CT circuit failure,
the current differential protection will operate.

15. 87L.En_Chx

It is used to enable/disable channel x of the current differential protection.

For multi-terminal transmissl line, the master end calculates the differential current, so the
corresponding setting [87L.En_Chx] should be set as "Enabled".

For some situations, the corresponding setting [87L.En_Chx] should be set as "Disabled" if that
end is out of service.

Slave Mode

1. 87L.K_Cr_CT

It is used to set the factor of CT ratio.

Its calculation principle is same with that of master mode.

2. 87L.En

It is used to enable/disable current differential protection.

Its recommended value is "Enabled".

3. 87L.En_Ch1

It is used to enable/disable channel 1 of the current differential protection.

For multi-terminal transmissl line, the slave end receives the tripping command through channel 1,
hence its recommended value is "Enabled" under normal condition.

3-20 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

For some situations, the corresponding setting [87L.En_Ch1] should be set as "Disabled" if that
end is out of service.

3.6 Pilot Distance Protection (85)

3.6.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsPilot Scheme Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio 3
Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsPilot Scheme Settings

3.6.2 Setting List

Table 3.6-1 Pilot distance protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

POTT

85.Opt_Mode PUTT

Blocking

Disabled
85.En_Ch_PhSeg
Enabled

Disabled
85.En_WI
Enabled

85.U_UV_WI 0.000~200.000 0.001 V

Disabled
85.En_WI_Pkp
Enabled

Disabled
85.En_Trp_Send
Enabled

Disabled
85.En_PilotTrp_Send
Enabled

Disabled
85.En_52b_Send
Enabled

85.En_52b_Echo Disabled

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-21

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Enabled

Disabled
85.Z.En
Enabled

Disabled
85.En_Unblocking1
Enabled

Phase-to-phase
3 85.Opt_Ch1
Phase-to-ground

85.t_Unblocking1 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

85.t_DPU_Blocking1 0.000~1.000 0.001 s

85.t_DPU_CR1 0.000~1.000 0.001 s

85.t_DDO_CR1 0.000~1.000 0.001 s

Disabled
85.ZX.En
Enabled

85.t_DPU_ZX 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

3.6.3 Calculation Principle

1. 85.Opt_Mode

It is used to select pilot scheme.

POTT: permissive overreaching transfer trip scheme

PUTT: permissive underreaching transfer trip scheme

Blocking: blocking scheme

2. 85.En_Ch_PhSeg

It is used to enable/disable phase-segregated signal scheme.

Generally, for parallel lines or multi-circuits, this setting is recommended to be set as "Enabled".

The permissive scheme can use PLC channel or optic fiber channel as communication channel.
These signals, which are used to initiate sending permissive signal, can use phase-segregated
signal scheme or common signal scheme. For pilot protection adopting common signal scheme,
the signal "85-x.Recv1" is used. For pilot protection adopting phase-segregated signal scheme,
three signals are used, they are "85-x.Recv1" for phase A, "85-x.RecvB" for phase B and "85-
x.RecvC" for phase C.

3-22 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3. 85.En_WI

It is used to enable/disable weak infeed scheme.

If the device locates on weak end, it should be enabled. Otherwise, it should be disabled.

4. 85.U_UV_WI

It is undervoltage setting of weak infeed logic.

This setting is set to be lower than the minimum voltage value under normal operation condition.
Usually, it is recommeded be set as 60% rated phase voltage.

In case of an internal fault on the line, the fault current supplied to the fault point from the weak
power source is very small or even nil, both forward and reverse element do not operate. Thus, the
3
pilot distance protection could not operate at both ends of the line. The weak infeed logic is used
for this condition.

When the weak infeed logic is enabled ([85.En_WI] is set as "Enabled"), ,if the voltage is lower
than the setting [85.U_UV_WI] after the device picks up, upon receiving the signal from the remote
end, the weak infeed end will echo the signal back for 200ms. In this way, the pilot distance
protection on the other end can operate.

5. 85.En_WI_Pkp

It is used to enable/disable the device pick up at weak infeed end.

This setting is recommended to be set as "Enabled" for the weak infeed end when the device can
not pick up for internal faults in some extreme situations.

6. 85.En_Trp_Send

It is used to enable/disable sending permissive signals by any tripping. If only the pilot protection
(pilot distance protection and pilot directional earth-fault protection) is required to trigger sending
permissive signal, this setting can be set as "Disabled".

7. 85.En_PilotTrp_Send

It is used to enable/disable sending permissive signals when the pilot protection (pilot distance
protection and pilot directional earth-fault protection) operates.

This setting is recommended to be set as "Enabled"

This logic is a supplement for the pilot protection. When the pilot protection operates, the permissive
signal will be extended to make sure the device on the other end can reliably receive the permissive
signal and operate.

8. 85.En_52b_Send

It is used to enable/disable sending permissive signals by the circuit breaker open position when
the device picks up.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-23

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

9. 85.En_52b_Echo

It is used to enable/disable echo permissive signals by the circuit breaker open position when the
device does not pick up.

10. 85.Z.En

It is used to enable/disable pilot distance protection.

11. 85.En_Unblocking1

It is used to enable/disable unblocking scheme.

3 This setting is recommended to be set as "Enabled" when unblocking scheme is required due to
pilot channel failure.

When pilot channel fails, the device may not receive signal from the remote end. For this case, pilot
distance protection can adopt unblocking scheme. While pilot channel is blocked, the signaling
equipment will provide a contact to the device as unblocking signal. When the device receives
unblocking signal from the signaling equipment, it will recognize channel failure, and unblocking
signal will be taken as permissive signal temporarily.

12. 85.Opt_Ch1

It is used to select PLC channel for pilot channel 1.

Phase-to-phase: PLC channel uses phase-to-phase loop for transmitting signals.

Phase-to-ground: PLC channel uses phase-to-ground loop for transmitting signals.

It is recommended that the blocking logic adopts phase-to-ground channel, and the permissive
logic adopts phase-to-phase channel.

There is no similar setting for pilot channel 2, because pilot directional earth-
faut protection adopts phase-to-ground mode, and does not check fault
types in unblocking scheme.

13. 85.t_Unblocking1

It is used to set the releasing time of unblocking scheme for pilot channel 1 when the setting
[85.En_Unblocking1] is set as "Enabled".

14. 85.t_DPU_Blocking1

It is used to set time delay for blocking scheme of pilot distance protection operation.

If the setting [85.Opt_PilotMode] is set as "Blocking", blocking scheme will operate with a time delay
[85.t_DPU_Blocking1] if both forward element operates and blocking signal is not received. This
time delay should be longer than the summation of the propagation time delay of pilot channel and
pickup time of fault detector element. In addition, the time dalay should prevent from maloperation
under current reversal condtion. The recommended setting principle is as follows.

3-24 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

[85.t_DPU_Blocking1]=t1+t2+Δt

Where:

t1 is the propagation time delay of pilot channel.

t2 is the pickup time of fault detector element, typical time is 5ms.

Δt is the margin time, in order to prevent pilot distance protection from undesired operating under
current reversal condtion, it normally should be more than 50ms

15. 85.t_DPU_CR1

It is used to set pickup time delay of current reversal logic.

3
The equation is as bellow.

[85.t_DPU_CR1]=T1-T2-T3

Where:

T1 indicates that the transfer time during which the direction judgement of the device that is near
the fault in local line changes from reverse direction to forward direction when a fault happens to
the adjacent line. It is necessary to consider the operating time of the device that is near the fault
in the adjacent line, the operating time of the contact, the operating time of the circuit breaker and
the operating time of the forward direction element.

T2 indicates the channel delay, which shall be set according to the actual channel delay.

T3 indicates the time during which the remote device sends the signal, which shall be set according
to the actual sending time of the remote device.

Based on the above setting principles, if the fastest operating time of the device in the adjacent line
is calculated as 10ms, the fastest operating time of the contact is calculated as 5ms, the fastest
operating time of the circuit breaker is calculated as 25ms, and the fastest operating time of the
forward direction element is calculated as 15ms, then:

T1=10ms+5ms+25ms+15ms=55ms

The maximum channel delay is calculated as 15ms (T2=15ms).

The sending time of the remote device is calculated as 20ms (T3=20ms).

[85.t_DPU_CR1]=55ms-15ms-20ms=20ms

Hence, the setting is recommended to set as 20ms.

The setting should be not less than 10ms, which ensure that the current reversal logic does not
incorrectly detect for internal fault.

16. 85.t_DDO_CR1

It is used to set dropout time delay of current reversal logic.

The equation is as bellow.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-25

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

[85.t_DDO_CR1]=T1+T2

Where:

T1 indicates the transfer time difference between local device whose direction judgement changes
from reverse direction to forward direction and remote device whose direction judgement changes
from forward direction to reverse direction, and a certain time margin shall be considered.

T2 indicates the dropoff time of the channel delay, which shall be set according to the actual
situation of the channel.

Based on the above setting principles, if the transfer time difference between local device and
3 remote device is calculated as 10ms, the dropoff time of the channel delay is calculated as 15ms,
then:

[85.t_DDO_CR1]=10ms+15ms=25ms

Hence, the setting is recommended to set as 25ms.

If the dropoff of the forward direction element of the remote device is slow, T2 needs to increase
the margin appropriately according to the actual situation.

17. 85.ZX.En

It is used to enable/disable zone extension of pilot distance protection.

Zone extension is usually used in combination with automatic reclosure. It can be activated
internally by pilot protection, the integrated automatic reclosure or externally by a binary input.
When pilot protection is out of service due to pilot channel failure or no pilot protection is provided,
as a supplement of pilot protection, zone extension can clear the fault within the whole line
instantaneously. Different from pilot distance protection, zone extension can also operate for
external close up fault in parallel line, but power supply can be restored by AR. So zone extension
should be blocked when AR is out of service and is not ready.

18. 85.t_DPU_ZX

It is used to set pickup time delay for zone extension of pilot distance protection

The delay time is set in accordance with the application type, usually to zero or a very small delay.

3.7 Pilot Directional Earth-fault Protection (85)

3.7.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsPilot Scheme Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsPilot Scheme Settings

3-26 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.7.2 Setting List

Table 3.7-1 Pilot directional earth-fault protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
85.DEF.En
Enabled

Disabled
85.DEF.En_BlkAR
Enabled

Disabled
3
85.DEF.En_IndepCh
Enabled

Disabled
85.En_Unblocking2
Enabled

85.t_Unblocking2 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

85.DEF.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

85.DEF.t_DPU 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

85.t_DPU_CR2 0.000~1.000 0.001 s

85.t_DDO_CR2 0.000~1.000 0.001 s

3.7.3 Calculation Principle

1. 85.DEF.En

It is used to enable/disable pilot directional earth-fault protection.

2. 85.DEF.En_BlkAR

It is used to enable/disable pilot directional earth-fault protection operate to block AR.

Disabled: selective phase tripping and not blocking AR

Enabled: three-phase tripping and blocking AR

3. 85.DEF.En_IndepCh

It is used to enable/disable independent channel for pilot directional earth-fault protection.

Disabled: pilot directional earth-fault protection sharing same channel with pilot distance protection

Enabled: pilot directional earth-fault adopting independent pilot channel

Pilot directional earth-fault protection can share the channel with pilot distance protection or use
independent channel to initiate sending signal.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-27

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

When the setting [85.DEF.En_IndepCh] is set as "Disabled", pilot directional earth-fault protection
which comprises permissive scheme and blocking scheme can share pilot channel 1 with pilot
distance protection.

When the setting [85.DEF.En_IndepCh] is set as "Enabled", pilot directional earth-fault protection
which comprises permissive scheme and blocking scheme uses independent pilot channel 2.

For underreach mode (PUTT), pilot directional earth-fault should adopt independent pilot channel
2 and work as overreach mode. That means [85.DEF.En_IndepCh] should set as "Enabled".

4. 85.En_Unblocking2

3 It is used to enable/disable unblocking scheme for pilot DEF via pilot channel 2. This setting is
recommended to be set as "Enabled" when unblocking scheme is required due to pilot channel
failure.

If pilot directional earth-fault protection uses independent channel 2 to initiate sending and receiving
signal, the signal will not be received from remote end when pilot channel fails. For this case, pilot
protection can adopt unblocking scheme. While pilot channel is blocked, the signaling equipment
will provide a contact to the device as unblocking signal. When the device receives unblocking
signal from the signaling equipment, it will recognize channel failure, and unblocking signal will be
taken as permissive signal temporarily.

5. 85.t_Unblocking2

It is used to set pickup releasing time delay of unblocking scheme for pilot channel 2.

It is used to set the releasing time of unblocking scheme for pilot channel 2 when the setting
[85.En_Unblocking2] is set as "Enabled".

6. 85.DEF.3I0_Set

It is used to set zero-sequence current setting of pilot directional earth-fault protection.

It should ensure that pilot directional earth-fault protection is sensitive enough when an earth fault
happens in the remote end of the line.

7. 85.DEF.t_DPU

It is used to set time delay of pilot directional earth-fault protection.

8. 85.t_DPU_CR2

It is used to set time delay pickup for current reversal logic when pilot directional earth-fault
protection adopts independent pilot channel 2.

Generally, there is a time delay in pilot directional earth-fault protection. Hence, the setting can be
decreased appropriately if the time delay can meet the requirement of corret operation during
current reversal. Otherwise, the setting shall be set refer to the setting [85.t_DPU_CR1].

9. 85.t_DDO_CR2

It is used to set time delay dropoff for current reversal logic when pilot directional earth-fault

3-28 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

protection adopts independent pilot channel 2.

Generally, there is a time delay in pilot directional earth-fault protection. Hence, the setting can be
decreased appropriately if the time delay can meet the requirement of corret operation during
current reversal. Otherwise, the setting shall be set refer to the setting [85.t_DDO_CR1].

In the case of parallel lines, pilot distance protection shall have the capability
to protect the whole line when an earth fault happens.

When VT circuit failure is detected, pilot distance protection and pilot

directional earth-fault protection will be disabled automatically.
3
When CT circuit failure is detected, pilot directional earth-fault protection will
be disabled automatically.

Under pole disagreement condition, pilot directional earth-fault protection

will be disabled automatically.

3.8 DPFC Distance Protection (21D)

3.8.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsDPFC Dist Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsDPFC Dist Settings

3.8.2 Setting List

Table 3.8-1 DPFC distance protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

21D.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21D.Z_Overreach (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

Disabled
21D.En
Enabled

3.8.3 Calculation Principle

1. 21D.Z_Set

It is used to set impedance setting of DPFC distance protection.

It is an additional function of distance zone1 protection to accelerate its operation for the close-up

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-29

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

fault. It is set according to underreaching scheme, usually take 60%~70% of the line impedance,
and as for double-circuit lines, 50% of the line impedance is recommended.

2. 21D.Z_Overreach

It is used to set impedance setting of DPFC distance protection with overreaching characteristic.

The setting can ensure the directionality of DPFC distance protection for series compensated lines,
and it should be set as the impedance from local side to the power supply of opposite end. It can
be set as the local line impedance plus 1.5 times of power supply impedance of opposite end under
maximum operation mode.

3 3. 21D.En

It is used to enable/disable DPFC distance protection.

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable DPFC distance protection. If the line length
is too short (for example, less than 10km) or the SIR (Source Impedance Ratio) is too large
(SIR>30).

This setting is recommended to be set as "Disabled".

3.9 Distance Protection (21L)

3.9.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsDistProt Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsDistProt Settings

3.9.2 Setting List

Table 3.9-1 Distance protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

21L.Ang_Alpha 5~30 1 °

21L.Ang_Beta 5~30 1 °

21L.LoadEnch.ZG.phi 5~50 1 °

21L.LoadEnch.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L.LoadEnch.ZP.phi 5~50 1 °

21L.LoadEnch.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L.I_PSBR (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

3-30 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Mho
21L.ZG.Opt_Characteristic
Quad

Mho
21L.ZP.Opt_Characteristic
Quad

21L1.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

21L1.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

21L1.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °
3
21L1.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °

21L1.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L1.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L1.ZG.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L1.ZG.phi_Shift 0~30 1 °

21L1.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

Disabled
21L1.ZG.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L1.ZG.En_BlkAR
Enabled

Disabled
21L1.ZG.En_3I0
Enabled

Disabled
21L1.ZG.En_NeuDir_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
21L1.ZG.En_NegDir_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
21L1.LoadEnch.ZG.En
Enabled

21L1.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °

21L1.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L1.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-31

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

21L1.ZP.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L1.ZP.phi_Shift 0~30 1 °

21L1.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

Disabled
21L1.ZP.En
Enabled

Disabled
3 21L1.ZP.En_BlkAR
Enabled

Disabled
21L1.ZP.En_NegDir_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
21L1.LoadEnch.ZP.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L1.LoadEnch.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L1.En_PSBR
Enabled

Disabled
21L1.En_ReacLine
Enabled

Forward

21L2.DirMode Reverse

Non_Directional

21L2.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

21L2.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

21L2.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °

21L2.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °

21L2.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L2.ZG.Z_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L2.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L2.ZG.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

3-32 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

21L2.ZG.phi_Shift 0~30 1 °

21L2.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

21L2.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

Disabled
21L2.ZG.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L2.ZG.En_BlkAR
Enabled
3
Disabled
21L2.ZG.En_3I0
Enabled

Disabled
21L2.ZG.En_NeuDir_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
21L2.ZG.En_NegDir_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
21L2.LoadEnch.ZG.En
Enabled

21L2.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °

21L2.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L2.ZP.Z_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L2.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L2.ZP.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L2.ZP.phi_Shift 0~30 1 °

21L2.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

21L2.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

Disabled
21L2.ZP.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L2.ZP.En_BlkAR
Enabled

21L2.ZP.En_NegDir_Blk Disabled

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-33

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Enabled

Disabled
21L2.LoadEnch.ZP.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L2.En_ShortDly
Enabled

Disabled
3 21L2.LoadEnch.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L2.En_PSBR
Enabled

Disabled
21L2.En_ReacLine
Enabled

Forward

21L3.DirMode Reverse

Non_Directional

21L3.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

21L3.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

21L3.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °

21L3.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °

21L3.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L3.ZG.Z_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L3.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L3.ZG.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L3.ZG.phi_Shift 0~30 1 °

21L3.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

21L3.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

Disabled
21L3.ZG.En
Enabled

21L3.ZG.En_BlkAR Disabled

3-34 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Enabled

Disabled
21L3.ZG.En_3I0
Enabled

Disabled
21L3.ZG.En_NeuDir_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
21L3.ZG.En_NegDir_Blk
Enabled
3
Disabled
21L3.LoadEnch.ZG.En
Enabled

21L3.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °

21L3.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L3.ZP.Z_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L3.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L3.ZP.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L3.ZP.phi_Shift 0~30 1 °

21L3.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

21L3.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

Disabled
21L3.ZP.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L3.ZP.En_BlkAR
Enabled

Disabled
21L3.ZP.En_NegDir_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
21L3.LoadEnch.ZP.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L3.En_ShortDly
Enabled

21L3.LoadEnch.En Disabled

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-35

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Enabled

Disabled
21L3.En_PSBR
Enabled

Disabled
21L3.En_ReacLine
Enabled

Forward
3 21L4.DirMode Reverse

Non_Directional

21L4.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

21L4.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

21L4.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °

21L4.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °

21L4.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L4.ZG.Z_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L4.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L4.ZG.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L4.ZG.phi_Shift 0~30 1 °

21L4.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

21L4.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

Disabled
21L4.ZG.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L4.ZG.En_BlkAR
Enabled

Disabled
21L4.ZG.En_3I0
Enabled

Disabled
21L4.ZG.En_NeuDir_Blk
Enabled

21L4.ZG.En_NegDir_Blk Disabled

3-36 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Enabled

Disabled
21L4.LoadEnch.ZG.En
Enabled

21L4.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °

21L4.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L4.ZP.Z_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L4.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

3
21L4.ZP.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L4.ZP.phi_Shift 0~30 1 °

21L4.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

21L4.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

Disabled
21L4.ZP.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L4.ZP.En_BlkAR
Enabled

Disabled
21L4.ZP.En_NegDir_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
21L4.LoadEnch.ZP.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L4.En_ShortDly
Enabled

Disabled
21L4.LoadEnch.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L4.En_PSBR
Enabled

Disabled
21L4.En_ReacLine
Enabled

21L5.DirMode Forward

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-37

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Reverse

Non_Directional

21L5.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

21L5.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

21L5.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °

21L5.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °
3 21L5.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L5.ZG.Z_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L5.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L5.ZG.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L5.ZG.phi_Shift 0~30 1 °

21L5.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

21L5.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

Disabled
21L5.ZG.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L5.ZG.En_BlkAR
Enabled

Disabled
21L5.ZG.En_3I0
Enabled

Disabled
21L5.ZG.En_NeuDir_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
21L5.ZG.En_NegDir_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
21L5.LoadEnch.ZG.En
Enabled

21L5.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °

21L5.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L5.ZP.Z_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

3-38 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

21L5.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L5.ZP.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L5.ZP.phi_Shift 0~30 1 °

21L5.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

21L5.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

Disabled
21L5.ZP.En
Enabled
3
Disabled
21L5.ZP.En_BlkAR
Enabled

Disabled
21L5.ZP.En_NegDir_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
21L5.LoadEnch.ZP.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L5.En_ShortDly
Enabled

Disabled
21L5.LoadEnch.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L5.En_PSBR
Enabled

Disabled
21L5.En_ReacLine
Enabled

Forward

21L6.DirMode Reverse

Non_Directional

21L6.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

21L6.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

21L6.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °

21L6.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-39

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

21L6.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L6.ZG.Z_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L6.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L6.ZG.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L6.ZG.phi_Shift 0~30 1 °

21L6.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

3 21L6.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

Disabled
21L6.ZG.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L6.ZG.En_BlkAR
Enabled

Disabled
21L6.ZG.En_3I0
Enabled

Disabled
21L6.ZG.En_NeuDir_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
21L6.ZG.En_NegDir_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
21L6.LoadEnch.ZG.En
Enabled

21L6.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °

21L6.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L6.ZP.Z_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L6.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L6.ZP.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L6.ZP.phi_Shift 0~30 1 °

21L6.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

21L6.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

21L6.ZP.En Disabled

3-40 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Enabled

Disabled
21L6.ZP.En_BlkAR
Enabled

Disabled
21L6.ZP.En_NegDir_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
21L6.LoadEnch.ZP.En
Enabled
3
Disabled
21L6.En_ShortDly
Enabled

Disabled
21L6.LoadEnch.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L6.En_PSBR
Enabled

Disabled
21L6.En_ReacLine
Enabled

21L.PilotFwd.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

21L.PilotFwd.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

21L.PilotFwd.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °

21L.PilotFwd.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °

21L.PilotFwd.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L.PilotFwd.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L.PilotFwd.ZG.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

Disabled
21L.PilotFwd.ZG.En_3I0
Enabled

Disabled
21L.PilotFwd.ZG.En_NeuDir_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
21L.PilotFwd.ZG.En_NegDir_Blk
Enabled

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-41

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
21L.PilotFwd.LoadEnch.ZG.En
Enabled

21L.PilotFwd.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °

21L.PilotFwd.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L.PilotFwd.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L.PilotFwd.ZP.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

3 Disabled
21L.PilotFwd.ZP.En_NegDir_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
21L.PilotFwd.LoadEnch.ZP.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L.PilotFwd.En_PSBR
Enabled

Disabled
21L.PilotFwd.En_ReacLine
Enabled

21L.PilotRev.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

21L.PilotRev.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001

21L.PilotRev.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °

21L.PilotRev.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °

21L.PilotRev.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L.PilotRev.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L.PilotRev.ZG.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

Disabled
21L.PilotRev.ZG.En_3I0
Enabled

Disabled
21L.PilotRev.LoadEnch.ZG.En
Enabled

21L.PilotRev.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °

21L.PilotRev.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

21L.PilotRev.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

3-42 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

21L.PilotRev.ZP.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

Disabled
21L.PilotRev.LoadEnch.ZP.En
Enabled

Disabled
21L.PilotRev.En_PSBR
Enabled

Disabled
21L.PilotRev.En_ReacLine
Enabled
3
3.9.3 Calculation Principle

1. 21L.Ang_Alpha

It is used to set the angle of directional line in the second quadrant (when the setting [21Lx.DirMode]
is set as "Forward") or fourth quadrant (when the setting [21Lx.DirMode] is set as "Reverse") for
quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance element.

If the line positive-sequence angle is large, for example, more than 80 degree, or the system behind
the device is weak power source, this setting should be increaseded appropriately, considering the
error of line paramter and measured impedance.

Its recommended value is 15°.

2. 21L.Ang_Beta

It is used to set the angle of directional line in the fourth quadrant (when the setting [21Lx.DirMode]
is set as "Forward") or second quadrant (when the setting [21Lx.DirMode] is set as "Reverse") for
quadrilateral distance element.

Its recommended value is 15°.

3. 21L.LoadEnch.ZG.phi

It is used to set phase-to-ground angle setting of load trapezoid characteristics.

It should be set according to the maximum load area angle (φLoad_Max).

The recommended setting principle is as below.

[21L.LoadEnch.ZG.phi]>φLoad_Max+φθ

φθ is the margin, and its recommended value is 5°.

4. 21L.LoadEnch.ZG.R_Set

It is used to set phase-to-ground resistance setting of load trapezoid characteristics.

It should be less than the minimum impedance measured during heavy load conditions.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-43

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Assume that the maximum permissive load is Smax (MVA), and corresponding minimum voltage is
Umin (kV) and then under this operation condition, the recommended setting principle is as below:
2
𝑈𝑚𝑖𝑛
[21𝐿. 𝐿𝑜𝑎𝑑𝐸𝑛𝑐ℎ. 𝑍𝐺. 𝑅_𝑆𝑒𝑡] < 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝑅𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 ×
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the coefficient, and its recommended value is 0.7.

5. 21L.LoadEnch.ZP.phi

It is used to set phase-to-phase angle setting of load trapezoid characteristics.

It should be set according to the maximum load area angle (φLoad_Max).

3 The recommended setting principle is as below.

[21L.LoadEnch.ZP.phi]>φLoad_Max+φθ

φθ is the margin, and its recommended value is 5°.

6. 21L.LoadEnch.ZP.R_Set

It is used to set phase-to-phase resistance setting of load trapezoid characteristics.

It should be less than the minimum impedance measured during heavy load conditions.

Assume that the maximum permissive load is Smax (MVA), and corresponding minimum voltage is
Umin (kV) and then under this operation condition, the recommended setting principle is as below:
2
𝑈𝑚𝑖𝑛
[21𝐿. 𝐿𝑜𝑎𝑑𝐸𝑛𝑐ℎ. 𝑍𝑃. 𝑅_𝑆𝑒𝑡] < 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝑅𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 ×
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the coefficient, and its recommended value is 0.7.

7. 21L.I_PSBR

It is used to set current setting for power swing blocking releasing

The following setting rule is recommended.

[21𝐿. 𝐼_𝑃𝑆𝐵𝑅] = 1.1 × 𝐼𝐿𝑜𝑎𝑑_𝑚𝑎𝑥

ILoad_max is the maximum load current of the line.

8. 21L.ZG.Opt_Characteristic

It is used to select the characteristics of phase-to-ground distance element.

Mho: mho characteristics

Quad: quadrilateral characteristics

9. 21L.ZP.Opt_Characteristic

It is used to select the characteristics option of phase-to-phase distance element.

Mho: mho characteristics

3-44 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Quad: quadrilateral characteristics

10. 21L*.DirMode

It is used to select direction characteristics for zone * of distance protection (*=2~6)

Zone1 is internally fixed as forward direction.

Forward: forward direction

Reverse: reverse direction

Non-directional: none direction

11. 21L*.Real_K0 3
It is used to set real component of zero-sequence compensation coefficient for zone * of distance
protection (*=1~6)

The calculation equation is:

𝑍̇0𝐿 − 𝑍̇1𝐿
[21𝐿 ∗. 𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑙_𝐾0] = 𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑙 { }
3𝑍̇1𝐿

Z0L and Z1L are zero and positive sequence impedance of the line respectively.

The mutual coupling compensation of the parallel transmission line is not

considered in the distance protection. Hence, there is no need to consider
the mutual coupling conpensation in zero-sequence compensation
coefficient calculation. The overreach preventation could be met by reduce
the distance zone1 setting reach.

12. 21L*.Imag_K0

It is used to set imaginary component of zero-sequence compensation coefficient for zone * of

distance protection (*=1~6)

The calculation equation is:

𝑍̇0𝐿 − 𝑍̇1𝐿
[21𝐿 ∗. 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑔_𝐾0] = 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑔 { }
3𝑍̇1𝐿

Z0L and Z1L are zero and positive sequence impedance of the line respectively.

The mutual coupling compensation of the parallel transmission line is not

considered in the distance protection. Hence, there is no need to consider
the mutual coupling conpensation in zero-sequence compensation
coefficient calculation. The overreach preventation could be met by reduce

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-45

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

the distance zone1 setting reach.

13. 21L*.phi1_Reach

It is used to set phase angle of positive-sequence impedance for zone i of distance protection.
(*=1~6)

The calculation equation is:

𝑋1
[21𝐿𝑖. 𝑝ℎ𝑖1_𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑐ℎ] = 𝑡𝑎𝑛−1( )
𝑅1

X1 and R1 are positive-sequence reactance and resistance of the line respectively.

3 14. 21L*.ZG.RCA

It is used to set downward offset angle of the reactance line for zone * of quadrilateral phase-to-
ground distance element. (*=1~6)

The setting is used to prevent phase-to-ground distance element from overreaching during the fault
with resistance. The setting is associated with the setting [21L*.En_ReacLine]. And its value is valid
when the setting [21L*.En_ReacLine] is set as "Enabled".

The setting is recommended to be set according to the maximum fault resistance considered for
phase-to-ground fault.

Its recommended value is 12°.

15. 21L*.ZG.Z_Set

It is used to set impedance setting of zone * of phase-to-ground distance element. (*=1~6)

It is common impedance setting of phase-to-ground distance element (Mho and Quad

characteristics)

➢ For Zone 1

Zone1 is expected to protect the most part of the line. The recommended setting principle is:

[21L1. ZG. ZSet ] = Krel × Z1L

Krel is the coefficient, normally 70%~85% is used.

Z1𝐿 is the positive-sequence line impedance.

Where overhead lines are connected in parallel or operate in close proximity for the whole or part
of their length, mutual coupling exists between the two circuits. For the case where one circuit of a
parallel line is out of service and earthed at both ends, an earth fault on the remote busbar may
result in maloperation of phase-to-ground zone 1.

In this case, it is recommended to reduce the setting. Krel is recommended to be set as 0.7 or
less. It should prevent maloperation when a fault occurs on the remote busbar of line.

➢ For Zone 2

3-46 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

The setting should be sensitive enough to the earth fault on the remote end of the protected line,
and coordinates with the setting of zone 1 of the adjacent line. For more complex power system,
for instance, If there is a transformer or there are many adjacent lines connected to the remote bus,
the coordination should be changed accordingly.

To coordinate with zone 1 of the adjacent line, the recommended setting principle is:

[21L2.ZG.Z_Set]=K1×(ZL+KZmin×Zdz1)

ZL is positive-sequence impedance of the protected line.

Zdz1 is [21L1.ZG.Z_Set] in the adjacent line.

KZmin is the minimum value between positive-sequence infeed coefficient and zero-sequence infeed 3
coefficient under all the operation conditions.

K1 is the coeffiecient, 0.7~0.8 is recommended.

In the above equation, KZ follows the equation.

KZ=Iadj/Iloc

Iadj is positive-sequence current on the adjacent line when a fault happens to the adjacent line.

Iloc is positive-sequence current on the protected line when a fault happens to the adjacent line.

It should be noted that the setting should be greater than 1.2×ZL to make sure adequate sensitivity
is acheived. If it is not satisfied based on above setting rule, then zone2 of the protected line should
coordinate with zone2 of the adjacent line, in both impedance setting and time delay setting.

For parallel circuit, the setting tends to underreach due to mutual coupling. Therefore, it is
recommended to increase the setting.

➢ For Zone 3

Zone3 is both the backup for the protected line and the remote back for the adjacent line. Thus, it
should coordinate with the setting of zone 2 of the adjacent line. For more complex power system,
for instance, if there is a transformer or there are many adjacent lines connected to the remote end
of the adjacent line, the coordination should be changed accordingly.

To coordinate with zone 2 of the adjacent line, the recommended setting principle is:

[21L3.ZG.Z_Set]=K1×(ZL+KZmin×Zdz2)

Zdz2 is the setting [21L2.ZG.Z_Set] in the adjacent line.

It should be noted that, if ZL2 is the line impedance of the adjacent line, then the setting should be
greater than 1.2×(ZL+ KZmax×ZL2) to make sure adequate sensitivity is acheived. If it is not satisfied
based on above setting rule, then zone3 of the protected line should coordinate with zone3 of the
adjacent line, in both impedance setting and time delay setting.

➢ For Zone 4~Zone 6

The setting should be set as requirement.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-47

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

16. 21L*.ZG.Z_Offset

It is used to set shift impedance setting of zone * of phase-to-ground distance element (*=2~6)

It is common offset impedance setting of phase-to-ground distance element (Mho and Quad
characteristics)

It is associated with the setting [21L*.DirMode]. It is valid when the direction setting [21L*.DirMode]
is set as "Non-directional". Because Zone1 is internally fixed in forward direction, this setting is
avalaible for Zone2~Zone6.

Please set this setting according to the application condition.

3 17. 21L*.ZG.R_Set

It is used to set resistance setting of zone * of quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance element.

(*=1~6)

If this setting is too large compared with [21L*.ZG.Z_Set], then overreach is likely to happen. Thus,
the recommended setting principle is:

[21L*.ZG.R_Set]≤4×[21L*.ZG.Z_Set]

18. 21L*.ZG.R_Offset

It is used to set shift resistance setting of zone * of phase-to-ground distance element. (Quad
characteristics, *=1~6)

There are two main usages for this setting.

⚫ For the Quad characteristic distance protection with direction, it is used to cut off the unwanted
area in second quadrant.

⚫ For the Quad characteristic distance protection without direction, it is used for the offset
boundary of the operation area.

Please set this setting according to the application condition. Normally, it is calculated as 0.25 times
of the resistance setting [21L*.ZG.R_Set].

19. 21L*.ZG.phi_Shift

It is used to set phase shift of zone * of phase-to-ground distance element. (Mho characteristics,
*=1~6)

In order to improve the performance against high resistance fault, phase shift is applied to polarized
voltage in phase-to-ground distance element and phase-to-phase distance element.

Its recommended value is as follows:

⚫ Line length is smaller than 10km: 15°~30°

⚫ Line length is not smaller than 10km and smaller than 40km: 0°~15°

⚫ Line length is not smaller than 40km: 0°

3-48 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

20. 21L*.ZG.t_Op

It is used to set time delay of zone * of phase-to-ground distance element (*=1~6)

It is common time delay setting of phase-to-ground distance protection. (Mho and Quad
characteristics)

➢ For Zone 1

Usually, it should be set as 0.

➢ For Zone 2

When phase-to-ground distance element of zone 2 coordinates with phase-to-ground distance

element of zone 1 of the adjacent line, the recommended setting principle is:
3
[21L2.ZG.t_Op]=Δt

Otherwise, this setting shall coordinate with the time delay of phase-to-ground distance element of
zone 2 in the adjacent line, and the recommended setting principle is:

[21L2.ZG.t_Op]=t2+Δt

Where:

t2 is the time delay of zone 2 of phase-to-ground distance element in adjacent line.

Δt is extra time delay and usually takes 0.3~0.5s

Time delay of zone 2 of phase-to-ground distance element usually take 1.0s.

In the situation that fast protection for whole line is disabled while the
transmission line is still in service, time delay can be shorten to 0.3s.

➢ For Zone 3

When phase-to-ground distance element of zone 3 coordinates with phase-to-ground distance

element of zone 2 of the adjacent line, the recommended setting principle is:

[21L3.ZG.t_Op]=t2+Δt

Otherwise, this setting shall coordinate with the time delay of phase-to-ground distance element of
zone 3 in the adjacent line, and the recommended setting principle is:

[21L3.ZG.t_Op]=t3+Δt

Where:

t3 is the time delay of phase-to-ground distance element of zone 3 in adjacent line.

Δt is extra time delay and usually takes 0.3~0.5s

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-49

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Time delay of zone 3 of phase-to-ground distance element usually take

3s~3.5s, and the requirement of time-delay operation must be confirmed by
the user.

➢ For Zone 4~Zone 6

The time delay setting of Zone4~Zone6 should be set as requirement.

21. 21L*.ZG.t_ShortDly
3 It is used to set short time delay of zone * of phase-to-ground distance element (*=2~6)

It is common short time delay of phase-to-ground distance element. (Mho and Quad characteristics)

Under some situation, distance protection with normal time delay should operate with a shorter
time delay. For example, main protection is lost on the downstream line and distance protection on
local line should be accelerated to operate.

Please set this setting according to the application condition.

22. 21L*.ZG.En

It is used to enable/disable zone * of phase-to-ground distance element. (Mho or Quad

characteristics, *=1~6)

23. 21L*.ZG.En_BlkAR

It is used to enable/disable zone * of phase-to-ground distance element operating to block AR.

(Mho or Quad characteristics, *=1~6)

AR will be blocked when phase-to-ground distance element operates if the setting is set as
"Enabled".

24. 21L*.ZG.En_3I0

It is used to enable/disable zone * of phase-to-ground distance element controlled by residual

current fault detector element. (Mho or Quad characteristics, *=1~6)

Phase-to-ground distance element will be controlled by the signal "FD.ROC_Pkp" if the setting is
set as "Enabled".

This setting is recommended to be set as "Enabled".

25. 21L*ZG.En_NeuDir_Blk

It is used to enable/disable zone * of phase-to-ground distance element blocked by direction control

element of earth fault protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics, i=1~6)

This setting is recommended to be set as "Enabled".

When the setting is set as "Enabled", these settings [50/51G.DIR.RCA],

[50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd], [50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd], [50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev],

3-50 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

[50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev], [50/51G.DIR.3I0_Min] and [50/51G.DIR.3U0_Min] should be set

correctly according the actual situation.

26. 21L*.ZG.En_NegDir_Blk

It is used to enable/disable zone * of phase-to-ground distance element blocked by direction control

element of negative-sequence overcurrent protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics, *=1~6)

This setting is recommended to be set as "Enabled".

When the setting is set as "Enabled", these settings [50/51Q.DIR.RCA],

[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd], [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd], [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev],
[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev], [50/51Q.DIR.I2_Min] and [50/51Q.DIR.U2_Min] should be set
correctly according the actual situation.
3
27. 21L*.LoadEnch.ZG.En

It is used to enable/disable phase-to-ground load trapezoid characteristics for zone * of distance

protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics, *=1~6)

28. 21L*.ZP.RCA

It is used to set downward offset angle of the reactance line for zone * of quadrilateral phase-to-
phase distance element. (*=1~6).

The setting is used to prevent phase-to-phase distance element from overreaching during the fault
with resistance. The setting is associated with the setting [21L*.En_ReacLine]. And its value is valid
when the setting [21L*.En_ReacLine] is set as "Enabled".

The setting is recommended to be set according to the maximum fault resistance considered for
phase-to-phase fault.

Its recommended value is 15°.

29. 21L*.ZP.Z_Set

It is used to set impedance setting of zone * of phase-to-phase distance element (*=1~6)

It is common impedance setting of phase-to-phase distance element. (Mho and Quad

characteristics)

➢ For Zone 1

Zone1 is expected to protect the most part of the line. The recommended setting principle is:

[21L1. ZG. ZSet ] = Krel × Z1L

Krel is the coefficient, normally 70%~85% is used.

Z1𝐿 is the positive-sequence line impedance.

Where overhead lines are connected in parallel or run in close proximity for the whole or part of
their length, mutual coupling exists between the two circuits. For the case where one circuit of a
parallel line is out of service and earthed at both ends, an earth fault on the remote busbar may

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-51

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

result in mal-operation of zone 1 phase-to-phase element. In this case, it is recommended to reduce

the setting. Krel is recommended to be set as 0.7 or less. It should avoid mal-operation when a
fault occurs on the remote busbar of line.

➢ For Zone 2

The setting should be sensitive enough to the earth fault on the remote end of the protected line,
and coordinates with the setting of zone 1 of the adjacent line. For more complex power system,
for instance, If there is a transformer or there are many adjacent lines connected to the remote bus,
the coordination should be changed accordingly.

To coordinate with zone 1 of the adjacent line, the recommended setting principle is:
3 [21L2.ZP.Z_Set]=K1×(ZL +KZ×Zdz1)

ZL is positive-sequence impedance of the protected line.

Zdz1 is the setting [21L1.ZP.Z_Set] in the adjacent line.

KZmin is the minimum infeed coefficient under all the conditions.

K1 is the coeffiecient, 0.7~0.8 is recommended.

In the above equation, KZ follows the equation.

KZ = Iadj/Iloc

Iadj is positive-sequence current on the adjacent line when a fault happens on the adjacent line.

Iloc is positive-sequence current on the protected line when a fault happens on the adjacent line.

It should be noted that, the setting should be greater than 1.2×ZL to make sure adequate sensitivity
is acheived. If it is not satisfied based on above setting rule, then zone2 of the protected line should
coordinate with zone2 of the adjacent line, in both impedance setting and time delay setting.

For parallel circuit, the setting tends to underreach due to mutual coupling. Therefore, it is
recommended to increase the setting.

➢ For Zone 3

Zone3 is both the backup for the protected line and the remote back for the adjacent line. Thus, it
should coordinate with the setting of zone 2 of the adjacent line. For more complex power system,
for instance, If there is a transformer or there are many adjacent lines connected to the remote end
of the adjacent line, the coordination should be changed accordingly.

To coordinate with zone 2 of the adjacent line, the recommended setting principle is:

[21L3.ZP.Z_Set]=K1×(ZL +KZmin×Zdz2)

Zdz2 is [21L2.ZP.Z_Set] in the adjacent line.

It should be noted that, if ZL2 is the line impedance of the adjacent line, then the setting should be
greater than 1.2×(ZL+ KZmax×ZL2) to make sure adequate sensitivity is acheived. If it is not satisfied
based on above setting rule, then zone3 of the protected line should coordinate with zone3 of the

3-52 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

adjacent line, in both impedance setting and time delay setting.

➢ For Zone 4~Zone 6

The setting should be set as requirement.

30. 21L*.ZP.Z_Offset

It is used to set shift impedance setting of zone * of phase-to-phase distance element. (Mho or
Quad characteristics, *=2~6)

It is associated with the setting [21L*.DirMode]. It is valid when the direction setting [21L*.DirMode]
is set as "Non-directional". Because Zone1 is internally fixed in forward direction, this setting is
avalaible for Zone2~Zone6. 3
Please set this setting according to the application condition.

31. 21L*.ZP.R_Set

It is used to set resistance setting of zone * of quadrilateral phase-to-phase distance element.

(*=1~6)

If this setting is too large compared with [21L*.ZP.Z_Set], then overreach is likely to happen. Thus,
the recommended setting principle is:

[21L*.ZP.R_Set]≤4×[21L*.ZP.Z_Set]

32. 21L*.ZP.R_Offset

It is used to set shift resistance setting of zone * of quadrilateral phase-to-phase distance element.
( *=1~6)

There are two main usages for this setting.

⚫ For the Quad characteristic distance protection with direction, it is used to cut off the unwanted
area in second quadrant.

⚫ For the Quad characteristic distance protection without direction, it is used for the offset
boundary of the operation area.

Please set this setting according to the application condition. Normally, it is calculated as 0.25 times
of the resistance setting [21L*.ZP.R_Set].

33. 21L*.ZP.phi_Shift

It is used to set phase shift of zone * of Mho phase-to-phase distance element. (*=1~6)

In order to improve the performance against high resistance fault, phase shift is applied to polarized
voltage in phase-to-phase distance element and phase-to-phase distance element.

Its recommended value is as follows:

⚫ Line length is smaller than 10km: 15°~30°

⚫ Line length is not smaller than 10km and smaller than 40km: 0°~15°

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-53

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

⚫ Line length is not smaller than 40km: 0°

34. 21L*.ZP.t_Op

It is used to set time delay of zone * of phase-to-phase distance element. (*=1~6)

It is common time delay setting of phase-to-phase distance element. (Mho and Quad characteristics)

➢ For Zone 1

Usually, it should be set as 0.

➢ For Zone 2
3 When phase-to-phase distance element of zone 2 coordinates with phase-to-phase distance
element of zone 1 of the adjacent line, the setting rule is as follows:

[21L2.ZG.t_Op]=Δt

Otherwise, this setting shall coordinate with the time delay of phase-to- phase distance element of
zone 2 in the adjacent line, and the setting rule is as follows:

[21L2.ZG.t_Op] = t2+Δt

Where:

t2 is the time delay of phase-to- phase distance element of zone 2 in adjacent line.

Δt is extra time delay and usually takes 0.3~0.5s

Time delay of zone 2 of phase-to-phase distance element usually take 1.0s.

In the situation that fast protection for whole line is disabled while the
transmission line is still in service, time delay can be shorten to 0.3s.

➢ For Zone 3

When phase-to-phase distance element of zone 3 coordinates with phase-to-phase distance

element of zone 2 of the adjacent line, the setting rule is as follows:

[21L3.ZG.t_Op]=t2+Δt

Otherwise, this setting shall coordinate with the time delay of phase-to-phase distance element of
zone 3 in the adjacent line, and the setting rule is as follows:

[21L3.ZG.t_Op]=t3+Δt

Where:

t3 is the time delay of phase-to-phase distance element of zone 3 in adjacent line.

Δt is extra time delay and usually takes 0.3~0.5s

3-54 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Time delay of zone 3 of phase-to-ground distance element usually take

3s~3.5s, and the requirement of time-delay operation must be confirmed by
the user.

➢ For Zone 4~Zone 6

The time delay setting of Zone 4~Zone 6 should be set as requirement.

35. 21L*.ZP.t_ShortDly

It is used to set short time delay of zone * of phase-to-phase distance element (Mho or Quad
characteristics,*=2~6)

Under some situation, distance protection with normal time delay should operate with a shorter 3
time delay. For example, main protection is lost on the downstream line and distance protection on
local line should be accelerated to operate.

No setting rule is recommended for this setting. Please set this setting according to the application
condition.

36. 21L*.ZP.En

It is used to enable/disable zone * of phase-to-phase distance element. (Mho or Quad

characteristics, *=1~6)

37. 21L*.ZP.En_BlkAR

It is used to enable/disable zone * of phase-to-phase distance element operating to block AR. (Mho
or Quad characteristics, *=1~6)

AR will be blocked when phase-to-phase distance element operates if the setting is set as
"Enabled".

38. 21L*.ZP.En_NegDir_Blk

It is used to enable/disable zone * of phase-to-phase distance element blocked by direction control

element of negative-sequence overcurrent protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics, *=1~6)

This setting is recommended to be set as "Enabled".

When the setting is set as "Enabled", these settings [50/51Q.DIR.RCA],

[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd], [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd], [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev],
[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev], [50/51Q.DIR.I2_Min] and [50/51Q.DIR.U2_Min] should be set
correctly according the actual situation.

39. 21L*.LoadEnch.ZP.En

It is used to enable/disable phase-to-phase load trapezoid characteristics for zone * of distance

protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics, *=1~6)

40. 21L*.En_ShortDly

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-55

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

It is used to enable/disable fixed accelerate zone * of distance protection. (Mho or Quad

characteristics, *=2~6)

Normally, Zone 1 is used as instant distance protection, so this setting is only used for Zone 2~Zone
6.

41. 21L*.En_PSBR

It is used to enable/disable zone * of distance protection controlled by PSBR. (Mho or Quad

characteristics, *=1~6)

When the setting is set as "Enabled", the power swing blocking for distance protction will be
3 released if corresponding conditions are satisfied.

42. 21L*.En_ReacLine

It is used to enable/disable zone * of distance protection controlled by the reactance line. (Mho or
Quad characteristics, *=1~6)

The relevant settings are [21L*.ZG.RCA] and [21L*.ZP.RCA].

43. 21L.PilotFwd.Real_K0

It is used to set real component of zero-sequence compensation coefficient for forward pilot
distance zone.

The calculation equation is:

𝑍̇0𝐿 − 𝑍̇1𝐿
[21𝐿. 𝑃𝑖𝑙𝑜𝑡𝐹𝑤𝑑. 𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑙_𝐾0] = 𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑙 { }
3𝑍̇1𝐿

Z0L and Z1L are zero and positive sequence impedance of the line respectively.

44. 21L.PilotFwd.Imag_K0

It is used to set imaginary component of zero-sequence compensation coefficient for forward pilot
distance zone.

The calculation equation is:

𝑍̇0𝐿 − 𝑍̇1𝐿
[21𝐿. 𝑃𝑖𝑙𝑜𝑡𝐹𝑤𝑑. 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑔_𝐾0] = 𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑙 { }
3𝑍̇1𝐿

Z0L and Z1L are zero and positive sequence impedance of the line respectively.

45. 21L.PilotFwd.phi1_Reach

It is used to set phase angle of positive-sequence impedance for forward pilot distance zone.

It should be calculated based on the line parameters.

The calculation equation is:

3-56 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

𝑋1
[21𝐿. 𝑃𝑖𝑙𝑜𝑡𝐹𝑤𝑑. 𝑝ℎ𝑖1_𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑐ℎ] = 𝑡𝑎𝑛−1( )
𝑅1

X1 and R1 are positive sequence reactance and resistance of the line respectively

46. 21L.PilotFwd.ZG.RCA

It is used to set downward offset angle of the reactance line for quadrilateral forward phase-to-
ground pilot distance element.

The setting is used to prevent phase-to-ground distance element from overreaching during the fault
with resistance. The setting is associated with the setting [21L.PilotFwd.En_ReacLine]. And its
value is valid when the setting [21L.PilotFwd.En_ReacLine] is set as "Enabled".
3
The setting is recommended to be set according to the maximum fault resistance considered for
phase-to-ground fault.

Its recommended value is 15°.

47. 21L.PilotFwd.ZG.Z_Set

It is used to set impedance setting of forward pilot distance zone. (Mho or Quad characteristics,
phase-to-ground)

This setting shall be sensitive enough to the fault in the remote end of the protected line. For lines
longer than 60km, it is usually set 1.3~1.5 times the impedance of whole line, for shorter lines,
1.5~2.0 times the impedance of whole line is recommended.

For parallel lines, phase-to-ground zone element of pilot distance protection will tend to underreach
due to mutual coupling. Therefore, it is recommended to increase the setting.

48. 21L.PilotFwd.ZG.R_Set

It is used to set resistance setting of quadrilateral forward phase-to-ground pilot distance element.

If this setting is too large compared with [21L.PilotFwd.ZG.Z_Set], then overreach is likely to
happen. Thus, the recommended setting principle is:

[21L.PilotFwd.ZG.R_Set]≤4×[21L.PilotFwd.ZG.Z_Set]

49. 21L.PilotFwd.ZG.R_Offset

It is used to set shift resistance setting of quadrilateral forward phase-to-ground pilot distance
element.

It is used to cut off the unwanted area in second quadrant.

50. 21L.PilotFwd.ZG.En_3I0

It is used to enable/disable forward pilot distance zone controlled by residual current fault detector
element. (Mho or Quad characteristics, phase-to-ground)

Forward pilot distance zone (phase-to-ground) will be controlled by the signal "FD.ROC_Pkp" if the
setting is set as "Enabled".

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-57

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

51. 21L.PilotFwd.ZG.En_NeuDir_Blk

It is used to enable/disable forward pilot phase-to-ground distance element blocked by direction

control element of earth fault protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics)

This setting is recommended to be set as "Enabled".

When the setting is set as "Enabled", these settings [50/51G.DIR.RCA],

[50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd], [50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd], [50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev],
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev], [50/51G.DIR.3I0_Min] and [50/51G.DIR.3U0_Min] should be set
correctly according the actual situation.

3 52. 21L.PilotFwd.ZG.En_NegDir_Blk

It is used to enable/disable forward phase-to-ground pilot distance element blocked by direction

control element of negative-sequence overcurrent protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics)

This setting is recommended to be set as "Enabled".

When the setting is set as "Enabled", these settings [50/51Q.DIR.RCA],

[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd], [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd], [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev],
[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev], [50/51Q.DIR.I2_Min] and [50/51Q.DIR.U2_Min] should be set
correctly according the actual situation.

53. 21L.PilotFwd.LoadEnch.ZG.En

It is used to enable/disable phase-to-ground load trapezoid characteristics for forward pilot distance
zone. (Mho or Quad characteristics)

54. 21L.PilotFwd.ZP.RCA

It is used to set downward offset angle of the reactance line for quadrilateral forward phase-to-
phase pilot distance element.

The setting is used to prevent phase-to-phase distance element from overreaching during the fault
with resistance. The setting is associated with the setting [21L.PilotFwd.En_ReacLine]. And its
value is valid when the setting [21L.PilotFwd.En_ReacLine] is set as "Enabled".

The setting is recommended to be set according to the maximum fault resistance considered for
phase-to-phase fault.

Its recommended value is 15°.

55. 21L.PilotFwd.ZP.Z_Set

It is used to set impedance setting of forward phase-to-phase pilot distance element. (Mho or Quad
characteristics)

This setting shall be sensitive enough to the fault in the remote end of the protected line. For lines
longer than 60km, it is usually set 1.3~1.5 times the impedance of whole line, for shorter lines,
1.5~2.0 times the impedance of whole line is recommended.

For parallel lines, phase-to-phase zone element of pilot distance protection will tend to underreach

3-58 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

due to mutual coupling. Therefore, it is recommended to increase the setting.

56. 21L.PilotFwd.ZP.R_Set

It is used to set resistance setting of quadrilateral forward phase-to-phase pilot distance element.

If this setting is too large compared with [21L.PilotFwd.ZP.Z_Set], then overreach is likely to happen.
Thus, the recommended setting principle is:

[21L.PilotFwd.ZP.R_Set]≤4×[21L.PilotFwd.ZP.Z_Set]

57. 21L.PilotFwd.ZP.R_Offset

It is used to set shift resistance setting of quadrilateral forward phase-to-phase pilot distance
element.
3
It is used to cut off the unwanted area in second quadrant.

58. 21L.PilotFwd.ZP.En_NegDir_Blk

It is used to enable/disable reverse phase-to-phase pilot distance element blocked by direction

control element of negative-sequence overcurrent protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics)

When the setting is set as "Enabled", these settings [50/51Q.DIR.RCA],

[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd], [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd], [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev],
[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev], [50/51Q.DIR.I2_Min] and [50/51Q.DIR.U2_Min] should be set
correctly according the actual situation.

59. 21L.PilotFwd.LoadEnch.ZP.En

It is used to enable/disable phase-to-phase load trapezoid characteristics for forward pilot distance
zone. (Mho or Quad characteristics)

60. 21L.PilotFwd.En_PSBR

It is used to enable/disable forward pilot distance zone controlled by PSBR. (Mho or Quad
characteristics)

When the setting is set as "Enabled", the power swing blocking for forward pilot distance zone will
be released if corresponding conditions are satisfied.

61. 21L.PilotFwd.En_ReacLine

It is used to enable/disable forward pilot distance zone controlled by the reactance line. (Mho or
Quad characteristics)

The relevant settings are [21L.PilotFwd.ZG.RCA] and [21L.PilotFwd.ZP.RCA].

62. 21L.PilotRev.Real_K0

It is used to set real component of zero-sequence compensation coefficient for reverse pilot
distance zone.

The calculation equation is:

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-59

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

𝑍̇0𝐿 − 𝑍̇1𝐿
[21𝐿. 𝑃𝑖𝑙𝑜𝑡𝑅𝑒𝑣. 𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑙_𝐾0] = 𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑙 { }
3𝑍̇1𝐿

Where:

Z0L and Z1L are zero and positive sequence impedance of the line respectively.

63. 21L.PilotRev.Imag_K0

It is used to set imaginary component of zero-sequence compensation coefficient for reverse pilot
distance zone.

The calculation equation is:

3 𝑍̇0𝐿 − 𝑍̇1𝐿
[21𝐿. 𝑃𝑖𝑙𝑜𝑡𝑅𝑒𝑣. 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑔_𝐾0] = 𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑙 { }
3𝑍̇1𝐿

Where:

Z0L and Z1L are zero and positive sequence impedance of the line respectively.

64. 21L.PilotRev.phi1_Reach

It is used to set phase angle of positive-sequence impedance for reverse pilot distance zone.

It should be calculated based on the line parameters.

The calculation equation is:

𝑋1
[21𝐿. 𝑃𝑖𝑙𝑜𝑡𝑅𝑒𝑣. 𝑝ℎ𝑖1_𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑐ℎ] = 𝑡𝑎𝑛−1 ( )
𝑅1

Where:

X1 and R1 are positive sequence reactance and resistance of the line respectively

65. 21L.PilotRev.ZG.RCA

It is used to set downward offset angle of the reactance line for reverse pilot distance zone. (phase-
to-ground)

It is used to prevent reverse pilot distance zone (phase-to-ground) from overreaching during the
fault with resistance. The setting is associated with the setting [21L.PilotRev.En_ReacLine]. And it
is valid only if the setting [21L.PilotRev.En_ReacLine] is set as "Enabled".

The setting is recommended to be set according to the maximum fault resistance considered for
phase-to-ground fault.

Its recommended value is 15°.

66. 21L.PilotRev.ZG.Z_Set

It is used to set impedance setting of reverse pilot distance zone. (Mho or Quad characteristics,
phase-to-ground)

Under weak power source condition, when an internal fault occurs, the device at weak power

3-60 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

source end could not detect the fault, then pilot distance protection could not operate for internal
fault. The problem is eliminated by the weak infeed logic based on the impedance setting of pilot
distance protection in reverse direction. Shown as following figure, if permissive signal from remote
side is received by weak infeed end, while the pilot reverse zone doesn’t start, then it is confirmed
as internal fault.

21L.PilotFwd.ZG.Z_Set

ZL
21L.PilotRev.ZG.Z_Rev
EM M A Fault B N EN

3
21L.PilotRev.ZG.Z_Rev
21L.PilotFwd.ZG.Z_Set

The protection area of reverse pilot distance element should overlap the protection area of the
fowward pilot distance element in reverse direction. Thus, the recommended setting principle is:

[21L.PilotRev.ZG.Z_Set] (local end)=k×{[21L.PilotFwd.ZG.Z_Set] (remote end)-ZL}

Where:

k is reliability coefficient, recommended value is 1.3~1.5.

ZL is the impedance of the protected line.

67. 21L.PilotRev.ZG.R_Set

It is used to set resistance setting of quadrilateral reverse phase-to-phase pilot distance element.

If this setting is too large compared with [21L.PilotRev.ZG.Z_Set], then overreach is likely to happen.
Thus, the recommended setting principle is:

[21L.PilotRev.ZG.R_Set]≤4×[21L.PilotRev.ZP.G_Set]

68. 21L.PilotRev.ZG.R_Offset

It is used to set shift resistance setting of quadrilateral reverse phase-to-ground pilot distance zone.

It is used to cut off the unwanted area in fourth quadrant.

69. 21L.PilotRev.ZG.En_3I0

It is used to enable/disable reverse pilot distance zone controlled by residual current fault detector
element. (phase-to-ground)

Reverse pilot distance zone (phase-to-ground) will be controlled by the signal "FD.ROC_Pkp" if
the setting is set as "Enabled".

70. 21L.PilotRev.LoadEnch.ZG.En

It is used to enable/disable phase-to-ground load trapezoid characteristics for reverse pilot distance

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-61

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

zone. (Mho or Quad characteristics)

71. 21L.PilotRev.ZP.RCA

It is used to set downward offset angle of the reactance line for reverse phase-to-phase pilot
distance element.

It is used to prevent reverse phase-to-ground pilot distance element from overreaching during the
fault with resistance. The setting is associated with the setting [21L.PilotRev.En_ReacLine]. And it
is valid only if the setting [21L.PilotRev.En_ReacLine] is set as "Enabled".

The setting is recommended to be set according to the maximum fault resistance considered for
3 phase-to-ground fault.

Its recommended value is 15°.

72. 21L.PilotRev.ZP.Z_Set

It is used to set impedance setting of reverse pilot distance zone. (phase-to-phase)

Under weak power source condition, when an internal fault occurs, the device at weak power
source end could not detect the fault, then pilot distance protection could not operate for internal
fault. The problem is eliminated by the weak infeed logic based on the impedance setting of pilot
distance protection in reverse direction. Shown as following figure, if permissive signal from remote
side is received by weak infeed end, while the pilot reverse zone doesn′t start, then it is confirmed
as internal fault.

21L.PilotFwd.ZP.Z_Set

ZL
21L.PilotRev.ZP.Z_Rev
EM M A Fault B N EN

21L.PilotRev.ZP.Z_Rev
21L.PilotFwd.ZP.Z_Set

The protection area of reverse pilot distance element should overlap the protection area of the
fowward pilot distance element in reverse direction. Thus, the recommended setting principle is:

[21L.PilotRev.ZG.Z_Set] (local end)=k×{[21L.PilotFwd.ZG.Z_Set] (remote end)-ZL}.

Where:

k is reliability coefficient, recommended value is 1.3~1.5.

ZL is the impedance of the protected line.

73. 21L.PilotRev.ZP.R_Set

It is used to set resistance setting of quadrilateral reverse phase-to-phase pilot distance element.

If this setting is too large compared with [21L.PilotRev.ZP.Z_Set], then overreach is likely to happen.

3-62 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Thus, the recommended setting principle is:

[21L.PilotRev.ZP.R_Set]≤4×[21L.PilotRev.ZP.Z_Set]

74. 21L.PilotRev.ZP.R_Offset

It is used to set shift resistance setting of quadrilateral reverse phase-to-phase pilot distance zone.

It is used to cut off the unwanted area in fourth quadrant.

75. 21L.PilotRev.LoadEnch.ZP.En

It is used to enable/disable phase-to-phase load trapezoid characteristics for reverse pilot distance
zone. (Mho or Quad characteristics)
3
76. 21L.PilotRev.En_PSBR

It is used to enable/disable reverse pilot distance zone controlled by PSBR.

When the setting is set as "Enabled", the power swing blocking for reverse pilot distance zone will
be released if corresponding conditions are satisfied.

77. 21L.PilotRev.En_ReacLine

It is used to enable/disable reverse pilot distance zone controlled by the reactance line.

The relevant settings are [21L.PilotRev.ZG.RCA] and [21L.PilotRev.ZP.RCA]

3.10 Out-of-step Protection (78)

3.10.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsOOS Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsOOS Settings

3.10.2 Setting List

Table 3.10-1 Out-of-step protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
78.En
Enabled

Disabled
78.En_Trp
Enabled

78.Z_Fwd (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-63

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

78.Z_Rev (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

78.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °

78.phi_Start 0~180 1 °

78.phi_Trp 0~180 1 °

78.N_Limit 1~20 1

3 3.10.3 Calculation Principle

1. 78.En

It is used to enable/disable out-of-step protection.

2. 78.En_Trp

It is used to enable/disable out-of-step protection operate to trip. Out-of-step protection operates to

issue tripping command only if the setting is set as "Enabled".

3. 78.Z_Fwd

It is used to set the forward impedance setting of zone detector element.

4. 78.Z_Rev

It is used to set the reversal impedance setting of zone detector element.

In order to locate the distance between the oscillation center and where the device is equipped,
setting impedance measurement element is used to confirm the operation range of separation
device, the operation characteristic of zone relay is based on impedance discrimination. Out-of-
step protection will operate when both zone relay and out-of-step relay operate.

ZM * ZLine ZN
EM G 52 52 G EN

I U

IED

ZRev ZFwd

Where:

ZM and ZN are respective system impedances at M side and N side.

ZFwd is the impedance from zone relay location to side-N system, i.e., [78.Z_Fwd]

ZRev is the impedance from zone relay location to side-M system, i.e., [78.Z_Rev]

3-64 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

5. 78.phi1_Reach

It is used to set the system impedance angle for the zone detector.

The impedance angle is calculated based on the line parameters. The equation is as bellow.

𝑋1
[78. 𝑝ℎ𝑖1_𝑅𝑒𝑎𝑐ℎ] = 𝑡𝑎𝑛−1 ( )
𝑅1

Where:

X1 and R1 are positive sequence reactance and resistance of the line respectively.

6. 78.phi_Start
3
It is used to set the minimum start angle of out-of-step condition.

It generally should be greater than maximum load angle.

7. 78.phi_Trp

It is used to set the maximum tripping angle after out-of-step protection operating, which is used to
prevent the circuit breaker from incorrect operation due to too large current during tripping.

It is generally set based on the breaking capacity of circuit breaker.

8. 78.N_Limit

It is used to set the number setting of out-of-step cycle.

If the device detects the out-of-step condition and issues tripping command after the time delay
(i.e., the setting [78.N_Limit]), performing separation. The setting depends on the coordination of
the out of step relays.

Its recommended value is 1.

3.11 Distance SOTF Protection (21SOTF)

3.11.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsDist SOTF Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsSOTF Settings

3.11.2 Setting List

Table 3.11-1 Distance SOTF protection Settings

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-65

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

SOTF.t_En 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

21SOTF.t_ManCls 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

21SOTF.t_3PAR 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

21SOTF.t_1PAR 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
21SOTF.En
Enabled
3 Disabled
21SOTF.Z2.En_ManCls
Enabled

Disabled
21SOTF.Z3.En_ManCls
Enabled

Disabled
21SOTF.Z4.En_ManCls
Enabled

Disabled
21SOTF.Z2.En_3PAR
Enabled

Disabled
21SOTF.Z3.En_3PAR
Enabled

Disabled
21SOTF.Z4.En_3PAR
Enabled

Disabled
21SOTF.Z2.En_PSBR
Enabled

Disabled
21SOTF.Z3.En_PSBR
Enabled

Disabled
21SOTF.Z4.En_PSBR
Enabled

Disabled
21SOTF.Z2.En_1PAR
Enabled

21SOTF.t_PDF 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

21SOTF.En_PDF Disabled

3-66 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Enabled

SOTF.U_Ddl 0.000~200.000 0.001 V

SOTF.t_Ddl 0.200~100.000 0.001 s

ManClsBI

CBPos

SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls ManClsBI/CBPos

AutoInit
3
All

3.11.3 Calculation Principle

1. SOTF.t_En

It is used to set time delay of enabling SOTF protection.

It should be more than the fixed time of closing the circuit breaker, but should not be too long. Its
recommended value is 3s.

The setting is shared by distance SOTF protection, phase current SOTF protection and residual
current SOTF protection.

2. 21SOTF.t_ManCls

It is used to set time delay of distance protection accelerating to trip when manual closing.

3. 21SOTF.t_3PAR

It is used to set time delay of distance protection accelerating to trip when 3-pole reclosing.

4. 21SOTF.t_1PAR

It is used to set time delay of distance protection accelerating to trip when 1-pole reclosing.

5. 21SOTF.En

It is used to enable/disable distance SOTF protection.

6. 21SOTF.Z2.En_ManCls

It is used to enable/disable zone 2 of distance SOTF protection for manual closing.

7. 21SOTF.Z3.En_ManCls

It is used to enable/disable zone 3 of distance SOTF protection for manual closing.

8. 21SOTF.Z4.En_ManCls

It is used to enable/disable zone 4 of distance SOTF protection for manual closing.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-67

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

9. 21SOTF.Z2.En_3PAR

It is used to enable/disable zone 2 of distance SOTF protection for 3-pole reclosing.

10. 21SOTF.Z3.En_3PAR

It is used to enable/disable zone 3 of distance SOTF protection for 3-pole reclosing.

11. 21SOTF.Z4.En_3PAR

It is used to enable/disable zone 4 of distance SOTF protection for 3-pole reclosing.

12. 21SOTF.Z2.En_PSBR
3 It is used to enable/disable zone 2 controlled by PSB of distance SOTF protection for 3-pole
reclosing.

13. 21SOTF.Z3.En_PSBR

It is used to enable/disable zone 3 controlled by PSB of distance SOTF protection for 3-pole
reclosing.

14. 21SOTF.Z4.En_PSBR

It is used to enable/disable zone 4 controlled by PSB of distance SOTF protection for 3-pole
reclosing.

15. 21SOTF.Z2.En_1PAR

It is used to enable/disable zone 2 of distance SOTF protection for 1-pole reclosing.

16. 21SOTF.t_PDF

It is used to set time delay of distance protection operating under pole discrepancy conditions.

This setting is the time delay for distance SOTF protection for another fault on the healthy phase
during pole discrepancy condition. The setting is recommended to set as 150ms.

When the device detects VT circuit failure, distance protection will be

disabled automatically.

17. 21SOTF.En_PDF

It is used to enable/disable distance SOTF protection under pole discrepancy conditions.

Under pole discrepancy condition after single-phase tripping, distance SOTF protection for pole
discrepancy will operate with the time delay [21SOTF.t_PDF] if another fault happens to the healthy
phase. This function is provided based on the high possibility that the late fault might be at the
same point with the previous fault, which could reduce the fault clearing time.

3-68 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Distance SOTF protection for pole discrepancy will operate for external fault
on healthy phase during pole discrepancy condition after a time delay of
150ms, however the fault will be cleared in 150ms, so the possibility of
maloperation for external fault is very low. But users should evaluate
carefully.

18. SOTF.U_Ddl

It is used to set undervoltage setting of deadline detection.

It is used to judge the dead line.

When manual SOTF mode is set as "AutoInit", i.e., initiated by no voltage detection, distance
SOTF protection will be initiated by dead line check. When three phases currents are all smaller
3
than 0.04In and no fault detector element operates, SOTF logic will be enabled with the time delay
[SOTF.t_Ddl] if three phase voltages are all smaller than the setting [SOTF.U_Ddl].

Its recommend value is 0.15Un.

19. SOTF.t_Ddl

It is used to set time delay of deadline detection.

20. SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls

It is used to select manual SOTF mode.

The setting provides the selection for accelerated tripping mode, which can be from circuit breaker
position, external binary signal of manual closing or dead line check, the options are shown as
follows.

ManClsBI: initiated by input signal of manual closing

CBPos: initiated by CB position

ManClsBI/CBPos: initiated by either input signal of manual closing or CB position

AutoInit: initiated by no voltage detection

All: initiated by both binary input of manual closing, CB position, or initated by no voltage detection

3.12 Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51P)

3.12.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsOC Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsOC Settings

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-69

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.12.2 Setting List

Table 3.12-1 Phase overcurrent protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

50/51P.VCE.Upp 10.000~100.000 0.001 V

50/51P.VCE.U2 2.000~57.000 0.001 V

50/51P.VCE.3U0 2.000~57.000 0.001 V

50/51P.DIR.RCA -180~179 1 °
3 50/51P.DIR.RCA_NegOC -180~179 1 °

50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd 10~90 1 °

50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd 10~90 1 °

50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Rev 10~90 1 °

50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Rev 10~90 1 °

U2

Upp
50/51P.DIR.Opt_PolarizedVolt
Up

U1

50/51P.DIR.I_Min (0.010~1.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51P.DIR.U_Min 1.000~10.000 0.001 V

Disabled
50/51P.En_VTS_Blk
Enabled

50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2 0.100~1.000 0.001

50/51P.HMB.I_Rls (2.000~30.000)×In 0.001 A

PhaseBlk

50/51P.HMB.Opt_Blk CrossBlk

MaxPhaseBlk

50/51P1.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51P1.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

50/51P1.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

50/51P1.En_Volt_Blk Disabled

3-70 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Enabled

Non_Directional

50/51P1.Opt_Dir Forward

Reverse

Disabled
50/51P1.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
3
50/51P1.En
Enabled

Trp
50/51P1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

ANSIE

ANSIV

ANSIN

ANSIM

ANSIDefTime

ANSILTE

ANSILTV

ANSILT
50/51P1.Opt_Curve
IECN

IECV

IECI

IECE

IECST

IECLT

IECDefTime

UserDefine

Inst
50/51P1.Opt_Curve_DropOut
DefTime

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-71

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

IDMT

50/51P1.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

50/51P1.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

50/51P1.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

50/51P1.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

50/51P1.C 0.0000~1.2000 0.0001

3 50/51P2.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51P2.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

50/51P2.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
50/51P2.En_Volt_Blk
Enabled

Non_Directional

50/51P2.Opt_Dir Forward

Reverse

Disabled
50/51P2.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
50/51P2.En
Enabled

Trp
50/51P2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

ANSIE

ANSIV

ANSIN

ANSIM
50/51P2.Opt_Curve
ANSIDefTime

ANSILTE

ANSILTV

ANSILT

3-72 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

IECN

IECV

IECI

IECE

IECST

IECLT

IECDefTime
3
UserDefine

Inst

50/51P2.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime

IDMT

50/51P2.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

50/51P2.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

50/51P2.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

50/51P2.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

50/51P2.C 0.0000~1.2000 0.0001

50/51P3.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51P3.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

50/51P3.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
50/51P3.En_Volt_Blk
Enabled

Non_Directional

50/51P3.Opt_Dir Forward

Reverse

Disabled
50/51P3.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
50/51P3.En
Enabled

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-73

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Trp
50/51P3.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

ANSIE

ANSIV

ANSIN

ANSIM
3 ANSIDefTime

ANSILTE

ANSILTV

ANSILT
50/51P3.Opt_Curve
IECN

IECV

IECI

IECE

IECST

IECLT

IECDefTime

UserDefine

Inst

50/51P3.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime

IDMT

50/51P3.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

50/51P3.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

50/51P3.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

50/51P3.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

50/51P3.C 0.0000~1.2000 0.0001

50/51P4.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51P4.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

3-74 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

50/51P4.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
50/51P4.En_Volt_Blk
Enabled

Non_Directional

50/51P4.Opt_Dir Forward

Reverse

Disabled
3
50/51P4.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
50/51P4.En
Enabled

Trp
50/51P4.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

ANSIE

ANSIV

ANSIN

ANSIM

ANSIDefTime

ANSILTE

ANSILTV

ANSILT
50/51P4.Opt_Curve
IECN

IECV

IECI

IECE

IECST

IECLT

IECDefTime

UserDefine

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-75

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Inst

50/51P4.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime

IDMT

50/51P4.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

50/51P4.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

50/51P4.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

3 50/51P4.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

50/51P4.C 0.0000~1.2000 0.0001

50/51P5.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51P5.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

50/51P5.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
50/51P5.En_Volt_Blk
Enabled

Non_Directional

50/51P5.Opt_Dir Forward

Reverse

Disabled
50/51P5.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
50/51P5.En
Enabled

Trp
50/51P5.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

ANSIE

ANSIV

ANSIN
50/51P5.Opt_Curve
ANSIM

ANSIDefTime

ANSILTE

3-76 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

ANSILTV

ANSILT

IECN

IECV

IECI

IECE

IECST
3
IECLT

IECDefTime

UserDefine

Inst

50/51P5.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime

IDMT

50/51P5.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

50/51P5.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

50/51P5.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

50/51P5.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

50/51P5.C 0.0000~1.2000 0.0001

50/51P6.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51P6.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

50/51P6.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
50/51P6.En_Volt_Blk
Enabled

Non_Directional

50/51P6.Opt_Dir Forward

Reverse

Disabled
50/51P6.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-77

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
50/51P6.En
Enabled

Trp
50/51P6.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

ANSIE

ANSIV
3 ANSIN

ANSIM

ANSIDefTime

ANSILTE

ANSILTV

ANSILT
50/51P6.Opt_Curve
IECN

IECV

IECI

IECE

IECST

IECLT

IECDefTime

UserDefine

Inst

50/51P6.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime

IDMT

50/51P6.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

50/51P6.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

50/51P6.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

50/51P6.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

50/51P6.C 0.0000~1.2000 0.0001

3-78 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.12.3 Calculation Principle

Phase overcurrent protection is provided with six stages, each stage has independent current
setting, time delay and control logic. Generally, stage 1 of phase overcurrent protection requires
instantaneously operating, and the protected range shall not be less than 20% of the total line.
Stage 2 of phase overcurrent protection shall protect the whole line. Stage 3 and stage 4 of phase
overcurrent protection can be backup protection for the line, and also can be remote backup
protection for the adjacent line.

1. 50/51P.VCE.Upp

It is used to set low voltage setting of voltage control element.

3
The setting should be set according to the phase-to-phase voltage; which can be based on the
following equation.

𝑈𝑚𝑖𝑛
[50/51𝑃. 𝑉𝐶𝐸. 𝑈𝑝𝑝] =
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙

Where:

Umin is the possible minimum phase-to-phase voltage during normal operation, which can be
normally taken as 0.9Un. (Un is secondary value of the rated phase-to-phase voltage)

Krel is reliable coefficient, 1.1~1.2.

It is recommended to set as 0.6~0.8Un.

2. 50/51P.VCE.U2

It is used to set negative-sequence voltage setting of voltage control element.

The setting should be greater than the imbalanced voltage during normal operation, the imbalanced
voltage value can be determined through actual measurement.

It is recommended to set as 0.04~0.08Un.

3. 50/51P.VCE.3U0

It is used to set zero-sequence voltage setting of voltage control element.

The setting should be larger than the maximum residual voltage during normal operation.

4. 50/51P.DIR.RCA

It is used to set the characteristic angle of direction control element.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-79

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Ua

[50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]

Non-operating Ia
area

[50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Rev] Operating area in

forward direction

[50/51P.DIR.RCA]

Operating area in

3
reverse direction

[50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]

[50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Rev] Non-operating
area

By setting the characteristic angle to determine the most sensitive forward angle of phase current,
using phase current with phase polarized voltage to determine the direction of phase current in
forward direction or reverse direction. The setting defines the system impedance angle of positive-
sequence circuit.

Its recommended value is 45°.

5. 50/51P.DIR.RCA_NegOC

It is used to set the negative-sequence characteristic angle of direction control element.

By setting the characteristic angle to determine the most sensitive forward angle of negative-
sequence current, using negative-sequence current with negative-sequence voltage to determine
the direction of negative-sequence current in forward direction or reverse direction.

Its recommended value is 45°.

6. 50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd

It is used to set the minimum boundary in forward direction of phase overcurrent protection.

Its recommended value is 90°.

7. 50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd

It is used to set the maximum boundary in forward direction of phase overcurrent protection.

Its recommended value is 90°.

8. 50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Rev

It is used to set the minimum boundary in reverse direction of phase overcurrent protection.

Its recommended value is 90°.

3-80 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

9. 50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Rev

It is used to set the maximum boundary in reverse direction of phase overcurrent protection.

Its recommended value is 90°.

10. 50/51P.DIR.Opt_PolarizedVolt

It is used to select the voltage polarization mode of direction control element for phase overcurrent
protection.

U2: negative-sequence voltage is used as polarized voltage

Upp: phase-to-phase voltage is used as polarized voltage

3
Up: phase-to-ground voltage is used as polarized voltage

U1: positive-sequence voltage is used as polarized

11. 50/51P.DIR.I_Min

It is used to set the minimum operating current setting of direction control element.

Its recommended value is 0.05In.

12. 50/51P.DIR.U_Min

It is used to set the minimum operating voltage setting of direction control element.

Its recommended value is 4V.

13. 50/51P.En_VTS_Blk

It is used to enable/disable phase overcurrent protection is blocked by VT circuit failure when VT

circuit supervision is enabled and VT circuit fails.

When VT circuit fails, phase overcurrent protection will be blocked if the setting is set as "Enabled".
Phase overcurrent protection is not controlled by direction control element and voltage control
element if the setting is set as "Disabled".

14. 50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2

It is used to set the coefficient of second harmonics of harmonic control element.

In order to prevent phase overcurrent protection from maloperation during the transformer
energized for transformer-in-line application, harmonic control element can be used to block phase
overcurrent protection. When the percentage of second harmonic component to fundamental
component in phase current is larger than the setting [50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2], harmonic control
element operates to block phase overcurrent protection if the setting [50/51Pi.En_Hm_Blk] is set
as "Enabled".

If second harmonic component of phase current is lower than 0.04In, then harmonic calculation is
not carried out and harmonic control element does not operate.

Its recommended value is 0.15.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-81

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

15. 50/51P.HMB.I_Rls

It is used to set the current setting of releasing harmonic control element.

It shall be greater than possible maximum inrush current of the transformer.

It is recommended to set as 20In.

16. 50/51P.HMB.Opt_Blk

It is used to select the harmonic blocking mode.

PhaseBlk: phase blocking

3 CrossBlk: cross blocking

MaxPhaseBlk: maximum phase blocking

17. 50/51P*.I_Set

It is used to set the current setting for stage * of phase overcurrent protection. (*=1~6)

⚫ In order to guarantee selectivity, the operating range of instantaneous overcurrent protection

shall not exceed the end of protected line. The operating current of instantaneous overcurrent
protection shall be greater than the maximum short-circuit current when a fault happens at the
end of protected line.

[50/51𝑃 ∗. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥

Where:

Imax is the maximum three-phase short-circuit current measured at the location where the device is
installed in case of short circuit at the end of the protected line.

Krel is reliable coefficient, considering relay setting value error, short-circuit current calculation error,
as well as influence of non-periodic component on protection in short-circuit current, taking 1.2~1.3
or above.

⚫ Phase overcurrent protection with definite time delay requires protecting the whole line and
cooperating with phase overcurrent protection of adjacent line. According to the specific
condition of adjacent line protection, the setting calculation principle is as follows:

In coordination with instantaneous overcurrent protection of adjacent lines

[50/51𝑃 ∗. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐾𝑏.𝑚𝑎𝑥 × 𝐼𝑂𝑝.1

Where:

Kb.max is branch coefficient of current, which is equal to the ratio of the current passing through the
device to the current passing through the faulty line during an earth fault at the end of protected
range of the coordinated stage of overcurrent protection of the line.

IOp.1 is operating current of instantaneous overcurrent protection in adjacent lines.

Krel is reliable coefficient, taking 1.1 or above.

3-82 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

⚫ Phase overcurrent protection with definite time delay requires being used as backup protection
of the transformer equipped with transformer current differential protection, the setting shall be
set and calculated according to the following equation.

[50/51𝑃 ∗. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾 × 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥

Where:

Imax is the maximum three-phase short-circuit current of the local line when a fault happens to the
other sides of the transformer for phase overcurrent protection which is permitted to cover the
transformer.

K is the coordination coefficient, K≥1.3.

3
⚫ Due to the time dely of phase overcurrent protection with definite-time characteristics is longer
if the fault is closer to the power source, phase overcurrent protection with inverse-time
characteristics is used to shorten the operation time, the setting calculation principle is as
follows:

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐾𝑠𝑠
[50/51𝑃 ∗. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = × 𝐼𝐿.𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝐾𝑟𝑒

Where:

Krel is reliablity coefficient (coordination coefficient), taking 1.2.

Kre is drop-out coefficient, taking 0.9~0.95.

Kss is self-starting coefficient, determined by specific connection and load property via network.

IL.max is maximal load current through protection range.

⚫ To be used as overload alarm

It can be set as 1.1 times of the rated secondary current.

18. 50/51P*.t_Op

It is used to set the operating time delay for stage * of phase overcurrent protection. (*=1~6)

⚫ When the operating current is in coordination with instantaneous overcurrent protection of the
adjacent line, the operating time of definite-time phase overcurrent protection is:

[50/51P*.t_Op]＝t1+Δt

Where:

t1 is the fixed operating time of instantaneous overcurrent protection of the adjacent line, about
0.06~0.1s, or neglected sometimes

Δt is time difference, usually takes 0.3s.

⚫ When the operating current is in coordination with definite-time stage of phase overcurrent
protection of adjacent line, the operating time of definite-time phase overcurrent protection is:

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-83

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

[50/51P*.t_Op]＝t2+Δt

Where:

t2 is the fixed operating time of the coordinated stage of phase overcurrent protection of adjacent
line.

Δt is time difference, usually takes 0.3s.

19. 50/51P*.t_DropOut

It is used to set the dropout time delay for stage * of phase overcurrent protection. (*=1~6)

3 This setting is valid only when definite-time dropout characteristic is selected.

The definite-time dropout characteristic can refer to corresponding section in "Technical Manual".

20. 50/51P*.En_Volt_Blk

It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase overcurrent protection controlled by voltage control

element. (*=1~6)

21. 50/51P*.Opt_Dir

It is used to select the direction characteristic for stage * of phase overcurrent protection. (*=1~6)

Non_Directional: no direction

Forward: forward direction

Reverse: reverse direction

22. 50/51P*.En_Hm_Blk

It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase overcurrent protection controlled by harmonic control

element. (*=1~6)

23. 50/51P*.En

It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase overcurrent protection. (*=1~6)

24. 50/51P*.Opt_Trp/Alm

It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase overcurrent protection operate to trip or alarm. (*=1~6)

Trp: for tripping purpose

Alm: for alarm purpose

25. 50/51P*.Opt_Curve

It is used to select the operating characteristics curve for stage * of phase overcurrent protection.
(*=1~6)

ANSIE: ANSI Extremely Inverse

3-84 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

ANSIV: ANSI Very Inverse

ANSIN: ANSI Normal Inverse

ANSIM: ANSI Moderately Inverse

ANSIDefTime: ANSI Definite Time

ANSILTE: ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse

ANSILTV: ANSI Long Time Very Inverse

ANSILT: ANSI Long Time Inverse

IECN: IEC Normal Inverse 3

IECV: IEC Very Inverse

IEC: IEC Inverse

IECE: IEC Extremely Inverse

IECST: IEC Short-time Inverse

IECLT: IEC Long-time Inverse

IECDefTime: IEC Definite Time

UserDefine: Programmable

When the setting is set as "UserDefine", the user can customize the inverse-time curve
characteristic by setting constants K, α and C.

26. 50/51P*.Opt_Curve_DropOut

It is used to select the dropout characteristics curve for stage * of phase overcurrent protection.
(*=1~6)

Inst: instantaneous dropout characteristics

DefTime: definite-time dropout characteristics

IDMT: inverse-time dropout characteristics

When the operating characteristics curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or user-
defined inverse-time characteristics, the dropout characteristic curve can only be selected as
instantaneous dropout characteristics or definite-time dropout characteristics. The alarm signal
"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked if inverse-time dropout characteristics
is selected.

When the operating characteristics curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the
dropout characteristic curve can be selected as instantaneous dropout characteristics, definite-time
dropout characteristics and ANSI inverse-time dropout characteristics.

27. 50/51P*.TMS

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-85

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

It is used to set time multiplier setting for stage * of inverse-time phase overcurrent protection.
(*=1~6)

This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required by inverse-time phase
overcurrent protection.

28. 50/51P*.tmin

It is used to set the minimum operating time for stage * of inverse-time phase overcurrent protection.
(*=1~6)

When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if calculated operating time is less than the setting
3 [50/51P*.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting [50/51P*.tmin]
automatically.

If it coordinates with other protections, it can be set as "tmin+Δt".

Where:

tmin is minimum operation time of other protections.

Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.

If it is used independently, its recommended value is 0.02s.

29. 50/51P*.K

It is used to set the constant "K" for stage * of customized inverse-time phase overcurrent protection.
(*=1~6)

The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of phase overcurrent
protection. It is valid only if the setting [50/51P*.Opt_Curve] is set as "UserDefine".

30. 50/51P*.Alpha

It is used to set the constant "α" for stage * of customized inverse-time phase overcurrent protection.
(*=1~6)

The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of phase overcurrent
protection. It is valid only if the setting [50/51P*.Opt_Curve] is set as "UserDefine".

31. 50/51P*.C

It is used to set the constant "C" for stage * of customized inverse-time phase overcurrent protection.
(*=1~6)'

The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of phase overcurrent
protection. It is valid only if the setting [50/51P*.Opt_Curve] is set as "UserDefine".

3-86 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.13 Phase Current SOTF Protection (50PSOTF)

3.13.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsOC SOTF Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsSOTF Settings

3.13.2 Setting List 3

Table 3.13-1 Phase current SOTF protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

50PSOTF.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

50PSOTF.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

50PSOTF.Up_Set 0~Un 0.001 V

50PSOTF.Upp_Set 0~Un 0.001 V

50PSOTF.U2_Set 0~Un 0.001 V

50PSOTF.3U0_Set 0~Un 0.001 V

50PSOTF.En_Up_UV Disabled, Enabled

50PSOTF.En_Upp_UV Disabled, Enabled

50PSOTF.En_U2_OV Disabled, Enabled

50PSOTF.En_3U0_OV Disabled, Enabled

50PSOTF.En Disabled, Enabled

50PSOTF. En_Hm2_Blk Disabled, Enabled

3.13.3 Calculation Principle

1. 50PSOTF.I_Set

It is used to set current setting of phase current SOTF protection.

2. 50PSOTF.t_Op

It is used to set Time delay for phase current SOTF protection.

3. 50PSOTF.Up_Set

It is used to set Voltage setting for phase undervoltage supervision logic.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-87

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

In order to improve the reliability, phase current SOTF protection can select phase voltage element
as auxiliary criterion.

Its recommended value is 1V.

4. 50PSOTF.Upp_Set

It is used to set Voltage setting for phase-phase undervoltage supervision logic.

In order to improve the reliability, phase current SOTF protection can select phase-phase voltage
element as auxiliary criterion.

Its recommended value is 1V.

3 5. 50PSOTF.U2_Set

It is used to set Voltage setting for negative-sequence overvoltage supervision logic.

In order to improve the reliability, phase current SOTF protection can select negative-sequence
voltage element as auxiliary criterion.

Its recommended value is 1V.

6. 50PSOTF.3U0_Set

It is used to set Voltage setting for zero-sequence overvoltage supervision logic.

In order to improve the reliability, phase current SOTF protection can select zero-sequence voltage
element as auxiliary criterion.

Its recommended value is 1V.

7. 50PSOTF.En_Up_UV

It is used to enable/disable phase undervoltage supervision logic for phase current SOTF protection.

If the setting is set as "Disabled", the phase undervoltage criterion will not take effect.

8. 50PSOTF.En_Upp_UV

It is used to enable/disable phase-phase undervoltage supervision logic for phase current SOTF
protection.

If the setting is set as "Disabled", the phase-phase undervoltage criterion will not take effect.

9. 50PSOTF.En_U2_OV

It is used to enable/disable negative-sequence overvoltage supervision logic for phase current

SOTF protection.

If the setting is set as "Disabled", the negative-sequence overvoltage criterion will not take effect.

10. 50PSOTF.En_3U0_OV

It is used to enable/disable zero-sequence overvoltage supervision logic for phase current SOTF
protection.

3-88 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

If the setting is set as "Disabled", the zero-sequence ovevoltage criterion will not take effect.

11. 50PSOTF.En

It is used to enable/disable phase current SOTF protection.

12. 50PSOTF. En_Hm2_Blk

It is used to enable/disable second harmonic blocking for phase overcurrent SOTF protection.

For in-line transformer application, large inrush current generated during manual closing and auto-
reclosing will lead to an undesired operation of phase current SOTF protection. Second harmonic
blocking can be selected by the setting [50PSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk] to prevent maloperation due to
inrush current. 3
3.14 Earth Fault Protection (50/51G)

3.14.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsROC Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsROC Settings

3.14.2 Setting List

Table 3.14-1 Earth fault protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

50/51G.DIR.RCA -180~179 1 °

50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd 10~90 1 °

50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd 10~90 1 °

50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev 10~90 1 °

50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev 10~90 1 °

3U0
50/51G.DIR.Opt_PolarizedVolt
U2

50/51G.DIR.3I0_Min (0.050~1.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51G.DIR.3U0_Min 1.000~10.000 0.001 V

50/51G.DIR.Z0_Comp (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

50/51G.En_VTS_Blk Disabled

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-89

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Enabled

50/51G.HMB.K_Hm2 0.100~1.000 0.001

50/51G.HMB.I_Rls (2.000~30.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51G1.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51G1.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

50/51G1.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

3 Non_Directional

50/51G1.Opt_Dir Forward

Reverse

Disabled
50/51G1.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
50/51G1.En
Enabled

Trp
50/51G1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

ANSIE

ANSIV

ANSIN

ANSIM

ANSIDefTime

ANSILTE

50/51G1.Opt_Curve ANSILTV

ANSILT

IECN

IECV

IECI

IECE

IECST

3-90 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

IECLT

IECDefTime

UserDefine

Inst

50/51G1.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime

IDMT

50/51G1.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

3
50/51G1.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

50/51G1.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

50/51G1.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

50/51G1.C 0.0000~1.2000 0.0001

50/51G2.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51G2.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

50/51G2.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Non_Directional

50/51G2.Opt_Dir Forward

Reverse

Disabled
50/51G2.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
50/51G2.En
Enabled

Trp
50/51G2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

ANSIE

ANSIV

50/51G2.Opt_Curve ANSIN

ANSIM

ANSIDefTime

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-91

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

ANSILTE

ANSILTV

ANSILT

IECN

IECV

IECI
3 IECE

IECST

IECLT

IECDefTime

UserDefine

Inst

50/51G2.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime

IDMT

50/51G2.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

50/51G2.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

50/51G2.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

50/51G2.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

50/51G2.C 0.0000~1.2000 0.0001

50/51G3.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51G3.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

50/51G3.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Non_Directional

50/51G3.Opt_Dir Forward

Reverse

Disabled
50/51G3.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled

50/51G3.En Disabled

3-92 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Enabled

Trp
50/51G3.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

ANSIE

ANSIV

ANSIN

ANSIM
3
ANSIDefTime

ANSILTE

ANSILTV

ANSILT
50/51G3.Opt_Curve
IECN

IECV

IECI

IECE

IECST

IECLT

IECDefTime

UserDefine

Inst

50/51G3.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime

IDMT

50/51G3.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

50/51G3.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

50/51G3.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

50/51G3.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

50/51G3.C 0.0000~1.2000 0.0001

50/51G4.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-93

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

50/51G4.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

50/51G4.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Non_Directional

50/51G4.Opt_Dir Forward

Reverse

Disabled
3 50/51G4.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
50/51G4.En
Enabled

Trp
50/51G4.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

ANSIE

ANSIV

ANSIN

ANSIM

ANSIDefTime

ANSILTE

ANSILTV

ANSILT
50/51G4.Opt_Curve
IECN

IECV

IECI

IECE

IECST

IECLT

IECDefTime

UserDefine

50/51G4.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst

3-94 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

DefTime

IDMT

50/51G4.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

50/51G4.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

50/51G4.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

50/51G4.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

50/51G4.C 0.0000~1.2000 0.0001

3
50/51G5.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51G5.t_Op 0.000~100.0000 0.001 s

50/51G5.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Non_Directional

50/51G5.Opt_Dir Forward

Reverse

Disabled
50/51G5.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
50/51G5.En
Enabled

Trp
50/51G5.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

ANSIE

ANSIV

ANSIN

ANSIM

50/51G5.Opt_Curve ANSIDefTime

ANSILTE

ANSILTV

ANSILT

IECN

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-95

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

IECV

IECI

IECE

IECST

IECLT

IECDefTime
3 UserDefine

Inst

50/51G5.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime

IDMT

50/51G5.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

50/51G5.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

50/51G5.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

50/51G5.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

50/51G5.C 0.0000~1.2000 0.0001

50/51G6.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51G6.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

50/51G6.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Non_Directional

50/51G6.Opt_Dir Forward

Reverse

Disabled
50/51G6.En_Hm_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
50/51G6.En
Enabled

Trp
50/51G6.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

50/51G6.Opt_Curve ANSIE

3-96 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

ANSIV

ANSIN

ANSIM

ANSIDefTime

ANSILTE

ANSILTV

ANSILT
3
IECN

IECV

IECI

IECE

IECST

IECLT

IECDefTime

UserDefine

Inst

50/51G6.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime

IDMT

50/51G6.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

50/51G6.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

50/51G6.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

50/51G6.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

50/51G6.C 0.0000~1.2000 0.0001

3.14.3 Calculation Principle

1. 50/51G.DIR.RCA

It is used to set the characteristic angle of direction control element.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-97

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

-U0

[50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]

Non-operating I0
area

Operating area in
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev] forward direction

[50/51G.DIR.RCA]

Operating area in

3
reverse direction

[50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]
Non-operating
area
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]

By setting the characteristic angle to determine the most sensitive forward angle of zero-sequence
current, using zero-sequence current with zero-sequence voltage to determine the direction of zero-
sequence current in forward direction or reverse direction.

For line protection, when the CT polarity is on the busbar side, its recommended value is 45°.

2. 50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd

It is used to set the minimum boundary in forward direction of earth fault protection.

Its recommended value is 90°.

3. 50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd

It is used to set the maximum boundary in forward direction of earth fault protection.

Its recommended value is 90°.

4. 50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev

It is used to set the minimum boundary in reverse direction of earth fault protection.

Its recommended value is 90°.

5. 50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev

It is used to set the maximum boundary in reverse direction of earth fault protection.

Its recommended value is 90°.

6. 50/51G.DIR.Opt_PolarizedVolt

It is used to select the voltage polarization mode of direction control element.

3U0: zero-sequence voltage is used as polarized

3-98 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

U2: negative-sequence voltage is used as polarized voltage

7. 50/51G.DIR.3I0_Min

It is used to set the minimum operating current setting of direction control element.

Its recommended value is 0.05In.

8. 50/51G.DIR.3U0_Min

It is used to set the minimum operating voltage setting of direction control element.

Its recommended value is 4V. Considering the sensitivity of earth fault with high resistance, the
recommended value is 0.5~2V. When it cooperates with other protection with direction control
element, it is recommended to add 0.5~1V on the basis of the similar setting of other protection.
3
9. 50/51G.DIR.Z0_Comp

It is used to set zero-sequence compensation impedance of direction control element.

IED1 IED2 IED3 IED4 IED5 IED6 IED7 IED8

C1 C2 C3

L1 L2 L3 L4

M N
VT2 VT3 VT5

VT1 VT4

L5 L6
C4 C5 C6
O

The setting should make zero-sequence directional element not mal-operate when a fault happens
in forward direction. Usually it can be set according to the secondary value of capacitive reactance
of the series capacitors connected to local line behind VT in series.

⚫ For IED1, IED3 and IED8, there is no series capacitor behind the corresponding VT, the setting
[50/51G.DIR.Z0_Comp] of IED1, IED3 and IED8 should be set as "0".

⚫ For IED2 and IED4, there are series capacitors behind the corresponding VT, but the series
are installed in adjacent lines, usually the series compensations for HV line is
undercompensated mode, the system impedance behind IED2 and IED4 is still inductive
impedance. Hence, the setting [50/51G.DIR.Z0_Comp] of IED2 and IED4 should be set as "0".

⚫ For IED5, if the protection VT is from busbar VT1, when line L5, series capacitor C4 and C5
are in service, there are series capacitors behind the corresponding VT, but C4 and C5 are
undercompensated relative to line L5, so the setting [50/51G.DIR.Z0_Comp] of IED5 should
be set as "0". When line L5, or series capacitor C4 and C5 are out of service, there is no series
capacitor behind the corresponding VT, so the setting [50/51G.DIR.Z0_Comp] of IED5 should
be set as "0". If the protection VT is from line VT2, there is series capacitor C1 behind the

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-99

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

corresponding VT, so the setting [50/51G.DIR.Z0_Comp] of IED5 should be set as "XC1".

⚫ For IED6, if the protection VT is from busbar VT4, similar to IED5, so the setting
[50/51G.DIR.Z0_Comp] of IED6 should be set as "0". If the protection VT is from line VT3,
there is series capacitors C2 behind the corresponding VT, so the setting
[50/51G.DIR.Z0_Comp] of IED6 should be set as "XC2".

⚫ For IED7, if the protection VT is from busbar VT4, similar to IED5, so the setting
[50/51G.DIR.Z0_Comp] of IED7 should be set as "0". If the protection VT is from line VT5,
there is series capacitor C3 behind the corresponding VT, so the setting
[50/51G.DIR.Z0_Comp] of IED7 should be set as "XC3".
3 10. 50/51G.En_VTS_Blk

It is used to enable/disable earth fault protection is blocked by VT circuit failure when VT circuit
supervision is enabled and VT circuit fails.

When VT circuit fails, earth fault protection will be blocked if the setting is set as "Enabled". Earth
fault protection is not controlled by direction control element if the setting is set as "Disabled".

11. 50/51G.HMB.K_Hm2

It is used to set the coefficient of second harmonics of harmonic control element.

In order to prevent earth fault protection from maloperation during the transformer energized for
transformer-in-line application, harmonic control element can be used to block earth fault protection.
When the percentage of second harmonic component to fundamental component in phase current
is larger than the setting [50/51G.HMB.K_Hm2], harmonic control element operates to block phase
overcurrent protection if the setting [50/51Gi.En_Hm_Blk] is set as "Enabled".

If second harmonic component of residual current is lower than 0.04In, then harmonic calculation
is not carried out and harmonic control element does not operate.

Its recommended value is 0.15.

12. 50/51G.HMB.I_Rls

It is used to set the current setting of releasing harmonic control element.

It shall be greater than possible maximum inrush current of the transformer. It is recommended to
set as 20In.

13. 50/51G*.3I0_Set

It is used set the zero-sequence current setting for stage * of earth fault protection. (*=1~6)

1) When stage * of earth fault protection is used as fast protection, the following conditions should
be considered.

⚫ It shall be greater than the maximum residual current under pole disagreement condition.

⚫ It shall be greater than the maximum residual current when internal fault happens to the end
of the line.

3-100 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Its calculation principle is:

[50/51𝐺 ∗ .3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 3𝐼0.𝑚𝑎𝑥

Where:

I0.max is the maximum zero-sequence current for the external fault.

Krel is the reliability coefficient, usually take 1.3 or above

2) When stage * of earth fault protection is used as definite-time protection, it should coordinate
with the protection of other adjacent line.

⚫ It shall be greater than the maximum residual current under pole disagreement condition.
3
⚫ It shall coordinate with the measurement element in the adjacent line and ensure sensitive
enough for the fault happening to the end of the line.

[50/51𝐺 ∗ .3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐾𝑏𝑟 × 𝐼0.𝐴𝑑𝑗

Where:

Krel is the reliability coefficient, usually take 1.1~1.3

Kbr is the branching coefficient of residual current, which is equal to ratio of residual current passing
through the device to passing through the faulty line during an earth fault at the end of protected
section of coordinated stage of earth fault protection of the line. Maximum value among various
operation conditions can be taken

I0.Adj is current setting of stage coordinated in the adjacent line

3) When earth fault protection is used as backup protection for ground fault of this line through
resistor and ground fault of adjacent elements, and its primary current value should not be more
than 300A. Under the condition of avoidance from the maximum unbalance current of three-
phase short circuit at other sides of the transformer at the end of this line, it is necessary to
meet the requirement that the fault at the end of the adjacent lines has sufficient sensitivity; it
is necessary to check the coordination condition with the definite-time earth fault protection of
the adjacent line, and the operating time is set according to the coordination relation.

[50/51𝐺 ∗ .3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐾𝑎𝑝𝑒𝑟 × 𝐾𝑠𝑡 × 𝑓𝑖 × 𝐼𝑜𝑝.1

Where:

Krel is reliability coefficient, usually taking 1.1 or above.

Kaper is a periodic component coefficient, taking as 1.5~2.0.

Kst is same type coefficient, taken as 0.5 when the transformer is of the same type.

fi is the amplitude error of transformer, generally taking as 0.1.

Iop.1 is three-phase short-circuit current at the end of local line.

4) When earth fault protection is used as inverse-time protecton, the calculation principle is

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-101

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

[50/51𝐺 ∗ .3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑝 × 𝐼𝑑𝑧

Where:

Kp is the coordinating coefficient, which can be taken as 1.15~1.25.

Idz is the current setting of inverse-time earth fault protection to be coordinated.

14. 50/51G*.t_Op

It is used to set the operating time delay for stage * of earth fault protection. (*=1~6)
3 ⚫ When earth fault protection as definite-time protection coordinates with adjacent line, this
setting should be set according to coordinate with time delay of earth fault protection of the
subordinate line.

Its calculation principle is:

[50/51𝐺 ∗. 𝑡_𝑂𝑝] = 𝑡0.𝐴𝑑𝑗 + ∆𝑡

Where:

t0.Adj is the time delay of stage coordinated in the adjacent line.

Δt is extra time delay, usually take 0.3~0.5s

⚫ If it is used independently, it should be greater than maximum operation time of system pole
discrepancy.

15. 50/51G*.t_DropOut

It is used to set the dropout time delay for stage * of earth fault protection. (*=1~6)

The setting is valid when definite-time dropout characteristics is selected.

16. 50/51G*.Opt_Dir

It is used to select the direction characteristic for stage * of earth fault protection. (*=1~6)

Non_Directional: no direction

Forward: forward direction

Reverse: reverse direction

17. 50/51G*.En_Hm_Blk

It is used to enable/disable stage * of earth fault protection controlled by harmonic control element.
(*=1~6)

18. 50/51G*.En

It is used to enable/disable stage * of earth fault protection. (*=1~6)

19. 50/51G*.Opt_Trp/Alm

3-102 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

It is used to enable/disable stage * of earth fault protection operate to trip or alarm. (*=1~6)

Trp: for tripping purpose

Alm: for alarm purpose

20. 50/51G*.Opt_Curve

It is used to select the operating characteristics curve for stage * of earth fault protection. (*=1~6)

ANSIE: ANSI Extremely Inverse

ANSIV: ANSI Very Inverse

ANSIN: ANSI Normal Inverse 3

ANSIM: ANSI Moderately Inverse

ANSIDefTime: ANSI Definite Time

ANSILTE: ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse

ANSILTV: ANSI Long Time Very Inverse

ANSILT: ANSI Long Time Inverse

IECN: IEC Normal Inverse

IECV: IEC Very Inverse

IEC: IEC Inverse

IECE: IEC Extremely Inverse

IECST: IEC Short-time Inverse

IECLT: IEC Long-time Inverse

IECDefTime: IEC Definite Time

UserDefine: Programmable

When the setting is set as "UserDefine", the user can customize the inverse-time curve
characteristic by setting constants K, α and C.

21. 50/51G*.Opt_Curve_DropOut

It is used to select the dropout characteristics curve for stage * of earth fault protection. (*=1~6)

Inst: instantaneous dropout characteristics

DefTime: definite-time dropout characteristics

IDMT: inverse-time dropout characteristics

When the operating characteristics curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or user-
defined inverse-time characteristics, the dropout characteristic curve can only be selected as
instantaneous dropout characteristics or definite-time dropout characteristics. The alarm signal

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-103

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked if inverse-time dropout characteristics
is selected.

When the operating characteristics curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the
dropout characteristic curve can be selected as instantaneous dropout characteristics, definite-time
dropout characteristics and ANSI inverse-time dropout characteristics.

22. 50/51G*.TMS

It is used to set time multiplier setting for stage * of inverse-time earth fault protection. (*=1~6)

This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required by inverse-time earth fault
3 protection.

23. 50/51G*.tmin

It is used to set the minimum operating time for stage * of inverse-time earth fault protection. (*=1~6)

When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if calculated operating time is less than the setting
[50/51G*.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting [50/51G*.tmin]
automatically.

If it coordinates with other protections, it can be set as "tmin+Δt".

Where:

tmin is minimum operating time of other protections.

Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.

If it is used independently, its recommended value is 0.02s.

24. 50/51G*.K

It is used to set the constant “K” for stage * of customized inverse-time earth fault protection. (*=1~6)

The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of earth fault
protection. It is valid only if the setting [50/51G*.Opt_Curve] is set as "UserDefine".

25. 50/51G*.Alpha

It is used to set the constant “α” for stage * of customized inverse-time earth fault protection. (*=1~6)

The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of earth fault
protection. It is valid only if the setting [50/51G*.Opt_Curve] is set as "UserDefine".

26. 50/51G*.C

It is used to set the constant “C” for stage * of customized inverse-time earth fault protection. (*=1~6)

The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of earth fault
protection. It is valid only if the setting [50/51G*.Opt_Curve] is set as "UserDefine".

3-104 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.15 Residual Current SOTF Protection (50GSOTF)

3.15.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsROC SOTF Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsSOTF Settings

3.15.2 Setting List 3

Table 3.15-1 Residual current SOTF protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

50GSOTF.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

50GSOTF.t_Op_1P 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

50GSOTF.t_Op_3P 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
50GSOTF.En
Enabled

Disabled
50GSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk
Enabled

3.15.3 Calculation Principle

1. 50GSOTF.3I0_Set

It is used to set current setting of residual current SOTF protection.

The setting should ensure sufficient sensitivity to ground fault with high impedance at the end of
the line.

Its recommended value is 1A.

2. 50GSOTF.t_Op_1P

It is used to set time delay for residual current SOTF protection when 1 pole closed.

Its recommended value is 0.06s.

3. 50GSOTF.t_Op_3P

It is used to set time delay for residual current SOTF protection when 3 pole closed.

Its recommended value is 0.1s

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-105

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

4. 50GSOTF.En

It is used to enable/disable residual current SOTF protection.

5. 50GSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk

It is used to enable/disable residual current SOTF protection blocked by harmonic.

For in-line transformer application, large inrush current generated during manual closing and auto-
reclosing will lead to an undesired operation of residual current SOTF protection. Second harmonic
blocking can be selected by the setting [50GSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk] to prevent maloperation due to
inrush current.
3
3.16 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection (50/51Q)

3.16.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsNegOC Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsNegOC Settings

3.16.2 Setting List

Table 3.16-1 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

50/51Q.DIR.RCA -180~179 1 °

50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd 10~90 1 °

50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd 10~90 1 °

50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev 10~90 1 °

50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev 10~90 1 °

50/51Q.DIR.I2_Min (0.050~1.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51Q.DIR.U2_Min 1.000~10.000 0.001 V

50/51Q.DIR.Z2_Comp (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

Disabled
50/51Q.En_VTS_Blk
Enabled

50/51Q1.I2_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51Q1.t_Op 0.030~100.000 0.001 s

3-106 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

50/51Q1.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Non_Directional

50/51Q1.Opt_Dir Forward

Reverse

Disabled
50/51Q1.En
Enabled

Trp
3
50/51Q1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

ANSIE

ANSIV

ANSIN

ANSIM

ANSIDefTime

ANSILTE

ANSILTV

ANSILT
50/51Q1.Opt_Curve
IECN

IECV

IECI

IECE

IECST

IECLT

IECDefTime

UserDefine

Inst

50/51Q1.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime

IDMT

50/51Q1.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-107

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

50/51Q1.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

50/51Q1.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

50/51Q1.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

50/51Q1.C 0.0000~1.2000 0.0001

50/51Q2.I2_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

50/51Q2.t_Op 0.030~100.000 0.001 s

3 50/51Q2.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Non_Directional

50/51Q2.Opt_Dir Forward

Reverse

Disabled
50/51Q2.En
Enabled

Trp
50/51Q2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

ANSIE

ANSIV

ANSIN

ANSIM

ANSIDefTime

ANSILTE

ANSILTV
50/51Q2.Opt_Curve
ANSILT

IECN

IECV

IECI

IECE

IECST

IECLT

3-108 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

IECDefTime

UserDefine

Inst

50/51Q2.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime

IDMT

50/51Q2.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

50/51Q2.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

3
50/51Q2.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

50/51Q2.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

50/51Q2.C 0.0000~1.2000 0.0001

3.16.3 Calculation Principle

1. 50/51Q.DIR.RCA

It is use to set the characteristic angle of direction control element.

-U2

[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]

Non-operating I2
area
[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev]
Operating area in
forward direction

[50/51Q.DIR.RCA]

Operating area in
reverse direction

[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]
Non-operating
area

[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]

By setting the characteristic angle to determine the most sensitive forward angle of negative-
sequence current, using negative-sequence current with negative-sequence voltage to determine
the direction of negative-sequence current in forward direction or reverse direction.

Its recommended value is 45°.

2. 50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-109

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

It is use to set the minimum boundary in forward direction of negative-sequence overcurrent

protection.

Its recommended value is 90°.

3. 50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd

It is use to set the maximum boundary in forward direction of negative-sequence overcurrent

protection.

Its recommended value is 90°.

4. 50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev
3 It is use to set the minimum boundary in reverse direction of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection.

Its recommended value is 90°.

5. 50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev

It is use to set the maximum boundary in reverse direction of negative-sequence overcurrent

protection.

Its recommended value is 90°.

6. 50/51Q.DIR.I2_Min

It is use to set the minimum operating current setting of direction control element.

Its recommended value is 0.05In.

7. 50/51Q.DIR.U2_Min

It is use to set the minimum operating voltage setting of direction control element.

Its recommended value is 4V.

8. 50/51Q.DIR.Z2_Comp

It is used to set negative-sequence compensation impedance of direction control element.

The setting should make negative-sequence directional element not mal-operate when a fault
happens in forward direction. Usually it can be set according to the secondary value of capacitive
reactance of the capacitors connected to local line behind VT in series. Please refer to the setting
[50/51G.DIR.Z0_Comp] about setting principle.

9. 50/51Q.En_VTS_Blk

It is used to enable/disable negative-sequence overcurrent protection is blocked by VT circuit failure

when VT circuit supervision is enabled and VT circuit fails.

When VT circuit fails, negative-sequence overcurrent protection will be blocked if the setting is set
as "Enabled". Negative-sequence overcurrent protection is not controlled by direction control

3-110 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

element if the setting is set as "Disabled".

10. 50/51Q*.I2_Set

It is used to set negative-sequence current setting for stage * of negative-sequence overcurrent

protection. (*=1 or 2)

When two-phase short circuit is happened, the following equation is satisfied.

1
𝐼2.2𝑃 = 𝐼3𝑃
2

Where:

I2.2P is the negative-sequence component of the two-phase short-circuit current.

3
I3P is the three-phase short-circuit current.

For line protection, only when the pickup current of negative-sequence overcurrent element is equal
to 0.5 times the pickup setting of phase overcurrent element fixedly, the relative sensitivity
coefficient of two-phase short circuit is equal to 1. During setting calculation, the coordination of
sensitivity can be carried out only according to the three-phase short circuit and the overcurrent
protection with adjacent lines.

The setting of negative-sequence overcurrent protection can be referred to the setting of phase
overcurrent protection.

[50/51𝑄 ∗. 𝐼2_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑛 × 𝐼𝐿.𝑚𝑎𝑥

Where:

IL.max is maximum value of three-phase short circuit current of this line.

Kn is negative-sequence coefficient, taking as 0.5.

11. 50/51Q*.t_Op

It is used to set the operating time delay for stage * of negative-sequence overcurrent protection.
(*=1 or 2)

It should be set being identical with the time delay of phase overcurrent protection. Because the
fault happens in the same point, the protection with higher sensitivity between phase overcurrent
protection and negative-sequence overcurrent protection will operate in priority.

12. 50/51Q*.t_DropOut

It is used to set the dropout time delay for stage * of negative-sequence overcurrent protection.
(*=1 or 2)

The setting is valid when definite-time dropout characteristics is selected.

13. 50/51Q*.Opt_Dir

It is used to select the direction characteristic for stage * of negative-sequence overcurrent

protection. (*=1 or 2)

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-111

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Non_Directional: no direction

Forward: forward direction

Reverse: reverse direction

14. 50/51Q*.En

It is used to enable/disable stage * of negative-sequence overcurrent protection. (*=1 or 2)

15. 50/51Q*.Opt_Trp/Alm

It is used to enable/disable stage * of negative-sequence overcurrent protection operate to trip or

3 alarm. (*=1 or 2)

Trp: for tripping purpose

Alm: for alarm purpose

16. 50/51Q*.Opt_Curve

It is used to select the operating characteristics curve for stage * of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection. (*=1 or 2)

ANSIE: ANSI Extremely Inverse

ANSIV: ANSI Very Inverse

ANSIN: ANSI Normal Inverse

ANSIM: ANSI Moderately Inverse

ANSIDefTime: ANSI Definite Time

ANSILTE: ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse

ANSILTV: ANSI Long Time Very Inverse

ANSILT: ANSI Long Time Inverse

IECN: IEC Normal Inverse

IECV: IEC Very Inverse

IEC: IEC Inverse

IECE: IEC Extremely Inverse

IECST: IEC Short-time Inverse

IECLT: IEC Long-time Inverse

IECDefTime: IEC Definite Time

UserDefine: Programmable

When the setting is set as "UserDefine", the user can customize the inverse-time curve
characteristic by setting constants K, α and C.

3-112 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

17. 50/51Q*.Opt_Curve_DropOut

It is used to select the dropout characteristics curve for stage * of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection. (*=1 or 2)

Inst: instantaneous dropout characteristics

DefTime: definite-time dropout characteristics

IDMT: inverse-time dropout characteristics

When the operating characteristics curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or user-
defined inverse-time characteristics, the dropout characteristic curve can only be selected as
instantaneous dropout characteristics or definite-time dropout characteristics. The alarm signal 3
"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked if inverse-time dropout characteristics
is selected.

When the operating characteristics curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the
dropout characteristic curve can be selected as instantaneous dropout characteristics, definite-time
dropout characteristics and ANSI inverse-time dropout characteristics.

18. 50/51Q*.TMS

It is used to set time multiplier setting for stage * of inverse-time negative-sequence overcurrent
protection. (*=1 or 2)

The setting can be deduced according to the operating time required by inverse-time negative-
sequence overcurrent protection.

19. 50/51Q*.tmin

It is used to set the minimum operating time for stage * of inverse-time negative-sequence
overcurrent protection. (*=1 or 2)

When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if calculated operating time is less than the setting
[50/51Q*.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting [50/51Q*.tmin]
automatically.

Its recommended value is 0.02s.

20. 50/51Q*.K

It is used to set the constant "K" for stage * of customized inverse-time negative-sequence
overcurrent protection (*=1 or 2)

The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of negative-
sequence overcurrent protection. It is valid only if the setting [50/51Q*.Opt_Curve] is set as
"UserDefine".

21. 50/51Q*.Alpha

It is used to set the constant "α" for stage * of customized inverse-time negative-sequence
overcurrent protection. (*=1 or 2)

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-113

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of negative-
sequence overcurrent protection. It is valid only if the setting [50/51Q*.Opt_Curve] is set as
"UserDefine".

22. 50/51Q*.C

It is used to set the constant "C" for stage * of customized inverse-time negative-sequence
overcurrent protection. (*=1 or 2)

The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of negative-
sequence overcurrent protection. It is valid only if the setting [50/51Q*.Opt_Curve] is set as
"UserDefine".
3
3.17 Phase Overvoltage Protection (59P)

3.17.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsOV Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsOV Settings

3.17.2 Setting List

Table 3.17-1 Phase overvoltage protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

Up
59P1.Opt_Up/Upp
Upp

3P
59P1.Opt_1P/3P
1P

59P1.U_Set 57.700~200.000 0.001 V

59P1.K_DropOut 0.930~1.000 0.001

59P1.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s

59P1.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
59P1.En
Enabled

Trp
59P1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

3-114 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

ANSIDefTime

IECDefTime
59P1.Opt_Curve
UserDefine

InvTime_U

Inst
59P1.Opt_Curve_DropOut
DefTime

59P1.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

3
59P1.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

59P1.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

59P1.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

59P1.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001

Up
59P2.Opt_Up/Upp
Upp

3P
59P2.Opt_1P/3P
1P

59P2.U_Set 57.700~200.000 0.001 V

59P2.K_DropOut 0.930~1.000 0.001

59P2.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s

59P2.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
59P2.En
Enabled

Trp
59P2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

ANSIDefTime

IECDefTime
59P2.Opt_Curve
UserDefine

InvTime_U

59P2.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-115

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

DefTime

59P2.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

59P2.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

59P2.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

59P2.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

59P2.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001

3
3.17.3 Calculation Principle

1. 59P*.Opt_Up/Upp

It is used to select the calculation voltage used by stage * of phase overvoltage protection. (*=1 or
2)

Up: phase voltage

Upp: phase-to-phase voltage

2. 59P*.Opt_1P/3P

It is used to select the voltage criterion used by stage * of phase overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

3P: 3-out-of-3 mode, i.e., phase overvoltage protection detects three-phase voltages or three
phase-to-phase voltages.

1P: 1-out-of-3 mode, i.e., phase overvoltage protection detects any phase voltage or phase-to-
phase voltage.

3. 59P*.U_Set

It is used to set the voltage setting for stage * of phase overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

The setting should be set according to the actual isolation requirements of the system equipment.
and the setting [59P*.Opt_Up/Upp].

If the setting [59P*.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as "Upp", then phase-to-phase voltage will be used for
calculation, [59P*.U_Set] should be set as phase-to-phase voltage.

If the setting [59P*.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as "Up", then phase voltage will be used for calculation,
[59P*.U_Set] should be set as phase voltage.

Generally, it shall be set according to the affordability of protected equipment:

⚫ For definite-time charactertistics

[59𝑃 ∗. 𝑈_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = (1.1~1.5) × 𝑈𝑛

Un is the second rated voltage.

3-116 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Application example:

If the operating criterion adopts phase-to-phase voltage, Un=110V, 1.3 times Un is assigned for
overvoltage protection. The setting will be given as below:

[59P*.Opt_Up/Upp]=Upp

[59P*.U_Set]=143V

If the operating criterion adopts phase-to-ground voltage, Un=63.5V, 1.3 times Un is assigned for
overvoltage protection. The setting will be given as below:

[59P*.Opt_Up/Upp]=Up

[59P*.U_Set]=82.55V
3
⚫ For inverse-time characteristics

If inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting should be configured as follows.

[59𝑃 ∗. 𝑈_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝑈𝑚𝑎𝑥

Where:

Krel is the reliability coefficient of and can be 1.05~1.1.

Umax is the minimum voltage under which the protected equipment can operate for a long term. If
the operating criterion adopts phase-to-phase voltage, the Umax is the phase-to-phase voltage,
otherwise it is the phase-to-ground voltage.

4. 59P*.K_DropOut

It is used to set the dropout coefficient for stage * of phase overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

Its recommended value is 0.98.

5. 59P*.t_Op

It is used to set the operating time delay for stage * of phase overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

It shall be set according to the withstanding voltage ability of protected equipment, and its
recommended value is 0.3s~1s.

6. 59P*.t_DropOut

It is used to set the dropout time delay for stage * of phase overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

The setting is valid when definite-time dropout characteristics is selected, and its recommended
value is 0.

7. 59Pi.En

It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

8. 59P*.Opt_Trp/Alm

It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase overvoltage protection operate to trip or alarm (*=1 or

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-117

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

2)

Trp: for tripping purpose

Alm: for alarm purpose

9. 59P*.Opt_Curve

It is used to select the operating characteristics curve for stage * of phase overvoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)

ANSIDefTime: ANSI Definite Time

3 IECDefTime: IEC Definite Time

UserDefine: Programmable

InvTime_U: Voltage Inverse

When the setting is set as "UserDefine", the user can customize the inverse-time curve
characteristic by setting constants K, α and C.

10. 59P*.Opt_Curve_DropOut

It is used to set the dropout characteristics curve for stage * of phase overvoltage protection (*=1
or 2)

Inst: instantaneous dropout characteristics.

DefTime: definite-time dropout characteristics.

11. 59P*.TMS

It is used to set time multiplier setting for stage * of inverse-time phase overvoltage protection. (*=1
or 2)

The setting can be deduced according to the operating time required by inverse-time phase
overvoltage protection.

12. 59P*.tmin

It is used to set the minimum operating time for stage * of inverse-time phase overvoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)

When inverse-time characteristics is selected, if calculated operating time is less than the setting
[59P*.tmin], then the operating time changes to the setting [59P*.tmin] automatically. Its
recommended value is 0.02s.

13. 59P*.K

It is used to set the constant “K” for stage * of customized inverse-time phase overvoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)

The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of pahse overvoltage
protection. It is valid only if the setting [59P*.Opt_Curve] is set as "UserDefine".

3-118 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

14. 59P*.Alpha

It is used to set the constant “C” for stage * of customized inverse-time phase overvoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)

The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of pahse overvoltage
protection. It is valid only if the setting [59P*.Opt_Curve] is set as "UserDefine".

15. 59P*.C

It is used to set the constant “α” for stage i of customized inverse-time phase overvoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)

The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of pahse overvoltage 3
protection. It is valid only if the setting [59P*.Opt_Curve] is set as "UserDefine".

3.18 Residual Overvoltage Protection (59G)

3.18.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsROV Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsROV Settings

3.18.2 Setting List

Table 3.18-1 Residual overvoltage protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

59G1.3U0_Set 1.000~200.000 0.001 V

59G1.K_DropOut 0.930~1.000 0.001

59G1.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s

59G1.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
59G1.En
Enabled

Trp
59G1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

59G2.3U0_Set 1.000~200.000 0.001 V

59G2.K_DropOut 0.930~1.000 0.001

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-119

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

59G2.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s

59G2.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
59G2.En
Enabled

Trp
59G2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
3
3.18.3 Calculation Principle

1. 59G*.3U0_Set

It is used to set the voltage setting for stage * of residual overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

It shall be greater than maximum unbalanced residual voltage under normal conditions.

⚫ For indirectly earthed system

The residual overvoltage protection is generally used for alarm. It shall be greater than maximum
unbalanced residual voltage under normal conditions.

0.5 × 𝑈2𝑛
[59𝐺 ∗ .3𝑈0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] =
1.732

⚫ For earthed system via gap

2 × 𝑈2𝑛
[59𝐺 ∗ .3𝑈0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] =
1.732

⚫ For single-phase earth fault of unearthed system

1.2 × 𝑈2𝑛
[59𝐺 ∗ .3𝑈0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] =
1.732

U2n is VT secondary rated voltage.

2. 59G*.K_DropOut

It is used to set the dropout coefficient for stage * of residual overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

Its recommended value is 0.98.

3. 59G*.t_Op

It is used to set the operating time delay for stage * of residual overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

It shall be set to keep residual overvotlage protection away from the influence of transient
characteristics and its recommended value is 0.3s~0.5s.

4. 59G*.t_DropOut

3-120 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

It is used to set the dropout time delay for stage * of residual overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

Residual overvoltage protection supports instantaneous dropout characteristics and definite-time

dropout characteristics.

Its recommended value is 0.

5. 59G*.En

It is used to enable/disable stage * of residual overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

6. 59G*.Opt_Trp/Alm

It is used to enable/disable stage * of residual overvoltage protection operate to trip or alarm. (*=1
or 2)
3
Trp: for tripping purpose

Alm: for alarm purpose

3.19 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection (59Q)

3.19.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsNegOV Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsNegOV Settings

3.19.2 Setting List

Table 3.19-1 Negative-sequence overvoltage protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

59Q1.U2_Set 2.000~100.000 0.001 V

59Q1.K_DropOut 0.930~1.000 0.001

59Q1.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s

59Q1.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
59Q1.En
Enabled

Trp
59Q1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

59Q2.U2_Set 2.000~100.000 0.001 V

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-121

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

59Q2.K_DropOut 0.930~1.000 0.001

59Q2.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s

59Q2.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
59Q2.En
Enabled

Trp
3 59Q2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

3.19.3 Calcualtion Principle

1. 59Q*.U2_Set

It is used to set the voltage setting for stage * of negative-sequence overvoltage protection. (i=1 or
2)

The setting should be set according to negative-sequence voltage. The calculation principle is as
below.

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝑈2𝑛
[59𝑄 ∗. 𝑈2_𝑆𝑒𝑡] =
1.732

Where:

U2n is VT secondary rated voltage.

Krel is the reliable coefficient.

Krel needs to be set according to the specific application. If the negative-sequence overvoltage
protection is used to release the relevant current protection when detecting the reverse phase
sequence connection or the asymmetric fault, the setting can be not very sensitive, and Krel is
recommended to be set as 0.1.

If the negative-sequence overvoltage protection is used to detect the unbalance of the rotating
motor and prevent the motor from overheating and burning out, Krel is recommended to be set as
0.03.

Application example:

Assuming that the VT rated secondary value U2n=100V, Krel=0.1

0.1 × 100
[59𝑄 ∗. 𝑈2𝑆𝑒𝑡 ] = = 5.78𝑉
1.732

In addition, the setting should be more thant the maximum unbalance negative-sequence voltage
during normal operation.

3-122 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

2. 59Q*.K_DropOut

It is used to set the dropout coefficient for stage * of negative-sequence overvoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)

The setting can be appropriately reduced to prevent frequent jitter if the negative-sequence voltage
setting is too small.

Its recommended value is 0.98.

3. 59Q*.t_Op

It is used to set the operating time delay for stage * of negative-sequence overvoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2) 3
The time delay can be appropriately reduced if the operating threshold of negative-sequence
voltage is large, for example, 1s.

If the negative-sequence voltage setting is small, it is recommended to set this setting as a larger
value, for example, 5s.

4. 59Q*.t_DropOut

It is used to set the dropout time delay for stage * of negative-sequence overvoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)

Negative-sequence overvoltage protection supports instantaneous dropout characteristics and

definite-time dropout characteristics.

Its recommended value is 0.

5. 59Q*.En

It is used to enable/disable stage * of negative-sequence overvoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

6. 59Q*.Opt_Trp/Alm

It is used to enable/disable stage * of negative-sequence overvoltage protection operate to trip or

alarm. (i=1 or 2)

Trp: for tripping purpose

Alm: for alarm purpose

3.20 Phase Undervoltage Protection (27P)

3.20.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsUV Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-123

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsUV Settings

3.20.2 Setting List

Table 3.20-1 Phase undervoltage protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

Up
27P1.Opt_Up/Upp
Upp

3P
3 27P1.Opt_1P/3P
1P

None

Curr

27P1.Opt_LogicMode CBPos

CurrOrCBPos

CurrAndCBPos

27P1.U_Set 5.000~120.000 0.001 V

27P1.K_DropOut 1.000~1.200 0.001

27P1.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s

27P1.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
27P1.En_VTS_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
27P1.En
Enabled

Trp
27P1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

ANSIDefTime

IECDefTime
27P1.Opt_Curve
UserDefine

InvTime_U

Inst
27P1.Opt_Curve_DropOut
DefTime

3-124 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

27P1.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

27P1.tmin 0.030~10.000 0.001 s

27P1.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

27P1.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

27P1.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001

Up
27P2.Opt_Up/Upp
Upp
3
3P
27P2.Opt_1P/3P
1P

None

Curr

27P2.Opt_LogicMode CBPos

CurrOrCBPos

CurrAndCBPos

27P2.U_Set 5.000~120.000 0.001 V

27P2.K_DropOut 1.000~1.200 0.001

27P2.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s

27P2.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
27P2.En_VTS_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
27P2.En
Enabled

Trp
27P2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

ANSIDefTime

IECDefTime
27P2.Opt_Curve
UserDefine

InvTime_U

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-125

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Inst
27P2.Opt_Curve_DropOut
DefTime

27P2.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001

27P2.tmin 0.030~10.000 0.001 s

27P2.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001

27P2.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001

3 27P2.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001

3.20.3 Calculation Principle

1. 27P*.Opt_Up/Upp

It is used to select the calculation voltage used by stage * of phase undervoltage protection. (*=1
or 2)

Up: phase voltage

Upp: phase-to-phase voltage

2. 27P*.Opt_1P/3P

It is used to select the voltage criterion used by stage * of phase undervoltage protection. (*=1 or
2)

3P: 3-out-of-3 mode, i.e., phase undervoltage protection detects three-phase voltages or three
phase-to-phase voltages.

1P: 1-out-of-3 mode, i.e., phase undervoltage protection detects any phase voltage or phase-to-
phase voltage.

3. 27P*.Opt_LogicMode

The option of auxiliary criterion mode for stage * of phase undervoltage protection (*=1 or 2)

None: no check

Curr: check current condition

CBPos: check normally open auxiliary contact

CurrOrCBPos: check current condition or normally open auxiliary contact

CurrAndCBPos: check current condition and normally open auxiliary contact

When the load current is relatively fixed and is larger than 0.04In, the current criterion is
recommended, such as the capacitor and reactor load. Otherwise, the breaker position criterion is
recommended.

3-126 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

When the breaker position can be acquired, and the load current is also larger than 0.04In,
comprehensive criterion can also be used.

When the circuit breaker of the incoming line has been tripped and the busbar loses voltage, phase
undervoltage protection is still desired to operate at this time, so the breaker position criterion needs
to be selected.

4. 27P*.U_Set

It is used to set the voltage setting for stage * of phase undervoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

The setting should be set according to the actual stability level of power system, but it should ensure
sensitive enough to the fault at the end of the line and not be greater than the minimum operation
voltage under normal conditions.
3
The setting should also be set according to the setting [27P*.Opt_Up/Upp].

If the setting [27P*.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as "Upp", then phase-to-phase voltage will be used for
calculation, [27P*.U_Set] should be set as phase-to-phase voltage.

If the setting [27Pi.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as "Up", then phase voltage will be used for calculation,
[27P*.U_Set] should be set as phase voltage.

Application example:

If the operating criterion adopts phase-to-phase voltage, Un=110V, 0.7 times Un is assigned for
undervoltage protection. The setting will be given as below:

[27P*.Opt_Up/Upp]=Upp

[27P*.U_Set]=77V

If the operating criterion adopts phase-to-ground voltage, Un=63.5V, 0.7 times Un is assigned for
undervoltage protection. The setting will be given as below:

[27P*.Opt_Up/Upp]=Up

[27P*.U_Set]=44.45V

5. 27P*.K_DropOut

It is used to set the dropout coefficient for stage * of phase undervoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

Its recommended value is 1.03.

6. 27P*.t_Op

It is used to set the operating time delay for stage * of phase undervoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

It shall be set according to voltage control strategy.

7. 27P*.t_DropOut

It is used to set the dropout time delay for stage * of phase undervoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

This setting is valid when definite-time drop-out characteristic is selected, and its recommended

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-127

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

value is 0.

8. 27P*.En_VTS_Blk

It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase undervoltage protection is blocked by VT circuit failure

when VT circuit supervision is enabled and VT circuit fails. (*=1 or 2)

When the setting [27P*.En_VTS_Blk] is set as "Enabled", phase undervoltage protection will be
blocked if VT circuit fails.

9. 27P*.En

It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase undervoltage protection. (*=1 or 2)

3 10. 27P*.Opt_Trp/Alm

It is used to enable/disable stage * of phase undervoltage protection operate to trip or alarm. (*=1
or 2)

Trp: for tripping purpose

Alm: for alarm purpose

11. 27P*.Opt_Curve

It is used to select the operating characteristics curve for stage * of phase undervoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)

ANSIDefTime: ANSI Definite Time

IECDefTime: IEC Definite Time

UserDefine: Programmable

InvTime_U: Voltage Inverse

When the setting is set as "UserDefine", the user can customize the inverse-time curve
characteristic by setting constants K, α and C.

12. 27P*.Opt_Curve_DropOut

It is used to select the dropout characteristics curve for stage * of phase undervoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)

Inst: instantaneous dropout characteristics

DefTime: definite-time dropout characteristics

13. 27P*.TMS

It is used to set time multiplier setting for stage * of inverse-time phase undervoltage protection.
(*=1 or 2)

The setting can be deduced according to the operating time required by inverse-time phase
undervoltage protection.

3-128 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

14. 27P*.tmin

It is used to set the minimum operating time for stage * of inverse-time phase undervoltage
protection. (*=1 or 2)

When inverse-time characteristics is selected, if calculated operating time is less than the setting
[27P*.tmin], then the operating time changes to the setting [27P*.tmin] automatically. Its
recommended value is 0.03s.

15. 27P*.K

It is used to set the constant “K” for stage * of customized inverse-time phase undervoltage
protection. (*=1 or 2)
3
The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of pahse
undervoltage protection. It is valid only if the setting [27P*.Opt_Curve] is set as "UserDefine".

16. 27P*.Alpha

It is used to set the constant “α” for stage * of customized inverse-time phase undervoltage
protection. (*=1 or 2)

The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of pahse
undervoltage protection. It is valid only if the setting [27P*.Opt_Curve] is set as "UserDefine".

17. 27P*.C

It is used to set the constant “C” for stage * of customized inverse-time phase undervoltage
protection. (*=1 or 2)

The setting shall be set according to the expected inverse-time characteristics of pahse
undervoltage protection. It is valid only if the setting [27P*.Opt_Curve] is set as "UserDefine".

3.21 Overfrequency Protection (81O)

3.21.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsFreqProt Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsFreqProt Settings

3.21.2 Setting List

Table 3.21-1 Overfrequency protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

81.Upp_Blk 10.000~150.000 0.001 V

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-129

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

81O1.f_Set 50.000~65.000 0.001 Hz

81O1.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
81O1.En
Enabled

Trp
81O1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm
3 81O2.f_Set 50.000~65.000 0.001 Hz

81O2.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
81O2.En
Enabled

Trp
81O2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

81O3.f_Set 50.000~65.000 0.001 Hz

81O3.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
81O3.En
Enabled

Trp
81O3.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

81O4.f_Set 50.000~65.000 0.001 Hz

81O4.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
81O4.En
Enabled

Trp
81O4.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

3.21.3 Calculation Principle

1. 81.Upp_Blk

It is used to set the phase-to-phase voltage setting used to block frequency protection (including
overfrequency protection, underfrequency protection and frequency rate-of-change protection).

3-130 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

When any phase-to-phase voltage is smaller than the setting [81.Upp_Blk], the frequency
protection will be blocked. It is a general setting and shared by overfrequency protection,
underfrequency protection and frequency rate-of-change protection.

The setting should be set according to the phase-to-phase voltage. Its recommended value is
0.7Unn (Unn is rated phase-to-phase voltage).

2. 81O*.f_Set

It is used to set the frequency setting for stage * of overfrequency protection. (*=1~4)

All stages can be set based on the same graduation. After rejecting some power supplies and each
stage operating, the system frequency should be restored near rated frequency. Because
compound mode of generators (hydroelectric, thermal power, nuclear power with different capacity
3
and proportion, different adaptability to abnormal frequency), system structure and operation mode
are different in different power system, they should be set according to system frequency and
stability control strategy.

3. 81O*.t_Op

It is used to set the time delay for stage * of overfrequency protection. (*=1~4)

It shall be set according to system frequency and stability control strategy.

4. 81O*.En

It is used to enable/disable stage * of overfrequency protection (*=1~4)

5. 81O*.Opt_Trp/Alm

It is used to enable/disable stage * of overfrequency protection operate to trip or alarm. (*=1~4)

Trp: for tripping purpose

Alm: for alarm purpose

3.22 Underfrequency Protection (81U)

3.22.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsFreqProt Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsFreqProt Settings

3.22.2 Setting List

Table 3.22-1 Underfrequency protection settings

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-131

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

81.Upp_Blk 10.000~150.000 0.001 V

81U1.f_Set 45.000~60.000 0.001 Hz

81U1.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
81U1.En
Enabled

Trp
3 81U1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

81U2.f_Set 45.000~60.000 0.001 Hz

81U2.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
81U2.En
Enabled

Trp
81U2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

81U3.f_Set 45.000~60.000 0.001 Hz

81U3.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
81U3.En
Enabled

Trp
81U3.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

81U4.f_Set 45.000~60.000 0.001 Hz

81U4.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
81U4.En
Enabled

Trp
81U4.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

3.22.3 Calculation Principle

1. 81.Upp_Blk

Please refer to Section 3.21.

3-132 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

2. 81U*.f_Set

It is used to set the frequency setting for stage * of underfrequency protection. (*=1~6)

All stages can adopt cascade connection, and small graduation can be set among them, for
example, taking 0.2Hz. Selecting one special stage, it can avoid system frequency always keeping
in a certain frequency. When some loads are shed after other stages of underfrequency protection
operate to shed major loads and make system frequency restore to normal value.

3. 81U*.t_Op

It is used to set the time delay for stage * of underfrequency protection. (*=1~6)

It shall be set according to system frequency and stability control strategy. 3

4. 81U*.En

It is used to enable/disable stage * of underfrequency protection (*=1~6)

5. 81U*.Opt_Trp/Alm

It is used to enable/disable stage * of underfrequency protection operate to trip or alarm. (*=1~4)

Trp: for tripping purpose

Alm: for alarm purpose

3.23 Frequency Rate-of-change Protection (81R)

3.23.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsFreqProt Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsFreqProt Settings

3.23.2 Setting List

Table 3.23-1 Frequency rate-of-change protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

81.Upp_Blk 10.000~150.000 0.001 V

81R1.df/dt_Set -5.000~5.000 0.001 Hz/s

81R1.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s

81R1.f_Pkp 45.000~65.000 0.001 Hz

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-133

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
81R1.En
Enabled

Trp
81R1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

81R2.df/dt_Set -5.000~5.000 0.001 Hz/s

81R2.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s

3 81R2.f_Pkp 45.000~65.000 0.001 Hz

Disabled
81R2.En
Enabled

Trp
81R2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

81R3.df/dt_Set -5.000~5.000 0.001 Hz/s

81R3.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s

81R3.f_Pkp 45.000~65.000 0.001 Hz

Disabled
81R3.En
Enabled

Trp
81R3.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

81R4.df/dt_Set -5.000~5.000 0.001 Hz/s

81R4.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s

81R4.f_Pkp 45.000~65.000 0.001 Hz

Disabled
81R4.En
Enabled

Trp
81R4.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

3.23.3 Calculation Principle

1. 81.Upp_Blk

Please refer to Section 3.21.

3-134 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

2. 81R*.df/dt_Set

It is used to set the frequency rate-of-change setting for stage * of frequency rate-of-change
protection. (*=1~6)

If the system frequency quickly decreases due to large active power shortage after the system fault,
it is required to remove the overload line as soon as possible, to avoid frequency collapse, and its
recommended value is -0.8~-2Hz/s.

If the system frequency quickly increases due to surplus system power (more than 20%), the
generator rejection should be executed, to avoid the frequency increasing, and its recommended
value is 0.8~2Hz/s.

3. 81R*.t_Op
3
It is used to set the time delay for stage * of frequency rate-of-change protection. (*=1~6)

It shall be set according to the requirement of the system frequency.

Its recommended value is 0.1~0.2s.

4. 81R*.f_Pkp

It is used to set the pickup frequency setting for stage * of frequency rate-of-change protection.
(*=1~6)

It should be set according to the requirement of the system frequency.

Its recommended value is 50Hz or 60Hz.

5. 81R*.En

It is used to enable/disable stage * of frequency rate-of-change protection (*=1~6)

6. 81R*.Opt_Trp/Alm

It is used to enable/disable stage * of frequency rate-of-change protection operate to trip or alarm.

(*=1~4)

Trp: for tripping purpose

Alm: for alarm purpose

3.24 Reverse Power Protection (32R)

3.24.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsRevPower Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsRevPower Settings

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-135

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.24.2 Setting List

Table 3.24-1 Reverse power protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

32R1.U1_VCE 5.000~60.000 0.001 V

32R1.I1_CCE 0.010~1.000 0.001 p.u.

32R1.U2_VCE 8.000~60.000 0.001 V

32R1.P_Set 0.100~10.000 0.001 p.u.

3 32R1.t_Op 0.010~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
32R1.En
Enabled

Trp
32R1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

32R2.U1_VCE 5.000~60.000 0.001 V

32R2.I1_CCE 0.010~1.000 0.001 p.u.

32R2.U2_VCE 8.000~60.000 0.001 V

32R2.P_Set 0.100~10.000 0.001 p.u.

32R2.t_Op 0.010~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
32R2.En
Enabled

Trp
32R2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

3.24.3 Calculation Principle

1. 32R*.U1_VCE

It is used to set the positive-sequence voltage setting which is used to block stage * of reverse
power protection. (*=1or 2)

Its recommended value is 5V.

2. 32R*.I1_CCE

It is used to set the positive-sequence current setting which is used to block stage * of reverse
power protection. (*=1or 2)

Its recommended value is 0.1p.u.

3-136 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

The rated secondary current is [𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑡. 𝐶𝐵𝑥. 𝐼2𝑛 ].

3. 32R*.U2_VCE

It is used to set the negative-sequence voltage setting which is used to block stage * of reverse
power protection. (*=1or 2)

Its recommended value is 8V.

4. 32R*.P_Set

It is used to set the power setting for stage * of reverse power protection. (*=1or 2)

Generally, it should be set according to the minimum measurable power under reverse power
conditions.
3
The recommended value is 0.01 p.u.~0.03 p.u..

The rated secondary power is √3 × [𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑡. 𝐶𝐵𝑥. 𝐼2𝑛 ] × [𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑡. 𝑈2𝑛 ].

5. 32R*.t_Op

The operating time delay for stage * of reverse power protection (*=1or 2)

It should be set according to the affordability of the protected equipment.

6. 32R*.En

It is used to enable/disable stage * of reverse power protection. (*=1 or 2)

7. 32R*.Opt_Trp/Alm

It is used to enable/disable stage * of reverse power protection operate to trip or alarm. (*=1 or 2)

Trp: for tripping purpose

Alm: for alarm purpose

3.25 Thermal Overload Protection (49P)

3.25.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsThOvLd Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsThOvLd Settings

3.25.2 Setting List

Table 3.25-1 Thermal overload protection settings

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-137

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

49P1.Ib_Set 0.050~200.000 0.001 A

49P1.K_Trp 1.000~3.000 0.001

49P1.K_Alm 1.000~3.000 0.001

49P1.Tau 0.100~100.000 0.001 min

49P1.K_T_Diff 0.000~200.000 0.001

49P1.Alpha_Cold 1.000~2.000 0.001

3 49P1.C_Disspt 0.100~10.000 0.001

Disabled
49P1.En_Trp
Enabled

Disabled
49P1.En_Alm
Enabled

Maintain
49P1.Opt_Accu_CurreLos
Dissipate

49P2.Ib_Set 0.050~200.000 0.001 A

49P2.K_Trp 1.000~3.000 0.001

49P2.K_Alm 1.000~3.000 0.001

49P2.Tau 0.100~100.000 0.001 min

49P2.K_T_Diff 0.000~200.000 0.001

49P2.Alpha_Cold 1.000~2.000 0.001

49P2.C_Disspt 0.100~10.000 0.001

Disabled
49P2.En_Trp
Enabled

Disabled
49P2.En_Alm
Enabled

Maintain
49P2.Opt_Accu_CurreLos
Dissipate

3.25.3 Calculation Principle

1. 49P*.Ib_Set

3-138 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

It is used to set base current for stage * of thermal overload protection.

It is generally recommended to be set equal to the rated current of the protected equipment.

2. 49P*.K_Trp

It is used to set the tripping factor of thermal capacity for stage * of thermal overload protection.

It should be set according actual requirements, and generally be set as 1.2~1.5.

3. 49P*.K_Alm

It is used to set the alarm factor of thermal capacity for stage * of thermal overload protection.

It should be set according to actual requirements, and generally be set as 1.1~1.3. 3

4. 49P*.Tau

It is used to set the time constant of the thermal model for stage * of thermal overload protection.

It should be set according to the thermal characteristic of the equipment.

5. 49P*.K_T_Diff

It is used to set the convertor coefficient from the current to the temperature for stage * of thermal
overload protection.

It is used to calculate the temperature difference between transformer windings and oil, which
should be provided by transformer manufacturers.

Generally, the setting is set between 20 and 30.

6. 49P*.Alpha_Cold

It is used to set the cooling mode for stage * of thermal overload protection. Usually, for different
cooling mode:

For the thermal overload protection using method 1, its recommended value is 2.

For the thermal overload protection using method 2, its recommended value is 1.6 for natural
cooling and 2 for forced cooling based on different cooling conditions.

7. 49P*.C_Disspt

It is used to set the time constant of heat dissipation for stage * of thermal overload protection.

When the equivalent heating current is lower than 0.04In, the thermal time constant adopts the
value of [49Pi.Tau]×[49Pi.C_Disspt]. The time constants of heat accumulation and heat dissipation
are different in the case. When the setting is set as "1", the same time constant is used for heat
accumulation and heat dissipation.

For the transmission line, its recommended value is 1.

8. 49P*.En_Trp

It is used to enable/disable stage * of thermal overload protection operate to trip.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-139

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

9. 49P*.En_Alm

It is used to enable/disable stage * of thermal overload protection operate to alarm.

10. 49P*.Opt_Accu_CurreLos

It is used to determine to maintain or dissipate the data in case of SV measurement abonormality

for stage * of thermal overload protection. The setting is valid only if the device adopts SV sampled
signals.

Maintain: maintain the accumlated data

Dissipate: clear the the accumlated data

3 Please configure this setting according to actual requirements. It is recommended to set as
"Maintain" for single protection configuration and "Dissipate" for duplicated protection
configuration.

3.26 Undercurrent Protection (37)

3.26.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsUC Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsUC Settings

3.26.2 Setting List

Table 3.26-1 Undercurrent protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

37.I_Set (0.100~1.000)×In 0.001 A

37.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s

1P
37.Opt_1P/3P
3P

None

Curr

37.Opt_LogicMode CBPos

CurrOrCBPos

CurrAndCBPos

3-140 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
37.En
Enabled

Trp
37.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

3.26.3 Calculation Principle

1. 37.I_Set
3
It is used to set the current setting of undercurrent protection.

The setting should ensure that undercurrent protection can reliably operate after the bus connected
with the capacitor loses the voltage, and undercurrent protection can reliably drop off after the bus
voltage returns to normal

The calculation principle is as below.

[37. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = (0.3~0.6) × 𝐼2𝑛

2. 37.t_Op

It is used to set the time delay of undercurrent protection.

It should coordinate with the operating time of backup protection of outgoing line at local end.

The calculation principle is as below.

[37. 𝑡_𝑂𝑝] = 𝑡 ′ + ∆𝑡

Where:

𝑡 ′ is the operating time of backup protection which undercurrent protection need to coordinate
with.

∆𝑡 is the time difference which can take 0.3~0.5s.

3. 37.Opt_1P/3P

It is used to select the current criterion used by undercurrent protection.

3P: 3-out-of-3 mode

1P: 1-out-of-3 mode

If the setting is set as "1P", undercurrent protection will discriminate any phase current with the
current criterion. If the setting is set as "3P", undercurrent protection will discriminate three-phases
currents with the current criterion.

4. 37.Opt_LogicMode

It is used to select auxiliary criterion mode for undercurrent protection.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-141

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

None: no check

Curr: check current condition

CBPos: check normally open auxiliary contact

CurrOrCBPos: check current condition or normally open auxiliary contact

CurrAndCBPos: check current condition and normally open auxiliary contact

Please select the check mode according to the actual application.

When the load current is relatively constant and is larger than 0.04In, the setting is recommende
3 to set as "Curr", such as the capacitor and reactor load. Otherwise, it is recommended to set as
"CBPos".

When the CB position can be acquired, and the load current is also larger than 0.04In, the setting
is recommende to set as "CurrAndCBPos".

When the circuit breaker of incoming line has been tripped and the busbar loses voltage,
undercurrent protection is still desired to operate at this time, the setting is recommended to set as
"CBPos".

If the CB position cannot be acquired, the setting is recommended to set as "None". However, the
other method should be adopted to ensure that undercurrent protection will not always operate
before the equipment is put into operation because the circuit breaker is not closed and there is no
current at this time, and undercurrent protection can reliably drop off after the abnormal condition
disappears.

5. 37.En

It is used to enable/disable undercurrent protection.

6. 37.Opt_Trp/Alm

It is used to enable/disable undercurrent protection operate to trip or alarm.

Trp: for tripping purpose

Alm: for alarm purpose

3.27 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)

3.27.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsUC Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsUC Settings

3-142 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.27.2 Setting List

Table 3.27-1 Breaker failure protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

CBx.50BF.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

CBx.50BF.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

CBx.50BF.I2_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

CBx.50BF.t_ReTrp 0.000~20.000 0.001 s

CBx.50BF.t1_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s

3
CBx.50BF.t2_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s

Disabled
CBx.50BF.En
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_ReTrp
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_t1
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_t2
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_3I0_1P
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_Ip
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_3I0_3P
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_I2_3P
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_CB_Ctrl
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_Alm_Init
Enabled

None
Curr
CBx.50BF.Opt_LogicMode CBPos

CurrAndCBPos

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-143

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
CBx.50BF.En_InTrp_Init
Enabled

3.27.3 Calculation Principle

1. CBx.50BF.I_Set

It is used to set the phase current setting of detecting breaker failure protection.

The measured phase current is used to detect the circuit breaker failure. The setting should can

3 detect the fault with small fault current. It could be chosen in accordance with the most sensitive
protection function that initiate the breaker failure protection.

2. CBx.50BF.3I0_Set

It is used to set the zero-sequence current setting of detecting breaker failure protection.

In the grouded systems via high impedance, the residual current is normally much smaller than the
short-circuit currents for the single-phase earth fault. In order to reliably detect the circuit breaker
failure under the single-phase earth fault, it is necessary to add the zero-sequence current detection
by the setting [CBx.50BF.En_3I0_1P] (set as "Enabled"). At this time, the phase current setting
[CBx.50BF.I_Set] could be set more sensitive.

Taking into account that the faulty current is too small for generator or transformer fault, the
sensitivity of phase current element may not meet the requirements, zero-sequence current
criterion and negative-sequence current criterion are provided in addition to the phase overcurrent
element for breaker failure protection initiated by input signal [CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P] from external
tripping. They can be enabled or disabled by the settings [CBx.50BF.En_3I0_3P] and
[CBx.50BF.En_I2_3P] respectively.

The setting [CBx.50BF.3I0_Set] shall be greater than maximum zero-sequence unbalance current
(3I0) under normal operation condition.

3. CBx.50BF.I2_Set

It is used to set the negative-sequence current setting of detecting breaker failure protection.

The setting [CBx.50BF.I2_Set] shall be greater than maximum negative-sequence unbalance

current (I2) under normal operation condition.

Its recommended setting principle can refer to the setting [CBx.50BF.3I0_Set].

4. CBx.50BF.t_ReTrp

It is used to set the re-trip time delay of breaker failure protection.

The setting defines the time delay of re-tripping for breaker failure protection, generally set as
5ms~50ms.

Its recommended value is 50ms.

5. CBx.50BF.t1_Op

3-144 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

It is used to set the time delay for the first stage of breaker failure protection.

Breaker failure protection will send three-phase tripping command to trip local circuit breaker when
the time delay of [CBx.50BF.t1_Op] is expired. The setting [CBx.50BF.t1_Op] is set as short as
possible on the premise that the selectivity of breaker failure protection is warrantable.

The recommended setting principle is as follows.

[CBx.50BF.t1_Op]=t0+tB+Δt

Where:

t0 is circuit breaker operation time, generally taken as 0.03~0.06s.

tB is the drop off time of the operation element, generally taken as 0.02~0.04s.
3
Δt is safety margin time, generally taken as 0.03s.

Normally, it is used to trip local circuit breaker again before the second stage of breaker failure
protection operating in case that the local circuit breaker could open to prevent to trip the adjacent
circuit breakers.

Its recommended value is 0.1s.

6. CBx.50BF.t2_Op

It is used to set the time delay for the second stage of breaker failure protection.

Breaker failure protection will send three-phase tripping command to trip adjacent circuit breakers
when the time delay of [CBx.50BF.t2_Op] is expired. The setting [CBx.50BF.t2_Op] is set as short
as possible on the premise that the selectivity of breaker failure protection is warrantable and
undesired operation must be avoided. Besides, the setting should be greater than the setting
[CBx.50BF.t1_Op] with safety margin.

The recommended setting principle is as follows.

[CBx.50BF.t2_Op]=t0+tB+Δt

Where:

t0 is circuit breaker operation time, generally taken as 0.03~0.06s.

tB is the drop off time of the operation element, generally taken as 0.02~0.04s.

Δt is safety time, generally taken as 0.1s.

Its recommended value is 0.2s.

The stage of breaker failure protection with time delay of [CBx.50BF.t1_Op]

will only trip local circuit breaker by three phase, and the stage with time
delay of [CBx.50BF.t2_Op] will trip all adjacent circuit breakers.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-145

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

7. CBx.50BF.En

It is used to enable/disable breaker failure protection.

It is a general control setting for breaker failure protection.

8. CBx.50BF.En_ReTrp

It is used to enable/disable re-trip function of breaker failure protection.

When the setting is set as "Enabled", the instantaneous re-tripping function is in service.

After receiving tripping signal from the device and the corresponding current criterion or CB position
3 criterion is met, then the re-trip command will be issued to trip local circuit breaker.

9. CBx.50BF.En_t1

It is used to enable/disable the first stage of breaker failure protection.

10. CBx.50BF.En_t2

It is used to enable/disable the second stage of breaker failure protection.

11. CBx.50BF.En_3I0_1P

It is used to enable/disable the zero-sequence current criterion of breaker failure protection.

Its recommended setting principle can refer to the setting [CBx.50BF.3I0_Set].

12. CBx.50BF.En_Ip

It is used to enable/disable phase overcurrent criterion of breaker failure protection via external
three-phases initiating signal "CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P".

When the seting is set as "Enabled", the phase current criterion via external three-phases initiating
signal "CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P" is valid.

13. CBx.50BF.En_3I0_3P

It is used to enable/disable zero-sequence overcurrent criterion of breaker failure protection via

external three-phases initiating signal "CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P".

Its recommended setting principle can refer to the setting [CBx.50BF.3I0_Set].

14. CBx.50BF.En_I2_3P

It is used to enable/disable negative-sequence overcurrent criterion of breaker failure protection

via external three-phases initiating signal "CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P".

Its recommended setting principle can refer to the setting [CBx.50BF.3I0_Set].

15. CBx.50BF.En_CB_Ctrl

It is used to enable/disable breaker failure protection be initiated by CB open position via external
three-phases initiating signal "CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P".

For some special protection (for example, mechanical protection or voltage protection), the fault

3-146 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

current maybe is too small to meet the current criterion when they operate. In order to make breaker
failure protection can also operate under the above situation, CB open position is used instead of
the current criterion. The precondition is that binary input signal [CBx.50BF.ExTrp_WOI] should be
assigned by external trip signal.

16. CBx.50BF.En_Alm_Init

It is used to enable/disable abnormality check of breaker failure initiating signal.

It is used to enable/disable the supervision of binary input initiating signal of breaker failure
protection. If the setting is set as "Enabled", and the initiating status of the binary input signal
maintains more than 10s, then the binary input initiating signal will be considered as invalid and an
alarm "CBx.50BF.Alm_Int" will be issued. If it is set as "Disabled", then the binary input signal will 3
not be supervised.

17. CBx.50BF.Opt_LogicMode

It is used to select breaker failure check mode.

None: no check

Curr: check the current

CBPos: check the normally open auxiliary contact

CurrAndCBPos: check the current and normally open auxiliary contact

18. CBx.50BF.En_InTrp_Init

It is used to enable/disable breaker failure protection be initiated by internal tripping

3.28 Stub Differential Protection (87STB)

3.28.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsStub Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsStub Settings

3.28.2 Setting List

Table 3.28-1 Stub differential protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

87STB.I_Pkp (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

87STB.I_Alm (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-147

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

87STB.Slope 0.300~1.000 0.001

87STB.t_Op 0.000~200.000 0.001 s

Disabled
87STB.En
Enabled

Disabled
87STB.En_Diff_Alm
Enabled
3 Disabled
87STB.En_CTS_Blk
Enabled

3.28.3 Calculation Principle

1. 87STB.I_Pkp

It is used to set pickup current setting of stub differential protection.

It shall be greater than the maximal unbalance current under normal rated load, i.e.,

[87STB.I_Pkp]=KRel×(Ker+Δm)×In

Where:

In is secondary rated current.

KRel is reliability coefficient (generally taken as 1.3~1.5).

Ker is the ratio errors of CT (k=0.03X2 for class 10P, k=0.01X2 for clase 5P and TP).

Δm is the error caused by the difference between CT ratios at two sides, and 0.05 is recommended.

This setting should ensure sensitive enough for internal fault with the minimum operation mode and
the sensitivity coefficient is not smaller than 1.5.

Generally, the fault current for stub zone fault is high, the recommended setting value is not less
than 0.5In.

2. 87STB.I_Alm

It is used to set current setting of differential current alarm.

The setting is used to detect the abnormal current condition, such as CT circuit fail, it should be
greater than the maximal unbalance current under normal load operation condition.

This setting is suggested to be more sensitive than [87STB.I_Pkp].

3. 87STB.Slope

It is used to set slope of current differential protection.

3-148 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

The setting is the slope of current differential protection operate-restrain characteristic. This setting
should be given according to the system condition and its application.

4. 87STB.t_Op

It is used to set time delay of stub differential protection.

Generally, this setting is set as zero. In special cases, it can be set with additional time delay, for
example for reverse interlocking.

5. 87STB.En

It is used to enable/disable stub differential protection.

6. 87STB.En_Diff_Alm
3
It is used to enable/disable differential current alarm function.

7. 87STB.En_CTS_Blk

It is used to enable/disable stub differential protection controlled by CT circuit failure.

If the alarm signal of differential current abnormality [87STB.Alm_Diff] is issued, stub differential
protection will be blocked if [87STB.En_CTS_Blk] is set as "Enabled"

3.29 Dead Zone Protection (50DZ)

3.29.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsDZP Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsDZP Settings

3.29.2 Setting List

Table 3.29-1 Dead zone protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

CBx.50DZ.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

CBx.50DZ.t_Op 0.000~30.000 0.001 s

Disabled
CBx.50DZ.En
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.50DZ.En_Alm_Init
Enabled

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-149

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.29.3 Calculation Principle

1. CBx.50DZ.I_Set

It is used to set the phase current setting of dead zone protection.

Its recommended value is 1A.

2. CBx.50DZ.t_Op

It is used to set the time delay of dead zone protection.

Its recommended value is 0.1s.

3 3. CBx.50DZ.En

It is used to enable/disable dead zone protection.

4. CBx.50DZ.En_Alm_Init

It is used to enable/disable abnormality check of initiating signal for dead zone protection.

3.30 Broken Conductor Protection (46BC)

3.30.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsBCP Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsBCP Settings

3.30.2 Setting List

Table 3.30-1 Broken conductor protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

46BC.I_Min (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

46BC.I2/I1_Set 0.000~5.000 0.001

46BC.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
46BC.En
Enabled

Trp
46BC.Opt_Trp/Alm
Alm

3-150 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.30.3 Calculation Principle

1. 46BC.I_Min

It is used to set minimum operating current setting of broken conductor protection.

Its recommended value is 1A.

2. 46BC.I2/I1_Set

It is used to set ratio setting (negative-sequence current to positive-sequence current) of broken

conductor protection

The network of single-phase broken condition is similar to that of two-phases earthing fault, 3
positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence network is connected in parallel,
I2/I1=Z0/(Z0+Z2), generally, zero-sequence impedance is larger than positive-sequence
impedance, i.e., I2/I1>0.5. The network of two-phases broken condition is similar to that of single-
phase earthing fault, positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence network is
connected in series, so I2/I1=1. Hence, broken conductor protection based on the ratio of negative-
sequence current to positive-sequence current can detect the broken-conductor fault.

Its recommended value is 0.5.

3. 46BC.t_Op

It is used to set the time delay of broken conductor protection.

Its recommended value is 1s.

4. 46BC.En

It is used to enable/disable broken conductor protection.

5. 46BC.Opt_Trp/Alm

It is used to enable/disable broken conductor protection operate to trip or alarm.

Trp: for tripping purpose

Alm: for alarm purpose

3.31 Pole Discrepancy Protection (62PD)

3.31.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsPDP Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsPDP Settings

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-151

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.31.2 Setting List

Table 3.31-1 Pole discrepancy protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

CBx.62PD.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

CBx.62PD.I2_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

CBx.62PD.t_Op 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

Disabled
3 CBx.62PD.En
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.62PD.En_Init_Alm
Enabled

3.31.3 Calculation Principle

1. CBx.62PD.3I0_Set

It is used to set residual current setting of pole discrepancy protection.

In order to improve the reliability of pole discrepancy protection, zero-sequence current element
can be selected as auxiliary criterion.

Its recommended value is 1A.

2. CBx.62PD.I2_Set

It is used to set negative-sequence current setting of pole discrepancy protection.

In order to improve the reliability of pole discrepancy protection, negative-sequence current

element can be selected as auxiliary criterion.

Its recommended value is 1A.

3. CBx.62PD.t_Op

It is used to set time delay of pole discrepancy protection.

Its recommended value is 1s.

4. CBx.62PD.En

It is used to enable/disable pole discrepancy protection.

5. CBx.62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl

It is used to enable/disable residual current criterion and negative-sequence current criterion for

3-152 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

pole discrepancy protection.

If the setting is set as "Enabled" pole discrepancy protection can operate only when the zero-
sequence current element or negative-sequence current element meet the criterion.

6. CBx.62PD.En_Alm_Init

It is used to enable/disable abnormality check of initiating signal for pole discrepancy protection.

3.32 Flashover Protection (50F)

3.32.1 Access Path 3

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsFOP Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsFOP Settings

3.32.2 Setting List

Table 3.32-1 Flashover protection settings

Name Range Step Unit

CBx.50F.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

CBx.50F.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

CBx.50F.I2_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A

CBx.50F.t1_Op 0.000~30.000 0.001 s

CBx.50F.t2_Op 0.000~30.000 0.001 s

Disabled
CBx.50F.En -
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.50F.En_Ip -
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.50F.En_3I0 -
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.50F.En_I2 -
Enabled

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-153

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

3.32.3 Calculation Principle

1. CBx.50F.I_Set

It is used to set phase current setting of flashover protection.

The setting should be larger than the load current after the generator paralleling or before the
generator separation, while keeping a certain margin to ensure reliability.

2. CBx.50F.3I0_Set

It is used to set residual current setting of flashover protection.

3 The setting shall be greater than maximum zero-sequence unbalance current (3I0) under normal
operation condition.

3. CBx.50F.I2_Set

It is used to set negative-sequence current setting of flashover protection.

The setting shall be greater than maximum negative-sequence unbalance current (I2) under normal
operation condition.

4. CBx.50F.t1_Op

It is used to set first time delay of flashover protection.

The stage 1 of flashover protection is usually used to trip the circuit breaker or field suppression.

The setting shall be greater than the three-phase discrpancy time when the circuit breaker is closed
or opened, and keeping a certain margin, its recommended value is 0.1s.

5. CBx.50F.t2_Op

It is used to set second time delay of flashover protection.

The stage 2 of flashover protection is usually used to initiate breaker failure protection.

The setting should be greater than the setting [CBx.50F.t1_Op], and keeping a certain margin, its
recommended value is 0.15s

6. CBx.50F.En

It is used to enable/disable flashover protection.

7. CBx.50F.En_Ip

It is used to enable/disable phase current criterion for flashover protection.

When flashover protection adopts phase current criterion, the settings should be set as "Enabled".
The circuit breaker flashover is generally single-phase or two-phase flashover, three-phase
flashover is very rare, so the setting is generally set as "Disabled".

8. CBx.50F.En_3I0

3-154 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

It is used to enable/disable residual current criterion for flashover protection.

When flashover protection adopts residual current criterion, the settings should be set as "Enabled".

9. CBx.50F.En_I2

It is used to enable/disable negative-sequence current criterion for flashover protection.

When flashover protection adopts negative-sequence current criterion, the settings should be set
as "Enabled".

3.33 Transfer Trip (TT)

3
3.33.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsTT Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsTT Settings

3.33.2 Setting List

Table 3.33-1 Transfer trip settings

Name Range Step Unit

TT.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
TT.En
Enabled

Disabled
TT.En_FD_Ctrl
Enabled

Disabled
TT.En_BlkAR
Enabled

Disabled
TT.En_CB_Ctrl
Enabled

3.33.3 Calculation Principle

10. TT.t_Op

It is used to set the time delay of transfer trip.

Its recommended value is 0.005s.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-155

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

11. TT.En

It is used to enable/disable transfer trip.

12. TT.En_FD_Ctrl

It is used to enable/disable transfer trip controlled by local fault detector element.

If the setting is set as "Enabled", transfer trip can operate only when the device picks up.

13. TT.En_BlkAR

It is used to enable/disable transfer trip operate to block AR.

3 14. TT.En_CB_Ctrl

It is used to enable/disable transfer trip controlled by circuit breaker position.

If the setting is set as "Enabled", transfer trip can operate only when the circuit breaker of any
phase is in closed position.

3.34 Trip Logic (TRP)

3.34.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsTrip Logic Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsTrip Logic Settings

3.34.2 Setting List

Table 3.34-1 Trip logic settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
En_MPF_Blk_AR
Enabled

Disabled
En_3PF_Blk_AR
Enabled

Line.t_PhSFail 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
Line.En_PhSFail
Enabled

Line.En_PhSF_Blk_AR Disabled

3-156 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Enabled

t_Dwell_Trp 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
CBx.En_Trp3P
Enabled

3.34.3 Calculation Principle

1. En_MPF_Blk_AR
3
It is used to enable/disable auto-reclosing blocked when multi-phase fault happens.

2. En_3PF_Blk_AR

It is used to enable/disable auto-reclosing blocked when three-phase fault happens.

3. Line.t_PhSFail

It is used to set the time delay of confirming faulty phase selection failure.

4. Line.En_PhSFail

It is used to enable/disable faulty phase selection failure.

5. Line.En_PhSF_Blk_AR

It is used to enable/disable auto-reclosing blocked when faulty phase selection fails.

6. t_Dwell_Trp

It is used to set the dwell time of tripping command.

Its recommended value is 0.04.

The tripping contact shall drop off when the faulty current disappears or the protection element
drops off. It ensures that the tripping pulse will be kept as same as the setting [t_Dwell_Trp] at least
after the tripping signal is issued.

7. CBx.En_Trp3P

It is used to enable/disable three-phase tripping mode of circuit breaker No.x for any fault conditions.

3.35 Automatic Reclosure (79)

3.35.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsAR Settings

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-157

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsAR Settings

3.35.2 Setting List

Table 3.35-1 AR settings

Name Range Step Unit

Config
CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode
Setting
3 Disabled
CBx.79.En_SynChk
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.79.En_SynDd_RefDd
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.79.En_SynLv_RefDd
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.79.En_SynDd_RefLv
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.79.En_NoChk
Enabled

CBx.79.Num 1~4 1

CBx.79.t_Dd_1PS1 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS1 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS2 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS3 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS4 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

CBx.79.t_CBClsd 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

CBx.79.t_CBReady 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

CBx.79.t_Wait_Chk 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

CBx.79.t_Reclaim 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

CBx.79.t_DDO_Blk 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

CBx.79.t_AddDly 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

3-158 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

CBx.79.t_WaitMaster 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

CBx.79.t_SecFault 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

CBx.79.t_PersistTrp 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

CBx.79.t_Fail 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

CBx.79.t_PW 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

Disabled
CBx.79.En_AddDly
Enabled
3
Disabled
CBx.79.En_FailCheck
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.79.En_PDF_Blk
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.79.En_CutPulse
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.79.En
Enabled

Setting
CBx.79.Opt_Enable
Setting&Config

Disabled
CBx.79.En_CBInit
Enabled

None

CBx.79.Opt_Priority High

Low

Config
CBx.79.Opt_ValidMode
Setting

Disabled
CBx.79.En_1P
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.79.En_3P
Enabled

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-159

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
CBx.79.En_1P/3P
Enabled

3.35.3 Calculation Principle

1. CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode

It is used to select the control source of synchronism check mode for AR.

3 Synchronism check mode can be selected by external signal via binary inputs or internal logic
settings. If the setting [CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] set as "Setting", synchronism check mode
is determined by the internal logic settings. If the settings [CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] set as
"Config", AR mode is determined by the input signals

Config: select synchronism check mode for AR by configuration signals

CBx.79.Sel_SynChk

CBx.79.Sel_SynDd_RefDd

CBx.79.Sel_SynLv_RefDd

CBx.79.Sel_SynDd_RefLv

CBx.79.Sel_NoChk

If the settings [CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] set as "Config", and there is on binary input was
energized, then the synchronism check mode for AR is abnormal and the alarm signal will be issued.

Setting: select synchronism check mode for AR by the settings

CBx.79.En_SynChk

CBx.79.En_SynDd_RefDd

CBx.79.En_SynLv_RefDd

CBx.79.En_SynDd_RefLv

CBx.79.En_NoChk

If the settings [CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] set as "Setting", and all corresponding settings are
set as "Disabled", then the synchronism check mode for AR is abnormal and the alarm signal will
be issued.

2. CBx.79.En_SynChk

It is used to enable/disable synchronism check for AR.

It is valid only if the setting [CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] is set as "Setting".

3. CBx.79.En_SynDd_RefDd

3-160 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

It is used to enable/disable dead synchronization voltage and dead reference voltage check for AR.

It is valid only if the setting [CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] is set as "Setting".

4. CBx.79.En_SynLv_RefDd.

It is used to enable/disable live synchronization voltage and dead reference voltage check for AR.

It is valid only if the setting [CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] is set as "Setting".

5. CBx.79.En_SynDd_RefLv

It is used to enable/disable dead synchronization voltage and live reference voltage check for AR.

It is valid only if the setting [CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] is set as "Setting". 3

6. CBx.79.En_NoChk

It is used to enable/disable no check for AR.

It is valid only if the setting [CBx.79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] is set as "Setting".

7. CBx.79.Num

It is used to set maximum number of reclosing attempts.

The AR function could be set as one-shot or multi-shot. Through the setting [CBx.79.N_Rcls], the
maximum number of reclosing attempts can be set up to 4 times. Generally, only one-shot AR is
selected.

The table below shows the number of reclose attempts with respect to the settings and AR modes.

1-pole AR 3-pole AR 1/3-pole AR

Setting Value
N-1AR N-3AR N-1AR N-3AR N-1AR N-3AR

1 1 0 0 1 1 1

2 1 0 0 2 1 2

3 1 0 0 3 1 3

4 1 0 0 4 1 4

N-1AR: the reclosing number of 1-pole AR

N-3AR: the reclosing number of 3-pole AR

8. CBx.79.t_Dd_1PS1

It is used to set dead time of first shot 1-pole reclosing.

The setting should be set according to system stability requirement, meanwhile, arc-extinguishing
of instantaneous fault and insulation recovery ability should also be considered. Generally, this
setting is greater than 0.5s, 1.0s is recommended.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-161

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Its recommended value is 0.8s.

9. CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS1

It is used to set dead time of first shot 3-pole reclosing.

The setting should be set according to system stability requirement, arc-extinguishing of

instantaneous fault and insulation recovery ability should also be considered. In addition, possibility
for two-side protection (double power supply) to cut off fault with different time limit should be taken
into consideration.

Its recommended value is 0.6s.

3 10. CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS2

It is used to set dead time of second shot 3-pole reclosing.

It will be active only if the setting [CBx.79.Num] is set as more than 1.

Its recommended value is 0.6s.

11. CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS3

It is used to set dead time of third shot 3-pole reclosing.

It will be active only if the setting [CBx.79.Num] is set as more than 2.

Its recommended value is 0.6s.

12. CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS4

It is used to set dead time of fourth shot 3-pole reclosing.

It will be active only if the setting [CBx.79.Num] is set as more than 3.

Its recommended value is 0.6s.

13. CBx.79.t_CBClsd

It is used to set the waiting time needed by the circuit-breaker to obtain the AR ready state after the
circuit breaker is closed.

It is the minimum time delay for circuit breaker in closed position before AR gets ready. The duration
of the circuit breaker in closed position before fault occurrence is not less than the setting
[CBx.79.t_CBClsd] for a successful reclosing.

14. CBx.79.t_CBReady

It is used to set time delay to wait for CB healthy, and begin to timing when the input signal
[CBx.79.CB_Healthy] is de-energized and if it is not energized within this time delay, AR will be
blocked.

The input signal [CBx.79.CB_Healthy] must be energized before auto-reclosure gets ready.
Because most circuit breakers can finish one complete process: open-closed-open, it is necessary
that circuit breaker has enough energy before reclosing. When the dead time delay of AR is

3-162 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

exhausted, if the input signal [CBx.79.CB_Healthy] is still not energized within time delay
[CBx.79.t_CBReady], AR will be blocked. If this function is not required, the input signal
[CBx.79.CB_Healthy] can be not to configure, and its logical state will be thought as "1" by default.

15. CBx.79.t_Wait_Chk

It is used to set maximum wait time for synchronism check.

The setting is the maximum allowable time used for synchronism check. It is valid only if the
synchronism check mode is selected. If the synchronism check condition is not met after the delay
time elapsed, the synchronism check failed and the auto-reclosing will be blocked.

Its recommended value is 10s.

3
16. CBx.79.t_Reclaim

It is reclaim time of AR.

The reset time of circuit breaker after auto-reclosing operation. With the assignment of the close
command, the automatic reclosing function goes into the reclaim time state. During this time, it is
decided if the current reclosing cycle was successful or not.

Its recommended value is 15s.

⚫ If during the reclaim time no further tripping occurs, the currently running automatic reclosing
cycle was successful.

⚫ If during the reclaim time another tripping occurred, the currently running automatic reclosing
cycle was not successful. If other automatic reclosing cycles are permitted, one of these cycles
will be used to continue the process. In contrast, if the currently executed cycle was the last
permissible cycle, the automatic reclosing process will end and be reported as unsuccessful.

17. CBx.79.t_DDO_Blk

It is used to set dropout time delay of blocking AR, when blocking signal for AR disappears, AR
blocking condition drops out after this time delay.

AR will be blocked immediately once the blocking condition of AR appears, and the blocking
condition of AR will drop off with a time delay [CBx.79.t_DDO_BlkAR] after blocking signal
disappears.

Its recommended value is 5s.

18. CBx.79.t_AddDly

It is used to set additional time delay for AR.

AR will be initiated by the tripping of the device. In the process of channel abnormality, an internal
fault occurs on the transmission line, backup protection at both ends of line will operate to trip the
circuit breaker at each end. The operation time of backup protection at both ends of the line is
possibly inconsist, while the time delay of AR needs to consider the arc-extinguishing and insulation
recovery ability for transient fault, so the time delay of AR shall be considered comprehensively
according to the operation time of the device at both ends. When the communication channel of

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-163

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

main protection is abnormal (input signal [CBx.79.PLC_Lost] is energized), and the setting
[CBx.79.En_AddDly] is set as "Enabled", then the dead time delay of AR shall be equal to the
original dead time delay of AR plus the extra time delay [CBx.79.t_AddDly], so as to ensure the
recovery of insulation intensity of fault point when reclosing after transient fault. This extra time
delay [CBx.79.t_AddDly] is only valid for the first shot AR. This time should consider the operation
time difference between both sides.

Its recommended value is 0.5s.

19. CBx.79.t_WaitMaster

It is used to set maximum wait time for reclosing permissive signal from master AR.
3 The setting defines the maximum wait time for reclosing permissive signal from master AR. To
prevent further impacts by slave AR reclosing, the output signal "CBx.79.WaitToSlave" of master
AR is usually configured to the signal "CBx.79.WaitMaster" of slave AR. Slave AR is permissible to
reclosing only if master AR is reclosed successfully.

This setting should cooperate with the setting [CBx.79.Opt_Priority]. It is invalid if the setting
[CBx.79.Opt_Priority] is set as "None".

20. CBx.79.t_SecFault

It is used to set the time delay of discriminating another fault in the AR inprogress period. The timer
starts count after 1-pole AR initiated, if another fault happens during this time delay, 3-pole AR will
be initiated. If another fault happens after that time, It will be recognized as the second fault and
AR will be blocked if the setting [CBx.79.En_PDF_Blk] is set as "Enabled".

21. CBx.79.t_PersistTrp

It is used to set time delay of excessive trip signal to block AR.

When there is a fault on an overhead line, the concerned circuit breakers will be tripped normally.
After fault is cleared, the tripping command will drop off immediately. In case the circuit breaker is
in failure, etc., and the tripping signal of the circuit breaker maintains and exceeds the time delay
[CBx.79.t_PersistTrp], AR will be blocked. This setting should be longer than the longest tripping
time of circuit breaker plus safety margin.

Its recommended value is 0.2s.

22. CBx.79.t_Fail

It is used to set the time delay waiting for CB close position to conform reclosing successful.

The setting is the time delay from reclosing command sent to unsuccessful reclosing, which shall
be greater than the reclosing operation time of circuit breaker. This time will be valid if the setting
[CBx.79.En_FailCheck] is set as "Enabled".

⚫ If during the time CB is closed, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle was successful.

⚫ If during the time CB remains open, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle was not
successful, the automatic reclosing process will end and be reported as fail.

3-164 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

If the reclosing is considered as unsuccessful, the device will issue a signal (CBx.79.Fail_Rcls) to
indicate that the reclosing is unsuccessful. AR will not enter the ready state unless the circuit
breaker position drops off, and can only begin to enter the ready state again after the circuit breaker
is closed.

23. CBx.79.t_PW

It is used to set pulse width of AR closing signal.

The setting shall be set according to actual requirements, if no tripping latch circuit, then the value
should be greater than the reclosing time of circuit breaker.

For the circuit breaker without anti-pump interlock, the setting [CBx.79.En_CutPulse] is available
to control the reclosing pulse. When this function is enabled, if the device operates to trip during
3
reclosing, the reclosing pulse will drop off immediately, so as to prevent multi-shot reclosing onto
fault.

Its recommended value is 0.12s.

24. CBx.79.En_AddDly

It is used to enable/disable auto-reclosing with an additional dead time delay.

Its recommended setting principle can refer to the setting [CBx.79.t_AddDly].

25. CBx.79.En_FailCheck

It is used to enable/disable confirm whether AR is successful by checking CB status.

Whether the reclosing is successful or not, it can be implemented by checking of CB status. If

[CBx.79.En_FailCheck] is set as "Enabled", the device will check CB status to confirm whether the
reclosing is successful or not.

26. CBx.79.En_PDF_Blk

It is used to enable/disable auto-reclosing blocked when a fault occurs under pole discrepancy
condition.

Its recommended setting principle can refer to the setting [CBx.79.t_SecFault].

27. CBx.79.En_CutPulse

It is used to enable/disable adjust the length of reclosing pulse.

For the circuit breaker without anti-pump interlock, a setting [CBx.79.En_CutPulse] is available to
control the reclosing pulse. When this function is enabled, if the device operates to trip during
reclosing, the reclosing pulse will drop off immediately, so as to prevent multi-shot reclosing onto
fault.

28. CBx.79.En

It is used to enable/disable auto-reclosing.

29. CBx.79.Opt_Enable

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-165

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

It is used to enable/disable AR by external input signal besides logic setting [CBx.79.En].

Setting: only the setting, which means AR function is controlled only by setting [CBx.79.En].

Setting&Config: the setting and configuration signal, which means AR function is controlled not only
by setting [CBx.79.En], but also by external binary input which could be configured by PCS-Studio.

If [CBx.79.Opt_Enable] is set as "Setting&Config", AR can be enabled if following conditions are

all satisfied:

⚫ Logic setting: [CBx.79.En] is set as "Enabled"

⚫ Binary input: "CBx.79.Enable" is energized

3 ⚫ Binary input: "CBx.79.Block" is de-energized

If the setting [CBx.79.Opt_Enable] is set as "Setting", AR could be enabled only by setting

[CBx.79.En].

30. CBx.79.En_CBInit

It is used to enable/disable AR be initiated by CB open position.

This setting is available for selection if AR is initiated by CB status. Under normal conditions, when
AR is ready to reclosing, AR will be initiated if circuit breaker is open and corresponding phase
current is nil. AR initiated by CB status can be divided into initiating 1-pole AR and 3-pole AR. For
more details, please refer to "PCS-931S Technical Manual".

31. CBx.79.Opt_Priority

It is used to select AR priority.

It is used for CB sequence reclosing in one and a half breakers.

None: single-breaker arrangement

High: master AR of double-breakers arrangement

Low: slave AR of double-breakers arrangement

The output signal "CBx.79.WaitToSlave" of master AR will be usually configured to the input signal
"CBx.79.WaitMaster" of slave AR. Slave AR is permissible to reclosing only if master AR is reclosed
successfully.

32. CBx.79.Opt_ValidMode

It is used to select the control source of AR mode.

AR mode can be selected by external signal via binary input signals or internal logic settings. If the
setting [CBx.79.Opt_ValidMode] set as "Setting", AR mode is determined by the settings. If the
settings [CBx.79.Opt_ValidMode] set as "Config", AR mode is determined by the binary input
signals.

Config: select AR mode by configuration signals

3-166 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

CBx.79.Sel_1PAR

CBx.79.Sel_3PAR

CBx.79.Sel_1P/3PAR

Setting: select AR mode by the settings

CBx.79.En_1PAR

CBx.79.En_3PAR

CBx.79.En_1P/3PAR

33. CBx.79.En_1P 3
It is used to enable/disable 1-pole AR mode.

It is valid only if the setting [CBx.79.Opt_ValidMode] set as "Setting".

Its recommended value is "Disabled".

34. CBx.79.En_3P

It is used to enable/disable 3-pole AR mode.

It is valid only if the setting [CBx.79.Opt_ValidMode] set as "Setting".

Its recommended value is "Disabled".

35. CBx.79.En_1P/3P

It is used to enable/disable 1/3-pole AR mode.

It is valid only if the setting [CBx.79.Opt_ValidMode] set as "Setting".

Its recommended value is "Enabled".

3.36 Impedance-Based Fault Location (FL)

3.36.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsLine Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Protection SettingsLine Settings

3.36.2 Setting List

Table 3.36-1 Fault location settings

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-167

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

Name Range Step Unit Default

X1L (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω 10.000

R1L (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω 1.000

X0L (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω 20.000

R0L (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.010 Ω 3.000

X0M (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω 20.000

R0M (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω 3.000

3 LineLength 0.00~6000.00 0.01 km 100.00

U_MOV_Prot 0.000~200.000 0.001 V

Disabled
En_SerCmp
Enabled

3.36.3 Calculation Principle

1. X1L

It is used to set positive-sequence reactance of the whole line. (secondary value)

It is used for calculation of fault location, and it should be set the same as actual value.

2. R1L

It is used to set positive-sequence resistance of the whole line. (secondary value)

It is used for calculation of fault location, and it should be set the same as actual value.

3. X0L

It is used to set zero-sequence reactance of the whole line. (secondary value)

It is used for calculation of fault location, and it should be set the same as actual value.

4. R0L

It is used to set zero-sequence resistance of the whole line. (secondary value)

It is used for calculation of fault location, and it should be set the same as actual value.

5. X0M

It is used to set zero-sequence mutual reactance. (secondary value)

It is used for calculation of fault location, and it should be set the same as actual value.

6. R0M

3-168 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

It is used to set zero-sequence mutual resistance of the whole line. (secondary value)

It is used for calculation of fault location, and it should be set the same as actual value.

When an earth fault occurred on a line of parallel lines arrangement, for cases where precise fault
location is required for long lines with high mutual coupling, mutual compensation is then required
to improve the distance measurement. The residual current from the parallel line should be added
to the device, and the settings of mutual zero-sequence reactance, mutual zero-sequence
resistance should be set as the practical value. If the residual current from the parallel line isn’t
injected to the device, then the settings of mutual zero-sequence reactance, mutual zero-sequence
resistance should be set as 0.

7. LineLength 3
It is used to set total length of the whole line.

It is used for calculation of fault location, and it should be set the same as actual value.

8. U_MOV_Prot

It is used to set voltage setting of MOV (Metal-oxide Varistor) in series compensated line.

Assuming that:

⚫ The protection voltage of series capacitor C1 is Upl1, and its capacitive reactance is XC1.

⚫ The protection voltage of series capacitor C2 is Upl2, and its capacitive reactance is XC2.

⚫ …..

⚫ The protection voltage of series capacitor C6 is Upl6, and its capacitive reactance is XC6.
IED1 IED2 IED3 IED4 IED5 IED6 IED7 IED8

C1 C2 C3

L1 L2 L3 L4

M N
VT2 VT3 VT5

VT1 VT4

L5 L6
C4 C5 C6
O

The setting should be set according to the peak value of MOV′s protection voltage in forward
direction based on local protection VT.

If there is no series compensation in forward direction based on local protection VT, the setting
[U_MOV_Prot] can should be set as "0". If there is any series compensation in forward direction on
the basis of local protection VT, the setting [U_MOV_Prot] should be set to make the zone 1 of
distance protection not overreach for an external fault due to the shrinkage of the protected zone

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-169

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

by the setting [U_MOV_Prot]. The following examples are illustrated according to each specific
condition.

⚫ For IED2 and IED4, no matter the protection voltage is from busbar VT or line VT, there is no
series compensation in forward direction based on local protection VT, the setting
[U_MOV_Prot] of IED2 and IED4 should be set as "0".

⚫ For IED3, no matter the protection voltage is from busbar VT or line VT, there are series
capacitors C1 and C4 in forward direction based on local protection VT, the setting
[U_MOV_Prot] of IED3 can be set as "max(Upl1, Upl4)" to make sure that IED3's zone 1 of
distance protection will not overreach for an external fault in L3 or L5. If any series
3 compensation or any series compensated line is out of service, the corresponding setting
[U_MOV_Prot] should be set as "0". For example, if the series capacitor C4 or the series
compensated line L5 is out of service, corresponding Upl4 taking "0", the setting [U_MOV_Prot]
of IED3 should be set as "Upl1".

⚫ For IED5, if the protection voltage is from busbar VT1, there are series capacitors C1, C2, C3,
C5 and C6 in forward direction based on local protection VT, the setting [U_MOV_Prot] of IED5
can be set as "Upl1+Upl2+max(Upl3, Upl5, Upl6)" to make sure that IED5's zone 1 of distance
protection will not overreach for an external fault in line L4, L5 or L6. If the protection voltage
is from line VT2, there are series capacitors C2, C3, C5 and C6 in forward direction based on
local protection VT, the setting [U_MOV_Prot] of IED5 can be set as "Upl2+max(Upl3, Upl5,
Upl6)" to make sure that IED5's zone 1 of distance protection will not overreach for an external
fault in line L4, L5 or L6.

⚫ For IED6, if the protection voltage if from busbar VT4, there are series capacitors C1, C2 and
C4 in forward direction based on local protection VT, the setting [U_MOV_Prot] of IED6 can
be set as "Upl1+Upl2+Upl4" to make sure that zone 1 of IED6 will not overreach for an external
fault in line L2 or L5. If the protection voltage is from line VT3, there are series capacitors C1
and C4 in forward direction based on local protection VT, the setting [U_MOV_Prot] of IED6
can be set as "Upl1+Upl4" to make sure that IED6's zone 1 of distance protection will not
overreach for an external fault in line L2 or L5.

⚫ For IED7, if the protection voltage is from busbar VT4, there are series capacitor C3 in forward
direction based on local protection VT, the setting [U_MOV_Prot] of IED7 can be set as "Upl3".
If the protection voltage is from line VT5, there is no series capacitor in forward direction based
on local protection VT, the setting [U_MOV_Prot] of P4 can be set as "0".

⚫ For IED8, no matter the protection voltage is from busbar VT or line VT, there are series
capacitors C2, C3, C5 and C6 in forward direction based on local protection VT, the setting
[U_MOV_Prot] of IED8 can be set as "Upl3+max(Upl2, Upl5, Upl6)".

⚫ For IED1, there are some special conditions. When line L2 is shorter but line L3 or L5 is longer,
XC1 or XC4 may be greater than the reactance of line L2, or XC1 (XC4) may be greater than the
reactance of line L2 after infeeding by the adjacent line, then IED's zone 1 of distance
protection maybe overreach for an external fault in line L3 or L5, so the setting [U_MOV_Prot]
of IED1 can be set as "max(Upl1, Upl4)" to make sure that IED's zone 1 of distance protection
will not overreach for an external fault in line L3 or L5. If there is no overreaching risk for IED's

3-170 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 3 Protection Settings

zone 1 of distance protection, the setting [U_MOV_Prot] of IED1 can be set as "0".

9. En_SerCmp

It is used to enable/disable series capacitor compensation.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 3-171

Date: 2023-02-09
 4 Control Settings

4 Control Settings

Table of Contents

4.1 Synchronism Check (25) ................................................................................. 4-1

4.1.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 4-1

4.1.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 4-2

4.2 Voltage Selection ............................................................................................. 4-6

4.2.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 4-6
4
4.2.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 4-6

4.2.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 4-6

4.3 Switchgear Control .......................................................................................... 4-7

4.3.1 DPS settings ......................................................................................................................... 4-7

4.3.2 Control Settings .................................................................................................................... 4-8

4.3.3 Interlocking settings.............................................................................................................. 4-9

List of Tables

Table 4.1-1 Synchronism check settings .................................................................................. 4-1

Table 4.2-1 Voltage selection settings....................................................................................... 4-6

Table 4.3-1 DPS settings ............................................................................................................. 4-7

Table 4.3-2 Control settings ....................................................................................................... 4-8

Table 4.3-3 Interlocking settings .............................................................................................. 4-10

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 4-a

Date: 2023-02-09
 4 Control Settings

4-b PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
-28
 4 Control Settings

4.1 Synchronism Check (25)

4.1.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsSyn Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGroup*Meas Control SettingsSyn Settings

4.1.2 Setting List

Table 4.1-1 Synchronism check settings

Name Range Step Unit 4

Setting
CBx.25.Opt_ValidMode
Config

Disabled
CBx.25.En_SynChk
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.25.En_DdChk
Enabled

CBx.25.U_UV 0.00~100.00 0.01 %

CBx.25.U_OV 100.00~170.00 0.01 %

CBx.25.f_UF 45.000~65.000 0.001 Hz

CBx.25.f_OF 45.000~65.000 0.001 Hz

Ua

Ub

Uc
CBx.25.Opt_U_SynChk
Uab

Ubc

Uca

CBx.25.U_Diff_Set 0.00~100.00 0.01 V

CBx.25.f_Diff_Set 0.00~2.00 0.01 Hz

CBx.25.df/dt_Set 0.00~2.00 0.01 Hz/s

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 4-1

Date: 2023-02-09
 4 Control Settings

Name Range Step Unit

CBx.25.phi_Diff_Set 0.00~180.00 0.01 °

CBx.25.phi_Comp 0.00~360.00 0.01 °

SynDdRefDd

SynLvRefDd

SynDdRefLv

CBx.25.Opt_Mode_DdChk RefDd

SynDd

SynLvRefDd/SynDdRefLv

4 AnySideDd

CBx.25.U_DdChk 0.00~100.00 0.01 V

CBx.25.U_LvChk 0.00~100.00 0.01 V

CBx.25.t_Reset 0~60 1 s

CBx.25.t_Close_CB 0~2000 1 ms

Disabled
CBx.25.En_f_Diff_Chk
Enabled

Disabled
CBx.25.En_df/dt_Chk
Enabled

4.1.3 Calculation Principle

1. CBx.25.Opt_ValidMode

It is used to select the decision mode for synchronism check.

Setting: the mode of synchronism check is determined by the settings [CBx.25.En_SynChk] and
[CBx.25.En_DdChk];

Config: the mode of synchronism check is determined by the input signals "in_syn_chk" and
"in_vol_chk" via PCS-Studio configuration tool.

2. CBx.25.En_SynChk

It is used to enable/disable for synchro-check.

The setting is valid only if the setting [25.Opt_ValidMode] is set as "Setting".

3. CBx.25.En_DdChk

It is used to enable/disable dead charge check.

4-2 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
-28
 4 Control Settings

The setting is valid only if the setting [25.Opt_ValidMode] is set as "Setting".

4. CBx.25.U_UV

It is used to set under voltage threshold for CB closing blocking.

It should be set according to the pecentage of secondary rated phase voltage (Un) or secondary
rated phase-to-phase votlage (Unn) based on the value of the setting [CBx.25.Opt_U_SynChk].

[CBx.25.Opt_U_SynChk]="Ua", "Ub" or "Uc", taking Un as the reference value

[CBx.25.Opt_U_SynChk]="Uab", "Ubc" or "Uca", taking Unn as the reference value

When the voltage at reference side or synchronous side is less than the setting, the synchro-check
will be blocked.

Its recommended value is 80.00%Un.

5. CBx.25.U_OV 4
Percentage threshold of over voltage for CB closing blocking

It is used to set over voltage threshold for CB closing blocking.

It should be set according to the pecentage of secondary rated phase voltage (Un) or secondary
rated phase-to-phase votlage (Unn) based on the value of the setting [CBx.25.Opt_U_SynChk].

[CBx.25.Opt_U_SynChk]="Ua", "Ub" or "Uc", taking Un as the reference value

[CBx.25.Opt_U_SynChk]="Uab", "Ubc" or "Uca", taking Unn as the reference value

When the voltage at reference side or synchronous side is more than the setting, the synchro-
check will be blocked.

Its recommended value is 170.00%Un.

6. CBx.25.f_UF

It is used to set under frequency threshold for CB closing blocking.

It should be set according to the pecentage of rated frequency.

When the system frequency is less than the setting, the synchro-check will be blocked.

Its recommended value is 45.000Hz.

7. CBx.25.f_OF

It is used to set over frequency threshold for CB closing blocking.

It should be set according to the pecentage of rated frequency.

When the system frequency is more than the setting, the synchro-check will be blocked.

Its recommended value is 65.000Hz.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 4-3

Date: 2023-02-09
 4 Control Settings

8. CBx.25.Opt_U_SynChk

It is used to select voltage source for synchronism check.

Ua: phase-A voltage

Ub: phase-B voltage

Uc: phase-C voltage

Uab: phase-AB voltage

Ubc: phase-BC voltage

Uca: phase-CA voltage

The setting is valid only when the synchronization side or the reference side voltage is three-phase.
Please set it according to the actual synchronization voltage.
4 9. CBx.25.U_Diff_Set

It is used to set the threshold of voltage difference for synchronism check.

Its recommended value is 10.00V.

10. CBx.25.f_Diff_Set

It is used to set the threshold of frequency difference for synchronism check.

Its recommended value is 0.50Hz.

11. CBx.25.df/dt_Set

It is used to set the threshold of rate-of-change of frequency difference for synchronism check.

Its recommended value is 1.00Hz/s.

12. CBx.25.phi_Diff_Set

It is used to set the threshold of phase difference for synchronism check.

Its recommended value is 15.00°.

The setting should meet the following requirement:

𝑑∆𝑓
[𝐶𝐵𝑥. 25. 𝑝ℎ𝑖_𝐷𝑖𝑓𝑓_𝑆𝑒𝑡] > |∆𝛿 + ∆𝛿𝐶𝑜𝑚𝑝 − (2𝜋∆𝑓 × 𝑡𝐶𝑙𝑜𝑠𝑒_𝐶𝐵 + 𝜋 × 𝑡𝐶𝑙𝑜𝑠𝑒_𝐶𝐵 2)|
𝑑𝑡

∆𝛿 is the phase angle difference between the reference side and the synchronous side

∆𝛿𝐶𝑜𝑚𝑝 is compensation angle of phase difference

∆𝑓 is the frequency difference

𝑡𝐶𝑙𝑜𝑠𝑒_𝐶𝐵 is the setting [CBx.25.t_Close_CB]

4-4 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
-28
 4 Control Settings

13. CBx.25.phi_Comp

It is used to set compensation angle of phase difference for synchronism check.

14. CBx.25.Opt_Mode_DdChk

It is used to select of dead charge check mode.

SynDdRefDd: synchronism voltage is dead & reference voltage is dead

SynLvRefDd: synchronism voltage is live & reference voltage is dead

SynDdRefLv: synchronism voltage is dead & reference voltage is live

RefDd: reference voltage is dead

SynDd: synchronism voltage is dead

SynLvRefDd/SynDdRefLv: synchronism voltage is live & reference voltage is dead or synchronism

voltage is dead & reference voltage is live 4
AnySideDd: synchronism voltage or reference voltage is dead

15. CBx.25.U_DdChk

It is used to set the threshold for voltage dead check.

Its recommended value is 17.32V.

16. CBx.25.U_LvChk

It is used to set the threshold for voltage live check.

Its recommended value is 34.64V.

17. CBx.25.t_Reset

It is used to set the threshold of duration for synchrocheck.

The window starts from the receiving moment of synchronous closing command and ends when all
synchronous closing criteria are met or timeout. The timeout causes the synchronism check failure.

Its recommended value is 5s.

18. CBx.25.t_Close_CB

It is used to set circuit breaker closing time. It is the time from receiving closing command pulse till
the CB is completely closed. Please set it according to the mechanism operating time of the circuit
breaker, which usually is provided by the CB's manufacturer.

Its recommended value is 20ms.

19. 25.En_f_Diff_Chk

It is used to enable/disable frequency difference check.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 4-5

Date: 2023-02-09
 4 Control Settings

20. 25.En_df/dt_Chk

It is used to enable/disable frequency variation difference check.

4.2 Voltage Selection

4.2.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsSystem Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalGlobal SettingsSystem Settings

4 4.2.2 Setting List

Table 4.2-1 Voltage selection settings

Name Range Step Unit

NoVoltSel

DblBusOneCB

CBx.VoltSel.Opt_CBConfig 3/2BusCB1

3/2TieCB

3/2BusCB2

4.2.3 Calculation Principle

1. CBx.VoltSel.Opt_CBConfig

Selection of CB application scenario for voltage selection

It is used to select the circuit breaker No.x arrangement for voltage selection.

NoVoltSel: no voltage selection

DblBusOneCB: one circuit breaker for double busbar

3/2BusCB1: bus 1 side circuit breaker for one and a half breakers

3/2TieCB: line side circuit breaker for one and a half breakers

3/2BusCB2: bus 2 side circuit breaker for one and a half breakers

Please set it according to the actual the circuit breaker arrangement, and it should be set as
"NoVoltSel" if no voltage selection is adopted and the voltage selection logic is disabled.

4-6 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
-28
 4 Control Settings

4.3 Switchgear Control

4.3.1 DPS settings

4.3.1.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsDPS Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalMeas Control SettingsDPS Settings

4.3.1.2 Setting List

Table 4.3-1 DPS settings

4
Name Range Step Unit

CB**.DPS.t_DPU 0~60000 1 ms

Disabled
CB**.DPS.En_Alm
Enabled

CB**.DPS.t_Alm 0~60000 1 ms

DS**.DPS.t_DPU 0~60000 1 ms

Disabled
DS**.DPS.En_Alm
Enabled

DS**.DPS.t_Alm 0~60000 1 ms

4.3.1.3 Calculation Principle

1. CB**.DPS.t_DPU

It is used to set the DPU (delay pick up) time of DPS (double point status), i.e. debounce time. (for
circuit breaker No.**)

The setting value should be greater than the CB operating time to avoid the intermediate state in
the process of CB opening or closing.

Its recommended value is 500ms.

2. CB**.DPS.En_Alm

It is used to enable/disable DPS alarm. (for circuit breaker No.**)

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 4-7

Date: 2023-02-09
 4 Control Settings

3. CB**.DPS.t_Alm

It is used to set time delay of DPS alarm. (for circuit breaker No.**)

Its recommended value is 500ms.

4. DS**.DPS.t_DPU

It is used to set the DPU (delay pick up) time of DPS, i.e. debounce time. (for circuit breaker No.**)

The setting value should be greater than the DS operating time to avoid the intermediate state in
the process of DS opening or closing.

Its recommended value is 500ms.

5. DS**.DPS.En_Alm

It is used to enable/disable DPS alarm. (for circuit breaker No.**)

4 6. DS**.DPS.t_Alm

It is used to set time delay of DPS alarm. (for circuit breaker No.**)

Its recommended value is 500ms.

4.3.2 Control Settings

4.3.2.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsControl Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalMeas Control SettingsControl Settings

4.3.2.2 Setting List

Table 4.3-2 Control settings

Name Range Step Unit

CB**.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 1 ms

CB**.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 1 ms

DS**.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 1 ms

DS**.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 1 ms

DirCtrl**.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 1 ms

DirCtrl**.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 1 ms

4-8 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
-28
 4 Control Settings

4.3.2.3 Calculation Principle

1. CB**.t_PW_Opn

It is used to set pulse width (PW), i.e. holding time, for opening output of circuit breaker No.**.

The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the CB opening circuit.

Its recommended value is 500ms.

2. CB**.t_PW_Cls

It is used to set pulse width (PW), i.e. holding time, for closing output of circuit breaker No.**.

The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the CB closing circuit.

Its recommended value is 500ms.

DS**.t_PW_Opn
4
3.

It is used to set pulse width (PW), i.e. holding time, for opening output of disconnector switch No.**.

The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the DS opening circuit.

Its recommended value is 500ms.

4. DS**.t_PW_Cls

It is used to set pulse width (PW), i.e. holding time, for closing output of disconnector switch No.**.

The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the DS closing circuit.

Its recommended value is 500ms.

5. DirCtrl**.t_PW_Opn

It is used to set pulse width (PW), i.e. holding time, for opening output of direct control object No.**.

The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the direct control opening circuit.

Its recommended value is 500ms.

6. DirCtrl**.t_PW_Cls

It is used to set pulse width (PW), i.e. holding time, for closing output of direct control object No.**.

The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the direct control closing circuit.

Its recommended value is 500ms.

4.3.3 Interlocking settings

4.3.3.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsInterlocking Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 4-9

Date: 2023-02-09
 4 Control Settings

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalMeas Control SettingsInterlocking

Settings

4.3.3.2 Setting List

Table 4.3-3 Interlocking settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
CB**.En_CILO_Opn
Enabled

Disabled
CB**.En_CILO_Cls
Enabled

Disabled
4 DS**.En_CILO_Opn
Enabled

Disabled
DS**.En_CILO_Cls
Enabled

Disabled
DirCtrl**.En_CILO_Opn
Enabled

Disabled
DirCtrl**.En_CILO_Cls
Enabled

4.3.3.3 Calculation Principle

1. CB**.En_CILO_Opn

It is used to enable/disable open output of circuit breaker No.** controlled by the interlocking logic.

2. CB**.En_CILO_Cls

It is used to enable/disable closing output of circuit breaker No.** controlled by the interlocking logic.

3. DS**.En_CILO_Opn

It is used to enable/disable open output of disconnector switch No.** controlled by the interlocking
logic.

4. DS**.En_CILO_Cls

It is used to enable/disable closing output of disconnector switch No.** controlled by the interlocking
logic.

5. DirCtrl**.En_CILO_Opn

It is used to enable/disable open output of direct control object No.** controlled by the interlocking
logic.

4-10 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
-28
 4 Control Settings

6. DirCtrl**.En_CILO_Cls

It is used to enable/disable closing output of direct control object No.** controlled by the interlocking
logic.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 4-11

Date: 2023-02-09
 4 Control Settings

4-12 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
-28
 5 Measurement Settings

5 Measurement Settings

Table of Contents

5.1 Function ........................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 5-3

5.2 AC Analog Input Calibration ........................................................................... 5-6

5.2.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 5-6

5.2.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 5-6

5.2.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 5-7

5.3 Energy Metering Settings ............................................................................... 5-8 5

5.3.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 5-8

5.3.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 5-8

5.3.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 5-9

List of Tables

Table 5.1-1 Function settings (single circuit breaker) ............................................................. 5-1

Table 5.1-2 Function settings (double circuit breaker) ........................................................... 5-2

Table 5.2-1 AC calibration settings ............................................................................................ 5-6

Table 5.2-1 Energy metering settings........................................................................................ 5-8

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 5-a

Date: 2023-02-09
 5 Measurement Settings

5-b PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 5 Measurement Settings

5.1 Function

5.1.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsFunction Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalMeas Control SettingsFunction Settings

5.1.2 Setting List

Table 5.1-1 Function settings (single circuit breaker)

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
Prot.En_Alm_ROV
Enabled

Prot.3U0_Alm_ROV 0.0~100.0 0.1 %Un

5
Disabled
Prot.En_Alm_UV
Enabled

Prot.U_Alm_UV 0.0~100.0 0.1 %Un

Prot.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

Disabled
Prot.En_Alm_ROC
Enabled

Prot.3I0_Alm_ROC 0.0~100.0 0.1 %In

Prot.Opt_CT_Measmt Ia-Ib-Ic, Ia-Ic

Prot.ZeroDrift_I 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

Prot.ZeroDrift_PQ 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

3I0Adj.ZeroDrift_I 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

UB1.USyn.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

UL2.USyn.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

UB2.USyn.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 5-1

Date: 2023-02-09
 5 Measurement Settings

Table 5.1-2 Function settings (double circuit breaker)

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
Prot.En_Alm_ROV
Enabled

Prot.3U0_Alm_ROV 0.0~100.0 0.1 %Un

Disabled
Prot.En_Alm_UV
Enabled

Prot.U_Alm_UV 0.0~100.0 0.1 %Un

Prot.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

Disabled
Prot.En_Alm_ROC
Enabled

Disabled

5 Prot.CB1.En_Alm_ROC
Enabled

Disabled
Prot.CB2.En_Alm_ROC
Enabled

Prot.3I0_Alm_ROC 0.0~100.0 0.1 %In

Prot.CB1.3I0_Alm_ROC 0.0~100.0 0.1 %In

Prot.CB2.3I0_Alm_ROC 0.0~100.0 0.1 %In

Ia-Ib-Ic
Prot.Opt_CT_Measmt
Ia-Ic

Ia-Ib-Ic
Prot.CB1.Opt_CT_Measmt
Ia-Ic

Ia-Ib-Ic
Prot.CB2.Opt_CT_Measmt
Ia-Ic

Prot.ZeroDrift_I 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

Prot.CB1.ZeroDrift_I 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

Prot.CB2.ZeroDrift_I 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

Prot.ZeroDrift_PQ 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

Prot.CB1.ZeroDrift_PQ 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

5-2 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 5 Measurement Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Prot.CB2.ZeroDrift_PQ 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

3I0Adj.ZeroDrift_I 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

UB1.USyn.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

UL2.USyn.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

UB2.USyn.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

5.1.3 Calculation Principle

1. Prot.En_Alm_ROV

It is used to enable/disable residual overvoltage supervision.

2. Prot.3U0_Alm_ROV

It is used to set the threshold of residual overvoltage supervision, which is indicated by the
percentage of the rated value.

Its recommended value is 10.0%Un. 5

3. Prot.En_Alm_UV

It is used to enable/disable phase undervoltage supervision.

4. Prot.U_Alm_UV

It is used to set the threshold of phase undervoltage supervision, which is indicated by the
percentage of the rated value.

Its recommended value is 10.0%Un.

5. Prot.ZeroDrift_U

It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the protection voltage due to the
temperature or other environmental factors. The measured value less than this setting will be
regarded as a zero drift and ignored.

6. Prot.En_Alm_ROC

It is used to enable/disable residual overcurrent supervision. (single CB application)

7. Prot.CB1.En_Alm_ROC

It is used to enable/disable residual overcurrent supervision of circuit breaker No.1. (double CBs
application)

8. Prot.CB2.En_Alm_ROC

It is used to enable/disable residual overcurrent supervision of circuit breaker No.2. (double CBs
application)

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 5-3

Date: 2023-02-09
 5 Measurement Settings

9. Prot.3I0_Alm_ROC

It is used to set the threshold of residual overcurrent supervision, which is indicated by the
percentage of the rated value. (single CB application)

Its recommended value is 10.0%In.

10. Prot.CB1.3I0_Alm_ROC

It is used to set the threshold of residual overcurrent supervision for circuit breaker No.1, which is
indicated by the percentage of the rated value. (double CBs application)

Its recommended value is 10.0%In.

11. Prot.CB2.3I0_Alm_ROC

It is used to set the threshold of residual overcurrent supervision for circuit breaker No.2, which is
indicated by the percentage of the rated value. (double CBs application)

Its recommended value is 10.0%In.

12. Prot.Opt_CT_Measmt

5 It is used to select CT wiring mode which used by current measurement. (single CB application)

Ia-Ib-Ic: three-phase mode

Ia-Ic: Ib is calculated according to Ia and Ic, → = −(→ + →).

𝐼𝑏 𝐼𝑎 𝐼𝑐

13. Prot.CB1.Opt_CT_Measmt

It is used to select CT wiring mode for circuit breaker No.1 which used by current measurement.
(double CBs application)

Ia-Ib-Ic: three-phase mode

Ia-Ic: Ib is calculated according to Ia and Ic, → = −(→ + →).

𝐼𝑏 𝐼𝑎 𝐼𝑐

14. Prot.CB2.Opt_CT_Measmt

It is used to select CT wiring mode for circuit breaker No.2 which used by current measurement.
(double CBs application)

Ia-Ib-Ic: three-phase mode

Ia-Ic: Ib is calculated according to Ia and Ic, → = −(→ + →).

𝐼𝑏 𝐼𝑎 𝐼𝑐

15. Prot.ZeroDrift_I

It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the current due to the temperature
or other environmental factors. A measured value less than this setting will be regarded as a zero

5-4 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 5 Measurement Settings

drift and ignored. (single CB application)

Its recommended value is 0.20%.

16. Prot.CB1.ZeroDrift_I

It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the current due to the temperature
or other environmental factors. A measured value less than this setting will be regarded as a zero
drift and ignored. (double CBs application)

Its recommended value is 0.20%.

17. Prot.CB2.ZeroDrift_I

It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the current due to the temperature
or other environmental factors. A measured value less than this setting will be regarded as a zero
drift and ignored. (double CBs application)

Its recommended value is 0.20%.

18. Prot.ZeroDrift_PQ

It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the power due to the temperature or
other environmental factors. A measured value less than this setting will be regarded as a zero drift 5
and ignored. (single CB application)

Its recommended value is 0.50%.

19. Prot.CB1.ZeroDrift_PQ

It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the power due to the temperature or
other environmental factors. A measured value less than this setting will be regarded as a zero drift
and ignored. (double CBs application)

Its recommended value is 0.50%.

20. Prot.CB2.ZeroDrift_PQ

It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the power due to the temperature or
other environmental factors. A measured value less than this setting will be regarded as a zero drift
and ignored. (double CBs application)

Its recommended value is 0.50%.

21. 3I0Adj.ZeroDrift_I

It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the residual current from parallel line
due to the temperature or other environmental factors. A measured value less than this setting will
be regarded as a zero drift and ignored.

Its recommended value is 0.20%.

22. UB1.USyn.ZeroDrift_U

It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the synchronism voltage (UB1) due

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 5-5

Date: 2023-02-09
 5 Measurement Settings

to the temperature or other environmental factors. A measured value less than this setting will be
regarded as a zero drift and ignored.

Its recommended value is 0.20%.

23. UL2.USyn.ZeroDrift_U

It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the synchronism voltage (UL2) due
to the temperature or other environmental factors. A measured value less than this setting will be
regarded as a zero drift and ignored.

Its recommended value is 0.20%.

24. UB2.USyn.ZeroDrift_U

It is used to set the threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of the synchronism voltage (UB2) due
to the temperature or other environmental factors. A measured value less than this setting will be
regarded as a zero drift and ignored.

Its recommended value is 0.20%.

5 5.2 AC Analog Input Calibration

5.2.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsAC Calbr Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalMeas Control SettingsAC Calbr Settings

5.2.2 Setting List

Table 5.2-1 AC calibration settings

Name Range Step Unit

Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Ia 9000~11000 1

Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Ib 9000~11000 1

Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Ic 9000~11000 1

Prot.K_Calbr_Ua 9000~11000 1

Prot.K_Calbr_Ub 9000~11000 1

Prot.K_Calbr_Uc 9000~11000 1

Prot.K_Calbr_Uab 9000~11000 1

Prot.K_Calbr_Ubc 9000~11000 1

5-6 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 5 Measurement Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Prot.K_Calbr_Uca 9000~11000 1

Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Pa -900~11000 1

Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Pb -900~11000 1

Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Pc -900~11000 1

Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Qa -900~11000 1

Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Qb -900~11000 1

Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Qc -900~11000 1

UB1.K_Calbr_U 9000~11000 1

5.2.3 Calculation Principle

Analog input accuracy has been calibrated before delivery, and these 5
settings generally do not need to be set.

1. Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Ia

It is used to set phase-A current input calibration coefficients for circuit breaker No.x.

2. Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Ib

It is used to set phase-B current input calibration coefficients for circuit breaker No.x.

3. Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Ic

It is used to set phase-C current input calibration coefficients for circuit breaker No.x.

4. Prot.K_Calbr_Ua

It is used to set phase-A voltage input calibration coefficients.

5. Prot.K_Calbr_Ub

It is used to set phase-B voltage input calibration coefficients.

6. Prot.K_Calbr_Uc

It is used to set phase-C voltage input calibration coefficients.

7. Prot.K_Calbr_Uab

It is used to set phase-AB voltage input calibration coefficients.

8. Prot.K_Calbr_Ubc

It is used to set phase-BC voltage input calibration coefficients.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 5-7

Date: 2023-02-09
 5 Measurement Settings

9. Prot.K_Calbr_Uca

It is used to set phase-CA voltage input calibration coefficients.

10. Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Pa

It is used to set phase-A active power calibration coefficients for circuit breaker No.x.

11. Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Pb

It is used to set phase-B active power calibration coefficients for circuit breaker No.x.

12. Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Pc

It is used to set phase-C active power calibration coefficients for circuit breaker No.x.

13. Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Qa

It is used to set phase-A reactive power calibration coefficients for circuit breaker No.x.

14. Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Qb

It is used to set phase-B reactive power calibration coefficients for circuit breaker No.x.

5 15. Prot.CBx.K_Calbr_Qc

It is used to set phase-C reactive power calibration coefficients for circuit breaker No.x.

16. UB1.K_Calbr_U

It is used to set single-phse voltage input calibration coefficient for synchronization check, double
bus, etc.

5.3 Energy Metering Settings

5.3.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsEnergy Metering Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalMeas Control SettingsEnergy Metering

Settings

5.3.2 Setting List

Table 5.3-1 Energy metering settings

Name Range Step Unit

MMTR.U2n 0.00~200.00 0.01 V

MMTR.I2n 1~5 1 A

5-8 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 5 Measurement Settings

5.3.3 Calculation Principle

1. MMTR.U2n

It is used to set rated secondary voltage for metering.

2. MMTR.I2n

It is used to set rated secondary current for metering.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 5-9

Date: 2023-02-09
 5 Measurement Settings

5-10 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

Table of Contents

6.1 PMU Global Settings ....................................................................................... 6-1

6.1.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 6-1

6.1.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 6-1

6.2 PMU Communication Settings ....................................................................... 6-3

6.2.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 6-3

6.2.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 6-3

6.2.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 6-5

6.3 PMU Bay Settings ............................................................................................ 6-6

6.3.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 6-6

6.3.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 6-6

6.3.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 6-7

6
6.4 PMU BI Settings ............................................................................................. 6-11
6.4.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 6-11

6.4.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 6-11

6.4.3 Calculation Principle ........................................................................................................... 6-11

6.5 PMU Label Settings ....................................................................................... 6-12

6.5.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................ 6-12

6.5.2 Setting List .......................................................................................................................... 6-12

6.5.3 Calculation Principle ........................................................................................................... 6-13

List of Tables

Table 6.1-1 PMU global settings ................................................................................................ 6-1

Table 6.2-1 PMU communication settings ................................................................................ 6-3

Table 6.3-1 PMU bay settings ..................................................................................................... 6-6

Table 6.4-1 PMU BI settings...................................................................................................... 6-11

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 6-a

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

Table 6.5-1 PMU label settings ................................................................................................. 6-12

6-b PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

6.1 PMU Global Settings

6.1.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsPMU SettingsPMU Global Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalPMU SettingsPMU Global Settings

6.1.2 Setting List

Table 6.1-1 PMU global settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
En_PMU
Enabled

P_Class
Opt_Class_PMU
M_Class

DataRate 10~120 1 fps

6
Substation_PMU Max. 16 characters

N_Chgd_CFG 0~65535 1

Port_TCP 0~65535 1

Port_UDP 1024~65535 1

6.1.3 Calculation Principle

1. En_PMU

It is used to enable/disable the synchrophasor measurement function.

2. Opt_Class_PMU

It is used to select the calculation method of synchrophasor data.

P class: faster response speed

This algorithm adopts a short time window, so its response speed is fast. It is suitable for fast
protection and control applications, but the ability of suppressing the out-of-band signals is poor.

If the response speed is required, please set it as "P_Class"

M class: higher measurement precision

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 6-1

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

This algorithm adopts a long time window, so its accuracy is high for measuring steady and dynamic
signal, and can suppress the out-of-brand signals. However, its response speed is slower than that
when adopting P_Class.

If the measurement accuracy is required, please set it as "M_Class".

Please set the setting according to the actual requirements.

3. DataRate

It is used to set data transmission rate of PMU reporting synchrophasor data to the parent IEDs
(such as, PDC or PMU master station).

The rate is generally equal to or less than the rated frequency of power system.

For the 50Hz system, the selectable rates are 100, 50, 25, 10 frames per second.

For the 60Hz system, the selectable rates are 120, 60, 30, 20, 15, 12, 10 frames per second.

4. Substation_PMU

It is used to set name of substation which is equipped with PMU.

The name will be used in the CFG-1 and CFG-2 frame.

5. N_Chgd_CFG

It is used to indicate the version of CFG of PMU, and inform the client when the CFG-1 has changed.
6 The starting value of the setting is 0, and it should increase by 1 every time CFG-1 is adjusted. For
example, changing the branch name or rating will cause the change of CFG-1, so the setting should
be modified.

6. Port_TCP

It is used to set TCP port for PMU based on IEEE C37.118 standard.

There are three kinds of communication modes available for PMU, TCP, UDP and TCP-UDP mode.
When adopting the TCP or TCP-UDP mode, the TCP port will be used. The port values of all TCP
clients should be consistent with the setting value.

The default port of TCP is 4712, and it is invalid when the setting [PDC**.Opt_Protocol] is set as
"Spontaneous-UDP" or "Commanded-UDP")

The port setting must be configured on the PDC correspondingly.

7. Port_UDP

It is used to set UDP port for PMU based on IEEE C37.118 standard.

There are three kinds of communication modes available for PMU, TCP, UDP and TCP-UDP mode.
When adopting the UDP or TCP-UDP mode, the UDP port will be used. The port values of all UDP
receivers should be consistent with the setting value.

The default port of TCP is 4713, and it is invalid when the setting [PDC**.Opt_Protocol] is set as

6-2 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

"TCP")

The port setting must be configured on the PDC correspondingly.

6.2 PMU Communication Settings

6.2.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsPMU SettingsPMU Communication Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalPMU SettingsPMU Communication

Settings

6.2.2 Setting List

Table 6.2-1 PMU communication settings

Name Range Step Unit

PDC01.Name

PDC01.IP_TCP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

PDC01.IP_UDP_Dest 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
6
PDC01.IP_MulticastSrc 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

None
TCP

PDC01.Opt_Protocol Spontaneous-UDP
TCP-UDP

Commanded-UDP

Unicast

PDC01.Opt_UDP Broadcast

Multicast

PDC01.IDCODE 1~65534

PDC02.Name

PDC02.IP_TCP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

PDC02.IP_UDP_Dest 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

PDC02.IP_MulticastSrc 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

None
PDC02.Opt_Protocol
TCP

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 6-3

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Spontaneous-UDP
TCP-UDP

Commanded-UDP

Unicast
PDC02.Opt_UDP Broadcast
Multicast

PDC02.IDCODE 1~65534

PDC03.Name

PDC03.IP_TCP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

PDC03.IP_UDP_Dest 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

PDC03.IP_MulticastSrc 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

None
TCP
PDC03.Opt_Protocol Spontaneous-UDP
TCP-UDP
Commanded-UDP
Unicast

6 PDC03.Opt_UDP Broadcast
Multicast

PDC03.IDCODE 1~65534

PDC04.Name

PDC04.IP_TCP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

PDC04.IP_UDP_Dest 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

PDC04.IP_MulticastSrc 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255

None
TCP
PDC04.Opt_Protocol Spontaneous-UDP
TCP-UDP
Commanded-UDP
Unicast
PDC04.Opt_UDP Broadcast
Multicast

PDC04.IDCODE 1~65534

6-4 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

6.2.3 Calculation Principle

1. PDC**.Name

It is used to set the name of PDC (Phasor Data Concentrators) connecting with PMU.

The name length should not exceed 20 characters.

2. PDC**.IP_TCP

It is used to set destination IP address of connected PDC** using TCP communication protocol.

This setting is valid when the setting [PDC**.Opt_Protocol] is set as "TCP" or "TCP-UDP". The
communication of PMU is based on whitelisting, only when the IP address of the TCP client has
been set in the PMU, the client has the right to communicate with PMU using TCP communication
protocol.

If the PDC does not exist or the TCP or TCP-UDP mode is not adopted, the IP address can be set
as "0.0.0.0".

Please set the setting according to the actual requirment.

3. PDC**.IP_UDP_Dest

It is used to set destination IP address of connected PDC** using UDP communication protocol.

This setting is valid when the setting [PDC**.Opt_Protocol] is set as "Spontaneous-UDP",

"Commanded-UDP" or "TCP-UDP". The PMU transmits the UDP message to this address. It may
be unicast address, broadcast address or multicast address. It is noted that the IP address should
6
match with the setting [PDC**.Opt_UDP].

Please set the setting according to the actual requirment.

4. PDC**.IP_MulticastSrc

It is used to set the multicast source IP address of PDC** using UDP communication protocol, it is
consistent with some network interface IP address of the device. This network interface uses this
IP address to transmit UDP message to multicast group. Since the IP addresss of the muticast
group and any network interface of the device have the different network segments, this setting
essentially informs the PMU which network interface to send UDP multicast message.

The setting is valid when the setting [PDC**.Opt_Protocol] is set as "Spontaneous-UDP",

"Commanded-UDP" or "TCP-UDP", and the setting [PDC**.Opt_UDP] is set as "Multicast".

It should be set as IP address of the Ethernet port which is chosen to tranmitting UDP multicast
message.

5. PDC**.Opt_Protocol

It is used to select the communication protocol of PDC**.

None: no communication between PDC and PMU.

TCP: in TCP communication mode, configuration frames (CFG-1/2), command frames (CMD), and

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 6-5

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

DATA frames (DATA) defined in the IEEE C37.118 standard are transmitted via TCP connections.
When using TCP mode, the settings [Port_TCP] and [PDC**.IP_TCP] need to be set.

UDP: in UDP communication mode, configuration frames (CFG-1/2), command frames (CMD), and
DATA frames (DATA) defined in the IEEE C37.118 standard are transmitted via UDP messages.

TCP-UDP: in TCP-UDP communication mode, configuration frames (CFG-1/2) and command

frames (CMD) defined in the IEEE C37.118 standard are transmitted via TCP connections, and
DATA frames (DATA) are transmitted via UDP messages.

It shall be consistent with the communication protocol of the PDC at the opposite end. Its
recommended value is "TCP".

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

6. PDC**.Opt_UDP

It is used to select the transmission type using UDP communication protocol

The setting is valid when the setting [PDC**.Opt_Protocol] is set as "UDP" or "TCP-UDP". For the
communication between the PMU and the third-party PDCs, the setting is recommended to be set
as "Multicast".

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

7. PDC**.IDCODE

6 It is used to set ID code of the PDC**.

The setting can identify each PDC for the protocol. Please set the setting according to the site
IDCODE planning, and it should be consistent with the IDCODE of the PDC at the opposite end.

6.3 PMU Bay Settings

6.3.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsPMU SettingsPMU Bay Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalPMU SettingsPMU Bay Settings

6.3.2 Setting List

Table 6.3-1 PMU bay settings

Name Range Step Unit

Name_PMUBay Max. 12 characters

xx.U1n 0.001~1000.000 0.001 kV

6-6 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

Name Range Step Unit

xx.I1n 0.1~20000.0 0.1 A

None

Bay
xx.Opt_UnitType 1
Bus(U_3P)

Bus(U_1P)

U1

Ua
xx.Opt_U_MeasFreq 1
Ub

Uc

Disabled
xx.En_TrigDFR
Enabled

xx.Up_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 Un

xx.U1_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 Un

xx.U2_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 Un

6
xx.U0_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 Un

xx.Up_LowLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 Un

xx.U1_LowLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 Un

xx.Ip_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 In

xx.I1_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 In

xx.I2_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 In

xx.I0_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 0.001 In

xx.f_Diff_Lmt 0.01~10.00 0.01 Hz

xx.df/dt_Lmt 0.01~50.00 0.01 Hz/s

xx is determined by the setting [Name_PMUBay] in the submenu PMUBay

Settings.

6.3.3 Calculation Principle

1. Name_PMUBay

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 6-7

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

It is used to set the name of PMU bay.

This setting together with the [Name_**] (in submenu "PMU Label Settings") form a complete
measurement name, and the total length is no more than 16 characters.

The name of PMU bay is generally composed of station code and bay name, with a total length of
no more than 12 characters, and it is recommended to set the name according to 12 characters.

2. xx.U1n

It is used to set VT primary rated voltage for PMU bay.

3. xx.I1n

It is used to set CT primary rated current for PMU bay.

4. xx.Opt_UnitType

It is used to set the application scenario of AC bay.

The different option corresponds to the different type of measurement quantities.

None: the measuring function is disabled.

Bay: measuring three-phase voltage and three-phase current.

Bus(U_3P): measuring three-phases voltage, the current and power quantities are not measured
and displayed.
6 Bus(U_1P): measuring single-phase voltage, the current and power quantities are not measured
and displayed. Besides, zero-sequence and negative-sequence voltage are not calculated, their
values are fixed as "0".

When the setting is set as "Bus(U_1P)", it is recommended to use the phase-A voltage.

Please set the setting according to the actual AC bay application.

5. xx.Opt_U_MeasFreq

It is used to select base voltage for frequency measurement.

U1: positive-sequence voltage

Ua: phase-A voltage

Ub: phase-B voltage

Uc: phase-C voltage

Its recommended value is "U1", because the frequency measurement function will not be affected
in case of single-phase or two-phase VT failure.

6. xx.En_TrigDFR

It is used to enable/disable trigger disturbance fault recording function in case any following over
limit situation

6-8 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

If the setting is set as "Enabled", the triggering flag will be mapped in "STAT" field of PMU data
frame with a time delay of four power-frequency cycles when the triggering condition is satisfied.
For an independent PMU device, the recording will be performed in the above-mentioned case, but
for the device integrating with the PMU function, the above-mentioned case will not affect the
recording function, the device starts the recording function according to its own criterion.

Its recommended value "Eenabled"

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

7. xx.Up_UpLmt

It is used to set the upper limit of phase voltage.

For some special AC bay, such as the load with frequent fluctuation, the threshold value can be
increased appropriately.

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

8. xx.U1_UpLmt

It is used to set the upper limit of positive sequence voltage.

For some special AC bay, such as the load with frequent fluctuation, the threshold value can be
increased appropriately.

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

9. xx.U2_UpLmt
6
It is used to set the upper limit of negative-sequence voltage.

For some special AC bay, such as the load with frequent fluctuation, the threshold value can be
increased appropriately.

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

10. xx.U0_UpLmt

It is used to set the upper limit of zero sequence voltage.

For some special AC bay, such as the load with frequent fluctuation, the threshold value can be
increased appropriately.

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

11. xx.Up_LowLmt

It is used to set the lower limit of phase voltage.

For some special AC bay, such as the load with frequent fluctuation, the threshold value can be
increased appropriately.

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 6-9

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

12. xx.U1_LowLmt

It is used to set the lower limit of positive sequence voltage

For some special AC bay, such as the load with frequent fluctuation, the threshold value can be
increased appropriately.

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

13. xx.Ip_UpLmt

It is used to set the upper limit of phase current

For some special AC bay, such as the load with frequent fluctuation, the threshold value can be
increased appropriately.

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

14. xx.I1_UpLmt

It is used to set the upper limit of positive sequence current.

For some special AC bay, such as the load with frequent fluctuation, the threshold value can be
increased appropriately.

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

15. xx.I2_UpLmt
6 It is used to set the upper limit of negative sequence current.

For some special AC bay, such as the load with frequent fluctuation, the threshold value can be
increased appropriately.

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

16. xx.I0_UpLmt

It is used to set the upper limit of zero sequence current.

For some special AC bay, such as the load with frequent fluctuation, the threshold value can be
increased appropriately.

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

17. xx.f_Diff_Lmt

It is used to set the limit of frequency deviation.

For some special AC bay, such as the load with frequent fluctuation, the threshold value can be
increased appropriately.

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

18. xx.df/dt_Lmt

It is used to set the limit of rate-of-change of frequency.

6-10 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

For some special AC bay, such as the load with frequent fluctuation, the threshold value can be
increased appropriately.

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

6.4 PMU BI Settings

6.4.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsPMU SettingsPMU BI Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalPMU SettingsPMU BI Settings

6.4.2 Setting List

Table 6.4-1 PMU BI settings

Name Range Step Unit

Name_BI_** Max. 16 characters

Disabled
Link_BI_TrigDFR
Enabled
6
Disabled
BI_**.En_TrigDFR
Enabled

6.4.3 Calculation Principle

1. Name_BI_**

It is used to set the name of binary input** for PMU.

The setting generally composed of station name and binary input name. Its total length should not
exceed 16 characters.

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

2. Link_BI_TrigDFR

It is used to enable/disable disturbance fault recording function in case status changing of any
binary signal for PMU.

If the setting is set as "Enabled", the status of the binary input is changed and its corresponding
setting [BI_**.En_TrigDFR] is set as "Enabled", the triggering flag will be mapped in "STAT" field
of PMU data frame. For an independent PMU device, the recording will be performed in the above-
mentioned case, but for the device integrating with the PMU function, the above-mentioned case

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 6-11

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

will not affect the recording function, the device starts the recording function according to its own
criterion.

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

3. BI_**.En_TrigDFR

It is used to enable/disable disturbance fault recording function in case status changing of the binary
signal BI_** for PMU.

If the setting is set as "Enabled", the status of the binary input is changed and its corresponding
setting [BI_**.En_TrigDFR] is set as "Enabled", the triggering flag will be mapped in "STAT" field
of PMU data frame. For an independent PMU device, the recording will be performed in the above-
mentioned case, but for the device integrating with the PMU function, the above-mentioned case
will not affect the recording function, the device starts the recording function according to its own
criterion.

For a binary input which changes frequently, it is recommended to set as "Disabled".

Please set the setting according to the actual requirement.

6.5 PMU Label Settings

6.5.1 Access Path

6 ⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsPMU SettingsPMU Label Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalPMU SettingsPMU Label Settings

6.5.2 Setting List

Table 6.5-1 PMU label settings

Name Range Step Unit

Name_Amp_Ua Max. 4 characters

Name_Amp_Ub Max. 4 characters

Name_Amp_Uc Max. 4 characters

Name_Amp_U0 Max. 4 characters

Name_Amp_U1 Max. 4 characters

Name_Amp_U2 Max. 4 characters

Name_Amp_Ia Max. 4 characters

6-12 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Name_Amp_Ib Max. 4 characters

Name_Amp_Ic Max. 4 characters

Name_Amp_I0 Max. 4 characters

Name_Amp_I1 Max. 4 characters

Name_Amp_I2 Max. 4 characters

Name_Ang_Ua Max. 4 characters

Name_Ang_Ub Max. 4 characters

Name_Ang_Uc Max. 4 characters

Name_Ang_U0 Max. 4 characters

Name_Ang_U1 Max. 4 characters

Name_Ang_U2 Max. 4 characters

Name_Ang_Ia Max. 4 characters

Name_Ang_Ib Max. 4 characters

Name_Ang_Ic Max. 4 characters

6
Name_Ang_I0 Max. 4 characters

Name_Ang_I1 Max. 4 characters

Name_Ang_I2 Max. 4 characters

Name_f Max. 4 characters

Name_df/dt Max. 4 characters

Name_P Max. 4 characters

Name_Q Max. 4 characters

6.5.3 Calculation Principle

1. Name_Amp_Ua

It is used to set the label for amplitude of phase-A voltage phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 6-13

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

2. Name_Amp_Ub

It is used to set the label for amplitude of phase-B voltage phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

3. Name_Amp_Uc

It is used to set the label for amplitude of phase-C voltage phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

4. Name_Amp_U0

It is used to set the label for amplitude of zero-sequence voltage phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".
6 It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

5. Name_Amp_U1

It is used to set the label r amplitude of positive-sequence voltage phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

6. Name_Amp_U2

It is used to set the label for amplitude of negative-sequence voltage phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

6-14 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

7. Name_Amp_Ia

It is used to set the label for amplitude of phase-A current phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

8. Name_Amp_Ib

It is used to set the label for amplitude of phase-B current phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

9. Name_Amp_Ic

It is used to set the label for amplitude of phase-C current phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".
6
Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

10. Name_Amp_I0

It is used to set the label for amplitude of zero-sequence current phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

11. Name_Amp_I1

It is used to set the label for amplitude of positive-sequence current phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 6-15

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

12. Name_Amp_I2

It is used to set the label for amplitude of negative-sequence current phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

13. Name_Ang_Ua

It is used to set the label for angle of phase-A voltage phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

14. Name_Ang_Ub

It is used to set the label for angle of phase-B voltage phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".
6 It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

15. Name_Ang_Uc

It is used to set the label for angle of phase-C voltage phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

16. Name_Ang_U0

It is used to set the label for angle of zero-sequence voltage phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

6-16 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

17. Name_Ang_U1

It is used to set the label for angle of positive-sequence voltage phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

18. Name_Ang_U2

It is used to set the label for angle of negative-sequence voltage phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

19. Name_Ang_Ia

It is used to set the label for angle of phase-A current phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".
6
Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

20. Name_Ang_Ib

It is used to set the label for angle of phase-B current phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

21. Name_Ang_Ic

It is used to set the label for angle of phase-C current phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 6-17

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

22. Name_Ang_I0

It is used to set the label for angle of zero-sequence current phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

23. Name_Ang_I1

It is used to set the label for angle of positive-sequence current phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

24. Name_Ang_I2

It is used to set the label for angle of negative-sequence current phasor.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".
6 It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

25. Name_f

It is used to set the label for bay frequency.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

26. Name_df/dt

It is used to set the label for bay rate-of-change of frequency.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

6-18 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

27. Name_P

Label for bay active power.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

28. Name_Q

It is used to set the label for bay reactive power.

The setting will affect the name of the corresponding measurement quantity in the submenu "PMU
Bay Settings".

It is recommended to adopt the form "-" + "the type of the measurement quantity".

Please set the setting according to the actual measured quantity.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 6-19

Date: 2023-02-09
 6 Synchrophasor Measurement Settings

6-20 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 7 Travelling-Wave Fault Location Settings

7 Travelling-Wave Fault Location Settings

Table of Contents

7.1 Access Path ..................................................................................................... 7-1

7.2 Setting List ....................................................................................................... 7-1
7.3 Calculation Principle ....................................................................................... 7-1

List of Tables

Table 7.2-1 Travelling wave fault location settings .................................................................. 7-1

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 7-1

Date: 2023-02-09
 7 Travelling-Wave Fault Location Settings

7-2 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 7 Travelling-Wave Fault Location Settings

7.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsTWFL Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingTWFL Settings

7.2 Setting List

Table 7.2-1 Travelling wave fault location settings

Name Range Step Unit

TWFL.Rmt.Substation

TWFL.Velocity_Set 100.00~300.00 0.01 m/us

TWFL.I_set 0.01~30.00 0.01 A

Disabled
TWFL.En_HybridLine
Enabled

TWFL.SectionA.LineLength 0.00~655.35 0.01 km

TWFL.SectionB.LineLength 0.00~655.35 0.01 km

TWFL.SectionC.LineLength 0.00~655.35 0.01 km

7
TWFL.SectionA.Velocity_Set 100.00~300.00 0.01 m/us

TWFL.SectionB.Velocity_Set 100.00~300.00 0.01 m/us

TWFL.SectionC.Velocity_Set 100.00~300.00 0.01 m/us

Disabled
TWFL.En_Alm
Enabled

7.3 Calculation Principle

1. TWFL.Rmt.Substation

It is used to set the name of remote substation.

Please set the setting according to the actual substation name in the remote end.

2. TWFL.Velocity_Set

It is used to set the velocity of the travelling wave.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 7-1

Date: 2023-02-09
 7 Travelling-Wave Fault Location Settings

Please set the setting according to the actual TW velocity.

It is valid when the setting [TWFL.En_HybridLine] is set as "0". If the setting [TWFL.En_HybridLine]
is set as "1", the velocity of different section is determined by the settings
[TWFL.SectionA.Velocity_Set], [TWFL.SectionB.Velocity_Set], [TWFL.SectionC.Velocity_Set]
respectively.

It recommends measuring the actual TW velocity when commissioning the device. With the circuit
breakers open at both sides, close the local circuit breaker to energize the line. Check the local TW
recording, find the first moment (t1) when the current obviously changes, and find the second
L
moment (t2) when the current obviously changes near the time t1 + 2 ×
C

Where:

L is the length of the line, unit: m

C is the estimated TW velocity, 294m/us for the overhead line, 150m/us for the cable

𝐿
[𝑥𝑥. 𝑇𝑊𝐹𝐿. 𝑉𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 2 ×
𝑡2 − 𝑡1

3. TWFL.I_set

It is used to set the pickup threshold of TW current. Usually, it can adopt the default value.

The settin can be set as 8% of the maximum TW current. The maximum traveling wave current can
be calculated according to the rated voltage of the line and the line's characteristic impedance. The
equation is as follows:

√2 × 𝑈𝐿
7 𝑖𝑡𝑤_𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 2 ×
√3
/𝑍𝑐

Where:

𝑈𝐿 is the rated phase-to-phase voltage

𝑍𝑐 is the characteristic impedance of the line

The factor 2 is multiplied to consider that if the traveling wave has positive total reflection at the
busbar of the measuring point, the amplitude of the traveling wave will be twice that of the incident
wave.

The secondary value is: 𝑖′𝑡𝑤_𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑖𝑡𝑤_𝑚𝑎𝑥 × 𝐼2𝑛 /𝐼1𝑛

Where:

𝐼1𝑛 is CT primary rated current

𝐼2𝑛 is CT secondary rated current

4. TWFL.En_HybridLine

It is used to enable/disable travelling-wave fault location for hybrid lines, and the device supports

7-2 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 7 Travelling-Wave Fault Location Settings

up to 3-sections hybrid lines.

For 3-sections hybrid lines

Local side Remote side

L1, v1 L2, v2 L3, v3

M N

For 2-sections hybrid lines

Local side Remote side

L1, v1 L2, v2

5. TWFL.Section*.LineLength (*=A, B, C)

It is used to respectively set the length of section A, section B, section C in hybrid lines. They are
valid after the setting [TWFL.En_HybridLine] is set as "Enabled"

For 2-sections hybrid lines, only the settings [TWFL.SectionA.LineLength] and

[TWFL.SectionB.LineLength] are required be set and the setting [TWFL.SectionC.LineLength]
must be set as "0"

For 3-sections hybrid lines, the settings of local side and remote side should be set according the 7
table as below.

Item Local side Remote side

TWFL.SectionA.LineLength L1 L3

TWFL.SectionB.LineLength L2 L2

TWFL.SectionC.LineLength L3 L1

For 2-sections hybrid lines, the settings of local side and remote side should be set according the
table as below.

Item Local side Remote side

TWFL.SectionA.LineLength L1 L2

TWFL.SectionB.LineLength L2 L1

TWFL.SectionC.LineLength 0 0

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 7-3

Date: 2023-02-09
 7 Travelling-Wave Fault Location Settings

When the setting [TWFL.En_HybridLine] is set as "0", the line length adopts
the value of the setting [LineLength].

determined by the setting [Name_PMUBay] in the submenu PMUBay

Settings.

6. TWFL.Section*.Velocity_Set (*=A, B, C)

It is used to respectively set the TW velocity of section A, section B, section C in hybrid lines. They
are valid after the setting [TWFL.En_HybridLine] is set as "Enabled"

Because the refraction and reflection rule of travelling wave in hybrid lines is very complicated, it
will be difficult to use the above calculation method of the setting [TWFL.Velocity_Se]. It is
suggested to estimate the wave velocity of each section according to the exact inductance and
capacitance parameters of the line: 𝑣 = 1/√𝐿𝐶

For 3-sections hybrid lines, the settings of local side and remote side should be set according the
table as below.

Item Local side Remote side

TWFL.SectionA.Velocity_set v1 v3

TWFL.SectionB.Velocity_set v2 v2

TWFL.SectionC.Velocity_set v3 v1

For 2-sections hybrid lines, the settings of local side and remote side should be set according the
7 table as below.

Item Local side Remote side

TWFL.SectionA.Velocity_set v1 v2

TWFL.SectionB.Velocity_set v2 v1

TWFL.SectionC.Velocity_set Not set Not set

7. TWFL.En_Alm

It is used to enable/disable TW alarm. When the setting is set as "0", all alarms of TWFL will not be
issued.

7-4 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 8 Supervision Settings

8 Supervision Settings

Table of Contents

8.1 VT Circuit Supervision (VTS) .......................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 8-1

8.1.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 8-1

8.2 CT Circuit Supervision (CTS) ......................................................................... 8-2

8.2.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 8-2

8.2.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 8-2

8.2.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 8-3

8.3 Circuit Breaker Supervision (SCBR) .............................................................. 8-3

8.3.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 8-3

8.3.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 8-3

8.3.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 8-6

List of Tables

Table 8.1-1Supervision settings (VT) ........................................................................................ 8-1

Table 8.2-1Supervision settings (CT) ........................................................................................ 8-2

Table 8.3-1 Circuit breaker supversion settings ...................................................................... 8-3 8

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 8-1

Date: 2023-02-09
 8 Supervision Settings

8-2 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 8 Supervision Settings

8.1 VT Circuit Supervision (VTS)

8.1.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsSuperv Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalGlobal SettingsSuperv Settings

8.1.2 Setting List

Table 8.1-1Supervision settings (VT)

Name Range Step Unit Default

Disabled
VTS.En Enabled
Enabled

Bus
VTS.Opt_VT Bus
Bay

VTS.t_DPU 0.200~30.000 0.001 s 1.250

VTS.t_DDO 0.200~30.000 0.001 s 10.000

VTS.U1_Set 0.00~100.00 0.01 V 30.00

VTS.3U0_Set 0.00~100.00 0.01 V 8.00

VTS.U2_Set 0.00~100.00 0.01 V 8.00

8.1.3 Calculation Principle 8

1. VTS.En

It is used to enable/disable VT circuit supervision.

2. VTS.Opt_VT

It is used to select voltage source for protection calculation, busbar VT or line VT.

Bus: busbar VT

Bay: bay VT

3. VTS.t_DPU

It is used to set pickup time delay of VT circuit supervision.

Its recommended value is 1.25s.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 8-1

Date: 2023-02-09
 8 Supervision Settings

4. VTS.t_DDO

It is used to set dropoff time delay of VT circuit supervision.

Its recommended value is 10s.

5. VTS.U1_Set

It is used to set positive-sequence voltage setting of VT circuit supervision.

Its recommended value is 30V.

6. VTS.3U0_Set

It is used to set zero-sequence voltage setting of VT circuit supervision.

Its recommended value is 8V.

7. VTS.U2_Set

It is used to set negative-sequence voltage setting of VT circuit supervision.

Its recommended value is 8V.

8.2 CT Circuit Supervision (CTS)

8.2.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsSuperv Settings

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalGlobal SettingsSuperv Settings

8.2.2 Setting List

8 Table 8.2-1Supervision settings (CT)

Name Range Step Unit

CBx.CTS.3I0_Set 0.00~200.00 0.01 A

CBx.CTS.3U0_Set 0.00~200.00 0.01 V

CBx.CTS.t_DPU 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

CBx.CTS.t_DDO 0.000~100.000 0.001 s

Disabled
CBx.CTS.En
Enabled

8-2 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 8 Supervision Settings

8.2.3 Calculation Principle

1. CBx.CTS.3I0_Set

It is used to set zero-sequence current setting of CT circuit supervision.

It should be greater than the maximum unbalanced current and less than load current, at the same
time, it should be sensitive enough.

Its recommended value is 0.1A (the secondary rated current is 1A)

2. CBx.CTS.3U0_Set

It is used to set zero-sequence voltage setting of CT circuit supervision.

It should be greater than the maximum unbalanced voltage, and it should be sensitive enough.

Its recommended value is 30V.

3. CBx.CTS.t_DPU

It is used to set pickup time delay of CT circuit supervision.

4. CBx.CTS.t_DDO

It is used to set dropoff time delay of CT circuit supervision.

5. CBx.CTS.En

It is used to set enable/disable CT circuit supervision.

8.3 Circuit Breaker Supervision (SCBR)

8.3.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsSCBR Settings 8

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalMeas Control SettingsSCBR Settings

8.3.2 Setting List

Table 8.3-1 Circuit breaker supversion settings

Name Range Step Unit

CBx.SCBR.I1n 1~60000 1 A

CBx.SCBR.I2n 1~5 1 A

CBx.SCBR.N_Opn_Init 0~1000000 1

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 8-3

Date: 2023-02-09
 8 Supervision Settings

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
CBx.SCBR.En_Alm_N_Opn
Enabled

CBx.SCBR.Th_Alm_N_Opn 0~1000000 1

Disabled
CBx.SCBR.En_Wrn_N_Opn
Enabled

CBx.SCBR.Th_Wrn_N_Opn 0~1000000 1

CBx.SCBR.t_Opn_Comp 0~500 1 ms

CBx.SCBR.t_Cls_Comp 0~500 1 ms

Disabled
CBx.SCBR.En_Alm_t_Opn
Enabled

CBx.SCBR.Th_Alm_t_Opn 0~10000 1 ms

Disabled
CBx.SCBR.En_Wrn_t_Opn
Enabled

CBx.SCBR.Th_Wrn_t_Opn 0~10000 1 ms

Disabled
CBx.SCBR.En_Alm_t_Cls
Enabled

CBx.SCBR.Th_Alm_t_Cls 0~10000 1 ms

Disabled
CBx.SCBR.En_Wrn_t_Cls

8
Enabled

CBx.SCBR.Th_Wrn_t_Cls 0~10000 1 ms

CBx.SCBR.RemainLife_Init 0~100000 1

Disabled
CBx.SCBR.En_Alm_RemainLife
Enabled

CBx.SCBR.Th_Alm_RemainLife 0~10000 1 ms

CBx.SCBR.I_Rated_Life 0~1000 0.1 kA

CBx.SCBR.I_02_Life 0~1000 0.1 kA

CBx.SCBR.I_03_Life 0~1000 0.1 kA

CBx.SCBR.I_04_Life 0~1000 0.1 kA

8-4 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 8 Supervision Settings

Name Range Step Unit

CBx.SCBR.I_05_Life 0~1000 0.1 kA

CBx.SCBR.I_06_Life 0~1000 0.1 kA

CBx.SCBR.I_07_Life 0~1000 0.1 kA

CBx.SCBR.I_08_Life 0~1000 0.1 kA

CBx.SCBR.I_09_Life 0~1000 0.1 kA

CBx.SCBR.I_10_Life 0~1000 0.1 kA

CBx.SCBR.I_11_Life 0~1000 0.1 kA

CBx.SCBR.I_12_Life 0~1000 0.1 kA

CBx.SCBR.I_13_Life 0~1000 0.1 kA

CBx.SCBR.I_14_Life 0~1000 0.1 kA

CBx.SCBR.I_15_Life 0~1000 0.1 kA

CBx.SCBR.I_Fault_Life 0~1000 0.1 kA

CBx.SCBR.Num_Rated_Life 0-100000 1

CBx.SCBR.Num_02_Life 0-100000 1

CBx.SCBR.Num_03_Life 0-100000 1

CBx.SCBR.Num_04_Life 0-100000 1

CBx.SCBR.Num_05_Life 0-100000 1

CBx.SCBR.Num_06_Life 0-100000 1

CBx.SCBR.Num_07_Life 0-100000 1
8
CBx.SCBR.Num_08_Life 0-100000 1

CBx.SCBR.Num_09_Life 0-100000 1

CBx.SCBR.Num_10_Life 0-100000 1

CBx.SCBR.Num_11_Life 0-100000 1

CBx.SCBR.Num_12_Life 0-100000 1

CBx.SCBR.Num_13_Life 0-100000 1

CBx.SCBR.Num_14_Life 0-100000 1

CBx.SCBR.Num_15_Life 0-100000 1

CBx.SCBR.Num_Fault_Life 0-100000 1

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 8-5

Date: 2023-02-09
 8 Supervision Settings

Name Range Step Unit

CBx.SCBR.CurrExponent 0.5~3.0 0.1

CBx.SCBR.Abr_Init 0~10000000 0.01

Disabled
CBx.SCBR.En_Alm_Abr
Enabled

CBx.SCBR.Th_Alm_Abr 0~10000000 0.01

Disabled
CBx.SCBR.En_Wrn_Abr
Enabled

CBx.SCBR.Th_Alm_Abr 0~10000000 0.01

8.3.3 Calculation Principle

1. CBx.SCBR.I1n

It is used to set the primary rated current for the circuit breaker supervision.

2. CBx.SCBR.I2n

It is used to set the secondary rated current for the circuit breaker supervision.

3. CBx.SCBR.N_Opn_Init

It is used to set initial counting number of CB's trip counter

4. CBx.SCBR.En_Alm_N_Opn

It is used to enable/disable the out-of-limit alarm for the counting result of CB's trip counter.

5. CBx.SCBR.Th_Alm_N_Opn

8 It is used to set the threshold of out-of-limit alarm for the counting result of CB's trip counter.

6. CBx.SCBR.En_Wrn_N_Opn

It is used to enable/disable the out-of-limit warning for the counting result of CB's trip counter.

7. CBx.SCBR.Th_Wrn_N_Opn

It is used to set the threshold of the out-of-limit warning for the counting result of CB's trip counter.

8. CBx.SCBR.t_Opn_Comp

It is used to set the compensation factor for the travel time of CB's opening contact.

9. CBx.SCBR.t_Cls_Comp

It is used to set the compensation factor for the travel time of CB's closing contact.

10. CBx.SCBR.En_Alm_t_Opn

8-6 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 8 Supervision Settings

It is used to enable/disable the overtime alarm for the travel time of CB's opening contact.

11. CBx.SCBR.Th_Alm_t_Opn

It is used to set the threshold of overtime alarm for the travel time of CB's opening contact.

12. CBx.SCBR.En_Wrn_t_Opn

It is used to enable/disable the overtime warning for the travel time of CB's opening contact.

13. CBx.SCBR.Th_Wrn_t_Opn

It is used to set the threshold of overtime warning for the travel time of CB's opening contact.

14. CBx.SCBR.En_Alm_t_Cls

It is used to enable/disable the overtime alarm for the travel time of CB's closing contact.

15. CBx.SCBR.Th_Alm_t_Cls

It is used to set the threshold of overtime alarm for the travel time of CB's closing contact.

16. CBx.SCBR.En_Wrn_t_Cls

It is used to enable/disable the overtime warning for the travel time of CB's closing contact.

17. CBx.SCBR.Th_Wrn_t_Cls

It is used to set the threshold of overtime warning for the travel time of CB's closing contact.

18. CBx.SCBR.RemainLife_Init

It is used to set initial value of CB remaining life.

Generally, the setting shall be set according to the actual number of available operations

19. CBx.SCBR.En_Alm_RemainLife

It is used to enable/disable the alarm of CB remaining life. 8

20. CBx.SCBR.Th_Alm_RemainLife

It is used to set the alarm threshold of CB remaining life.

21. CBx.SCBR.I_Rated_Life

It is used to set the rated current of the initial point on CB maintenance curve.

22. CBx.SCBR.I_**_Life (**-02~15)

It is used to set the characteristic current of the point No.** on CB maintenance curve

Generally, the setting shall be set according to the curve of operation times and tripping current.

23. CBx.SCBR.I_Fault_Life

It is used to set the fault current of the terminal point on CB maintenance curve.

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 8-7

Date: 2023-02-09
 8 Supervision Settings

24. CBx.SCBR.Num_Rated_Life

It is used to set the operating times corresponding to the rated current of the initial point on CB
maintenance curve.

25. CBx.SCBR.Num_**_Life (**=02~15)

It is used to set the operating times corresponding to the characteristic current of the point No.**
on CB maintenance curve.

26. CBx.SCBR.Num_Fault_Life

It is used to set the operating times corresponding to the fault current of the terminal point on CB
maintenance curve.

27. CBx.SCBR.CurrExponent

It is used to set the current exponent factor to calculate CB's accumulated abrasion.

28. CBx.SCBR.Abr_Init

It is used to set the initial value of CB's accumulated abrasion.

29. CBx.SCBR.En_Alm_Abr

It is used to enable/disable the out-of-limit alarm of CB's accumulated abrasion.

30. CBx.SCBR.Th_Alm_Abr

It is used to set the threshold of out-of-limit alarm of CB's accumulated abrasion.

31. CBx.SCBR.En_Wrn_Abr

It is used to enable/disable the out-of-limit warning of CB's accumulated abrasion.

32. CBx.SCBR.Th_Alm_Abr

It is used to set the threshold of out-of-limit warning of CB's accumulated abrasion.

8-8 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 8 Supervision Settings

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 8-9

Date: 2023-02-09
 9 Logic Links

9 Logic Links

Table of Contents

9.1 Function Links ................................................................................................. 9-1

9.1.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 9-1

9.1.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 9-1

9.2 GOOSE Send Links ......................................................................................... 9-2

9.2.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 9-2

9.2.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 9-2

9.2.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 9-2

9.3 GOOSE Receive Links..................................................................................... 9-3

9.3.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 9-3

9.3.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 9-3

9.3.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 9-3

9.4 SV Receive Links ............................................................................................. 9-4

9.4.1 Access Path .......................................................................................................................... 9-4

9.4.2 Setting List ............................................................................................................................ 9-4

9.4.3 Calculation Principle ............................................................................................................. 9-5

List of Tables

Table 9.1-1 Function links........................................................................................................... 9-1

Table 9.2-1 GOOSE sending links.............................................................................................. 9-2

9
Table 9.3-1 GOOSE receiving links............................................................................................ 9-3

Table 9.4-1 SV receiving links .................................................................................................... 9-4

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 9-a

Date: 2023-02-09
 9 Logic Links

9-b PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
-07-13
 9 Logic Links

9.1 Function Links

9.1.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalLogic LinksFunction Links

9.1.2 Setting List

Table 9.1-1 Function links

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
Link_01
Enabled

Disabled
Link_02
Enabled

Disabled
Link_03
Enabled

Disabled
Link_04
Enabled

Disabled
Link_05
Enabled

Disabled
Link_06
Enabled

Disabled
Link_07
Enabled
9
Disabled
Link_08
Enabled

9.1.3 Calculation Principle

1. Link_xx

Function link setting xx. (xx from 01 to 08)

These function link settings can be used for logic programming via PCS-Studio configuration tool

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 9-1

Date: 2023-02-09
11-22
 9 Logic Links

to convenient to enable or disable the function element, please refer to "Function Link in Application
Manual"

This logic link setting can also be configured by remote control command from local SCADA system,
master station in control center, etc.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

9.2 GOOSE Send Links

9.2.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Send Links

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalLogic LinksGOOSE Send Links

9.2.2 Setting List

Table 9.2-1 GOOSE sending links

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
**.GLink_Send
Enabled

9.2.3 Calculation Principle

1. Bxx.Name_**_GCommLink.GLink_Send

It is used to enable/disable corresponding GOOSE sending, ** is the user-defined description.

** can be defined by editing the "English Description" in the "Basic Information" page. Now
corresponding ** in the above table will change simultaneously. Please refer to "Logic Symbols in
Application Manual".

This link setting can also be configured by remote control command from local SCADA system,
9 master station in control center, etc.

If this logic link setting is configured as "Disabled", all the sent GOOSE data will be cleared to 0.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

These settings will be invisible unless the following operations are executed.

1. GOOSE communication in station level, "GOOSE (Slot 01)", or

GOOSE communication in process level, "GOOSE (Slot 02)" is

9-2 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 9 Logic Links

enabled by PCS-Studio. Please refer to "System Config in Application

Manual".

2. Instantiate the logic symbol of logic link for GOOSE sending. PCS-
Studio provides configurable logic symbols of logic link for sending
(single input or multiple input). The corresponding setting item (GOOSE
sending link) can be automatically added to "GOOSE Send Links"
when each adding a logic symbol, and its name can be defined by
editing the "English Description". Please refer to "Logic Symbols in
Application Manual"

9.3 GOOSE Receive Links

9.3.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Recv Links

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalLogic LinksGOOSE Recv Links

9.3.2 Setting List

Table 9.3-1 GOOSE receiving links

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
GLink_RecvSim
Enabled

Disabled
Bxx.Name_**_GCommLink.GLink_Recv
Enabled

9.3.3 Calculation Principle

1. GLink_RecvSim

It is used to enable/disable the allowance to accept simulated GOOSE messages. 9

Disabled: not receiving simulated message (simulation=0)

Enabled: receiving simulated message (simulation=1)

This logic link setting can also be configured by remote control command from local SCADA system,
master station in control center, etc.

2. Bxx.Name_**_GCommLink.GLink_Recv

It is used to enable/disable GOOSE receiving link**

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 9-3

Date: 2023-02-09
11-22
 9 Logic Links

"Bxx.Name_**_GCommLink" is the user-defined name of the GOOSE communication link of the

module located in slot No.xx, and it is determined by the label setting [Bxx.Name_**_GCommLink].

This link setting can also be configured by remote control command from local SCADA system,
master station in control center, etc.

If this logic link setting is configured as "Disabled", the alarm signals "GAlm_ADisc",
"GAlm_BDisc", "GAlm_Maint_Unmatched" of this GOOSE communication link will NOT be
processed and issued.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

These settings will be invisible unless GOOSE communication in station

level, "GOOSE (Slot 01)", or GOOSE communication in process level,
"GOOSE (Slot 02)" is enabled by PCS-Studio. Please refer to "System
Config in Application Manual".

PCS-Studio provides configurable logic symbols of logic link for GOOSE

receiving (single input or multiple input). The corresponding setting item
(GOOSE receiving link) can be automatically added to "GOOSE Recv
Links" when each adding a logic symbol, and its name can be defined by
editing the "English Description". Please refer to "Logic Symbols in
Application Manual"

9.4 SV Receive Links

9.4.1 Access Path

⚫ LCD

MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksSV Recv Links

⚫ PCS-Studio

Project NodeDevice NodeSettingGlobalLogic LinksSV Recv Links

9 9.4.2 Setting List

Table 9.4-1 SV receiving links

Name Range Step Unit

Disabled
SVLink_RecvSim
Enabled

Disabled
Bxx.Name_**_SVCommLink.SVLink_Recv
Enabled

9-4 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 9 Logic Links

9.4.3 Calculation Principle

1. SVLink_RecvSim

It is used to enable/disable the allowance to accept simulated SV messages.

Disabled: not receiving simulated message (simulation=0)

Enabled: receiving simulated message (simulation=1)

This logic link setting can also be configured by remote control command from local SCADA system,
master station in control center, etc.

2. Bxx.Name_**_SVCommLink.SVLink_Recv

It is used to enable/disable SV receiving link**.

"Bxx.Name_**_SVCommLink" is the user-defined name of the SV communication link of the

module located in slot No.xx, and it is determined by the label setting [Bxx.Name_**_SVCommLink].

This link setting can also be configured by remote control command from local SCADA system,
master station in control center, etc.

If this logic link setting is configured as "Disabled", the alarm signals "SVAlm_ADisc",
"SVAlm_BDisc", "SVAlm_Maint_Unmatched" of this SV communication link will NOT be
processed and issued.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

These settings will be invisible unless "Sampling Mode" is chosen as "B:

Non-conventional instrument transformer" by PCS-Studio. Please refer to
"MOT Selection in Application Manual".

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 9-5

Date: 2023-02-09
11-22
 9 Logic Links

9-6 PCS-931S Line Differential Relay

Date: 2023-02-09
 9 Logic Links

PCS-931S Line Differential Relay 1

Date: 2023-02-09
11-22